Monitor Mindray PDF

FCC ID: ZLZ-EPM
User Manual
Patient Monitor
ePM 15M, ePM 12M, ePM 10M, ePM 15, ePM 12, ePM 10
Mindray
Shenzhen Mindray BIO-Medical electronics Co.,LTD.

Intellectual Property Statement
Shenzhen Mindray BIO-Medical electronics Co.,LTD.(hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual
property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by
copyright or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of
others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of the
information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly
forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other derivative work of
this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
is the trademark, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China and other countries. All other
trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for informational or editorial purposes. They are the
property of their respective owners.
This posting serves as notice under 35 U.S.C.§287(a) for Mindray patents: http://www.mindrayna.com/patents.
Manufacturer’s Responsibility
Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:
■ all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are conducted by
Mindray authorized personnel;
■ the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local
requirements;
■ the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
WARNING
• Only skilled/trained clinical professionals should operate this equipment.
• It is important for the hospital or organization that uses this equipment to perform a recommended
service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.
Service
Mindray maintains a network of service representatives and factory-trained distributors. Prior to requesting
service, perform a complete operational check of the instrument to verify proper control settings. If operational
problems continue to exist, contact Mindray service.
In North America contact the Service Department at (800) 288-2121, ext: 8116 for Technical Support or (201)
995-8000 for assistance in determining the nearest field service location.
Please include the instrument model number, the serial number, and a description of the problem with all
requests for service.
Any questions regarding the warranty should be directed to the local sales or service representative.
II
Preface
Manual Purpose
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its
function and intended use. Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper product performance and
correct operation and ensures patient and operator safety.
This manual is based on the maximum configuration and therefore some contents may not apply to the product.
If you have any question, please contact Mindray.
This manual is an integral part of the product. It should always be kept close to the equipment so that it can be
obtained conveniently when needed.
Intended Audience
This manual is geared for clinical professionals who are expected to have a working knowledge of medical
procedures, practices and terminology as required for monitoring of patients.
Illustrations
All illustrations in this manual serve as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect the setup or data
displayed on the patient monitor.
Conventions
■ Italic text is used in this manual to quote the referenced manuals, chapters, sections and formulas.
■ Bold text is used to indicate the screen texts and names of hard keys.
■ → is used to indicate operational procedures.
IV
1 Safety
1.1 Safety Information
WARNING
• Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
• Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in minor personal
injury or product/property damage.
NOTE
• Provides application tips or other useful information that does not involve patient or user risk.
1.1.1 Warnings
WARNING
• Patient with a pacemaker – on ventricular paced patients, episodes of Ventricular Tachycardia may
not always be detected. Do not rely entirely upon the system’s automated arrhythmia detection
algorithm. Keep pacemaker patients under close surveillance.
• This equipment is used for a single patient at a time.
• To avoid explosion hazards, do not use the equipment in the presence of oxygen-rich atmospheres,
flammable anesthetics, or other flammable agents.
• Do not touch the equipment’s metal parts or connectors when in contact with the patient; otherwise
patient injury may result.
• Never mix patient electrode types or brands. Dissimilar metals or other incompatibilities may cause
considerable baseline drift and may increase trace recovery time after defibrillation.
• To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedure, ensure that the monitor’s
cables and transducers never come into contact with the electro-surgery unit (ESU).
• The neutral electrode of the electro-surgery unit (ESU) shall properly contact the patient. Otherwise,
burns may result.
• MR unsafe: the N Series monitors are not intended to be used within the Magnetic Resonance (MR)
environment.
• Before connecting the equipment to the mains power, ensure that the voltage and frequency ratings
of the power line are the same as those indicated on the equipment’s label or in this manual.
• Before putting the system into operation, the operator must verify that the equipment, connecting
cables, and accessories are in correct working order and operating condition.
• To avoid risk of electric shock, the equipment must only be connected to mains power with
protective earth, or operated on battery power.
• Do not touch the patient and live parts simultaneously. Otherwise patient injury may result.
• Do not touch the patient or metal parts in contact with the patient during defibrillation. Otherwise
serious injury or death could result.
• Do not open the equipment housings. All servicing and future upgrades must be carried out by
trained and authorized personnel.
1-1
• Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Turning the alarm
volume to a low level or off may result in a hazard to the patient. Always keep the patient under
close surveillance.
• Alarm settings should be customized according to patient situations.
• Do not place the equipment or accessories in any position that might cause it to fall on the patient.
• Do not start or operate the equipment unless the setup was verified to be correct.
• To avoid inadvertent disconnection, route all cables in a way to prevent a stumbling hazard. Wrap
and secure excess cabling to reduce risk of entanglement by patients or personnel. The
physiological data and alarm messages displayed on the equipment are for reference only and
cannot be directly used for diagnostic interpretation. The equipment should not be used as the sole
basis for medical decisions. It must be used in conjunction with clinical signs and symptom. If any
measurement seems questionable, first check the patient’s vital signs by alternate means and then
check the equipment for proper functioning.
1.1.2 Cautions
CAUTION
• Use only parts and accessories specified in this manual.
• Disposable accessories are not designed to be reused. Reuse may cause a risk of contamination and
affect the measurement accuracy.
• Ensure that the equipment is supplied with continuous electric power during operation from the
mains power or batteries. Sudden power failure may cause data loss.
• When no battery is installed, ensure that the monitor is supplied with continuous electric power
during operation. Sudden power failure may lead to data loss.
• This equipment is intended for single patient use.
• Store and use the equipment in specified environmental condition. The monitor and accessories
may not meet the performance specification due to aging, stored or used outside the specified
temperature and humidity range.
• Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of interfering with the proper performance of the
equipment. For this reason make sure that all external devices operated in the vicinity of the
equipment comply with the relevant EMC requirements. Mobile phones, X-ray equipment, and MRI
devices are possible sources of interference as they may emit higher levels of electromagnetic
radiation.
• Always install or carry the equipment properly to avoid damage caused by drops, impacts, strong
vibrations or other mechanical forces.
• Dry the equipment immediately in case of rain or water spray.
• Some settings are password protected and can only be changed by authorized personnel. Contact
your department manager or biomedical engineering department for the passwords used at your
facility.
• Do not loop the patient cabling into a tight coil or wrap around the device, as this can damage the
patient cabling.
• Dispose of the package material as per the applicable waste control regulations. Keep it out of
children’s reach.
• At the end of its service life, the equipment, as well as its accessories, must be disposed of in
compliance with the guidelines regulating the disposal of such products. If you have any questions
concerning disposal of the equipment, please contact Mindray.
1-2
1.1.3 Notes
NOTE
• The equipment software copyright is solely owned by Mindray. No organization or individual shall
resort to modifying, copying, or exchanging it or to any other infringement on it in any form or by
any means without due permission.
• Put the equipment in a location where it can be easily viewed and operated.
• The equipment uses a mains plug as isolation means to the mains power. Do not locate the
equipment in a place difficult to access the mains plug.
• During normal use, the operator is expected to face the front of the equipment.
• Remove the battery before shipping the monitor or if it will not be used for an extended period of
time.
• Remove the battery before transporting the equipment or if the equipment will not be used for a
long time.
• The software was developed in compliance with IEC62304, to minimize the possibility of hazards
arising from software errors.
• This manual describes all available features and options. The equipment configuration may not have
all of them.
• Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper product performance and correct operation
and ensures patient and operator safety.
• Keep this manual in the vicinity of the equipment so that it can be referenced when needed.
1.2 Equipment Symbols
Symbol Description Symbol Description
General warning sign Refer to instruction manual/booklet
Serial number Catalogue number
Date of manufacture Manufacturer
USB connector Protected against vertically falling water

drops per IEC 60529
Battery indicator Computer network
Equipotentiality Alternating current
Defibrillation-proof type CF applied part Defibrillation-proof type BF applied part
1-3
Stop USB IBP zero key
NIBP start/stop Calibration
Unlocking Menu
Power On/Off Graphical record
Gas outlet Gas inlet
Output Input/output
Pushing prohibited Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation
Authorised representative in the European Dispose of in accordance to local

Community requirements
Conforms to ANSI Std. ES60601-1, IEC Std. 60601-1-8, IEC Std. 60601-2-25, IEC Std. 60601-2-26, IEC Std. 60601-
2-27, IEC Std. 80601-2-30, IEC Std. 60601-2-34, IEC Std. 60601-2-49, ISO Std. 0601-2-55, ISO Std. 80601-2-56,
and ISO Std. 80601-2-61
Certified to CAN/CSA Std. C22.2 No. 60601-1, No. 60601-1-6, No. 60601-1-8, No. 60601-2-25, No. 60601-2-26,
No. 60601-2-27, No. 80601-2-30, No. 60601-2-34, No. 60601-2-49, No. 80601-2-55, No. 80601-2-56, and No.
80601-2-61
1-4
2 Equipment Introduction
2.1 Indications for Use

The ePM 10M/ePM 12M/ePM 15M patient monitor, hereafter called the monitor, is intended to be used for
monitoring, displaying, reviewing, storing, alarming and transferring of multiple physiological parameters
including ECG (3-lead, 5-lead, 6-lead, and 12-lead selectable, arrhythmia detection, ST segment analysis, QT/QTc
monitoring, and heart rate (HR)), respiration (Resp), temperature (Temp), pulse oxygen saturation (SpO2), pulse
rate (PR), non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP), invasive blood pressure (IBP), cardiac output (C.O.), carbon dioxide
(CO2), oxygen (O2), anesthetic gas (AG) and bispectral index (BIS). The monitor also provides an interpretation of
resting 12-lead ECG.
All the parameters can be monitored on single adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients except for the following:
■ C.O. monitoring is intended for adult patients only.
■ The arrhythmia detection and PAWP monitoring are intended for adult and pediatric patients only.
The monitor is to be used in healthcare facilities by clinical professionals or under their guidance. They should
only be used by persons who have received adequate training in their use. The monitor is not intended for
helicopter transport, hospital ambulance, or home use.
2.2 Applied Parts

The applied parts of the monitor are:
■ ECG electrode and leadwire
■ SpO2 sensor
■ Temp probe
■ NIBP cuff
■ IBP transducer
■ C.O. sensor
■ CO2 sampling line/nasal sampling cannula, water trap, and mask
■ AG sampling line, water trap, airway adapter, and mask
2-1
2.3 System Components
The monitor consists of the main unit, display, external modules, input devices and output devices.
NOTE
• The monitor may not include all these components. Contact the local service personnel for available
components.
2.3.1 Main Unit

The main unit processes data from modules.
2.3.1.1 Front View
(1)
(2)
(6) (5) (4) (3)
(9) (8) (7)
(1) Alarm lamp

When a physiological alarm or technical alarm occurs, this lamp lights and flashes corresponding
with the alarm priority:
◆ High priority alarms: the lamp quickly flashes red.

◆ Medium priority alarms: the lamp slowly flashes yellow.
◆ Low priority alarms: the lamp lights in cyan without flashing.
(2) Display
(3) NIBP Start/Stop hard key

Press to start an NIBP measurement or stops the current NIBP measurement.
(4) Record Start/Stop key

Press to start a recording or stop the current recording.
(5) Alarm Pause hard key

Press to pauses the current alarms
(6) Alarm Reset hard key

Press to acknowledge the on-going alarm.
(7) Power indicator
2-2
◆ On: when the AC power is connected.
◆ Off: when the AC power is not connected.
(8) Battery indicator
◆ Yellow: the battery is being charged.

◆ Green: the battery is fully charged.
◆ Flashing green: the monitor operates on battery power.
◆ Off: no battery is installed, or the battery is malfunctioning, or the monitor is powered off and
no power is connected.
(9) Power switch
◆ Pressing this switch turns on the monitor.

◆ When the monitor is on, pressing and holding this switch turns off the monitor.
2.3.1.2 Left View
(2) (3) (4)
(1)
(5)
(8) (7) (6)
(1) Temperature probe connector (2) SpO2 probe connector
(3)IBP cable connector (4) ECG cable connector
(5) CO2 watertrap seat (6) NIBP cuff connector
(7) Gas outlet (8) C.O. cable connector
2-3
2.3.1.3 Right View
(1)
(2)
(1) Handle (2) Recorder
2.3.1.4 Rear View
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Alarm lamp

When a physiological alarm or technical alarm occurs, this lamp lights and flashes corresponding
with the alarm priority:
◆ High priority alarms: the lamp quickly flashes red.

◆ Medium priority alarms: the lamp slowly flashes yellow.
◆ Low priority alarms: the lamp lights in cyan without flashing.
(2) AC Power input
(3) Equipotential Grounding Terminal

When using the monitor together with other devices, connect their equipotential grounding
terminals together to eliminate the potential difference between them.
2-4
(4) Network Connector
It is a standard RJ45 connector which connects the monitor to the central monitoring system
(CMS) or other network devices.
(5) USB connectors

It connects USB devices, for example the barcode reader.
(6) VGA Connector

It connects It connects a external display, which extends the display capability of your monitor.
The contents displayed on the external display screen accords with those displayed on the
monitor screen.
(7) Multifunctional Connector

It outputs defibrillator synchronization signals, nurse call signals and analogy output signals.
2.3.2 External Modules

The external modules are used to monitor the patient’s physiological parameters, record patient information
and data, and connect external devices. The monitor provides the following modules:
■ Parameter modules: acquires and processes the patient’s data and sends the data to the main unit.
■ BeneLink module: connects external devices. The monitor outputs data from external devices through the
BeneLink module.
2.3.2.1 Available Modules

Refer to 29 Accessories for available modules.
The monitor can simultaneously use maximum of two IBP modules. The other modules can only be used one at
a time. Otherwise, the monitor will issue a module conflict prompt.
For example, if a CO2 module is already loaded and then another CO2 module is inserted, the monitor will then
prompt module conflict. To solve the problem of module conflict, just remove a module.
2.3.2.2 Example Module

The parameter modules have similar structure:
■ The parameter label is marked at the upper left corner.
■ Hard keys are located on the upper part.
■ Patient cable connectors are located at the lower part.
Take the IBP module as an example:
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
2-5
(1) Setup hard key: enters or exits the IBP Setup menu.
(2) Zero hard key: enters the Zero IBP menu.
(3) Module status indicator
◆ On: the module works properly.

◆ Flashing: the module is initializing.
◆ Off: the module is not connected or the module fails.
(4) Patient cable connectors
2.3.3 Input Devices

The monitor allows data entry through touchscreen, remote controller, hardkey and barcode reader.
You can only use Mindray specified input devices.
2.3.4 Printing Devices

You can use Mindray specified printer and/or recorder to output patient information and data.
The monitor is configured with a build-in recorder.
The printer can be connected to the monitor through the network to output patient reports.
2-6
3 Getting Started
3.1 Equipment Preparation Safety Information
WARNING
• Use only installation accessories specified by Mindray.
• Connect only approved devices to this equipment. Devices connected to the equipment must meet
the requirements of the applicable IEC standards (e.g. IEC 60950 safety standards for information
technology equipment and IEC 60601-1 safety standards for medical electrical equipment). The
system configuration must meet the requirements of the IEC 60601-1 medical electrical systems
standard. Any personnel who connect devices to the equipment’s signal input/output port are
responsible for providing evidence that the safety certification of the devices has been performed in
accordance to the IEC 60601-1. If you have any questions, please contact Mindray.
• If it is not evident from the equipment specifications whether a particular combination with other
devices is hazardous, for example, due to summation of leakage currents, please consult the
manufacturer or an expert in the field. A determination must be made that the proposed
combination will not negatively affect the devices themselves or the patient's safety.
CAUTION
• The equipment should be installed by Mindray authorized personnel.
• When disposing of the packaging material, be sure to observe the applicable waste control
regulations and keep it out of children’s reach.
• Before use, verify whether the packages are intact, especially the packages of single use accessories.
In case of any damage, do not apply it to the patient.
• Make sure that the equipment operating environment meets the specific requirements. Otherwise
unexpected consequences, e.g. damage to the equipment, could result.
• Avoid rough handling during transport.
NOTE
• Put the equipment in a location where it can be easily viewed and operated.
• Keep this manual in the vicinity of the equipment so that it can be referenced when needed.
• Save the packing case and packaging material as they can be used if the equipment must be
reshipped.
• Many settings in the patient monitor are password protected. It is recommended to change the
default passwords and keep the passwords safe. Passwords should only be changed by authorized
personnel. Contact the department manager or biomedical engineering department for the
passwords used at the facility.
3.2 Monitor Installation

The monitor can be installed in various ways as required.
■ Wall mount
■ Placed on desk
■ Trolley tray
■ Bedrail clamp
■ Bedrail hook
3-1
3.2.1 Unpacking and Checking
Before unpacking, examine the packaging carefully for signs of damage. If any damage is detected, contact the
carrier, distributor, or Mindray.
If the packing case is intact, open the package and remove the equipment and accessories carefully. Check all
materials against the packing list and check for any mechanical damage. Contact Mindray in case of any
problems.
3.2.2 Environmental Requirements

The operating environment of the equipment must meet the requirements specified in this manual.
The environment where the equipment is used shall be reasonably free from noises, vibration, dust, corrosive,
flammable and explosive substances. Moreover, to maintain good ventilation, the equipment shall be at least 2
inches (5cm) away from the walls of the cabinet.
When the equipment is moved from one place to another, condensation may occur as a result of temperature or
humidity difference. In this case, never start the system before the condensation evaporates.
3.3 Setting Up the Equipment

Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper product performance and correct operation. It ensures
patient and operator safety.
3.3.1 Connecting the AC Mains

The monitor is powered by an AC power supply. Before connecting the equipment to the AC mains, check that
the voltage and frequency ratings of the power line are the same as those indicated besides the AC power input.
To use the AC power source, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the female end of the power cord with the AC power input.
2. Connect the male end of the power cord with a wall AC outlet.
3. Check that the AC indicator is on.
The AC indicator is off if the AC mains is not connected. When AC mains is connected, the AC indicator is
illuminated in green.
WARNING
• Operate the equipment on battery power if the integrity of the protective earth conductor or the
protective earthing system in the installation is in doubt.
CAUTION
• Always use the accompanying power cord delivered with the monitor.
• Before connecting the equipment to the AC mains, ensure that the voltage and frequency ratings of
the power line are the same as those indicated besides the AC power input.
NOTE
• Use the cable retainer to secure the power cord to prevent it from falling off.
3-2
3.3.2 Connecting the Input Devices
Connect the barcode reader to the USB port if necessary.
3.3.3 Connecting the Parameter Module

To connect the parameter module, follow this procedure:
1. Push the module rack door open, and then push it until you hear a click.
2. With the module properly oriented, align the module insertion guide slot with the module rack insertion
guide. Push the module into the module rack until you hear a click.
3. Push the lock at the bottom of the module inwards to lock the module.
3.3.4 Removing the Parameter Module

To remove the parameter module, follow this procedure:
1. Pull outwards the lock at the bottom of the module to release the module.
2. Lift the latches at the bottom of the module and slide the module out of the module rack. Hold on the
module to make sure it does not drop when it comes out.
3-3
CAUTION
• When removing the module, be careful not to drop it. Always support with one hand while pulling
out with the other.
3.4 Turning on the Monitor

Before beginning measurements, turn on the monitor. Perform the following inspections:
1. Check the monitor and modules for any mechanical damage. Make sure that all external cables, plug-ins
and accessories are properly connected.
2. Connect the power cord to the AC power source.
Pressing the power switch turns on the monitor.
CAUTION
• Check that visual and auditory alarm signals are presented correctly when the equipment is
powered on.
• Do not use the monitor on a patient if you suspect it is not working properly, or if it is mechanically
damaged. Contact the service personnel or Mindray.
3.5 Operation and Navigation

Everything needed to operate the monitor is on its screen. Almost every element on the screen is interactive.
Screen elements include parameter values, waveforms, quick keys, information fields, alarms fields, dialogs, and
menus. Often you can access the same element in different ways. For example, you can access a parameter
dialog by selecting the corresponding numeric area or waveform area, through the Menu hard key on the
parameter module, or through the Parameter Setup quick key.
3.5.1 Using the Touchscreen

You can use the touchscreen to select a screen element by pressing directly on the monitor’s screen.
To avoid accidental use, you can temporarily disable the touchscreen by holding and pressing the Main Menu
quick key and sliding as directed by the arrow. A padlock symbol displays at the top of the main menu quick
key if the touchscreen is disabled.
The touchscreen lock period is configurable. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Access Display in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Display tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Display.
2. Set Screen Lock Duration.
The touchscreen is enabled when the preset time is reached. To manually enable the touchsceen, hold and press
the Main Menu quick key and slide as directed by the arrow.
CAUTION
• Check that the touchscreen is not damaged.broken, or loose. If there is any sign of damage, stop
using the monitor and contact the service personnel.
3.5.2 Using the On-Screen Keyboard

The on-screen keyboard enables information entry:
■ Enter the information by selecting one character after another.
■ Select the Backspace key to delete single characters or select to delete the entire entry.
■ Select the Caps Lock key to access uppercase letters.
3-4
■ Select the Enter key to confirm the entry and close the on-screen keyboard.
3.5.3 Using the Barcode Reader

The monitor supports both a linear (1D) barcode reader and two-dimensional (2D) barcode reader. The barcode
reader is connected to the monitor’s USB connector.
If you are using the Mindray custom 2D barcode reader (Model HS-1R or HS-1M), before using the it for the first
time, clear old data formats and configure the barcode reader.
NOTE
• The Mindray custom barcode reader can scan both 2D and 1D barcodes. Other barcode readers can
only output the patient’s medical record number (MRN) and visit number.
3.5.3.1 Clearing Old Data Formats (for the Mindray Custom 2D Barcode Reader)
Before using the Mindray custom barcode reader for the first time, clear old data formats. To do so, follow this
procedure:
1. Scan the following engineering barcode to clear the previous data format.
2. Scan the 2D engineering barcode which contains the hospital’s data format.
NOTE
• Contact the scanner manufacturer or Mindray for obtaining the engineer barcodes for clearing data
formats and programming the hospital’s data format.
3.5.4 Using the Remote Controller

The remote controller can control the monitor by connecting the receiver of the remote controller to the
monitor’s USB connector. For more information on how to use the remote controller, see the Instructions for Use
delivered with the remote controller.
3.6 Screen Display

The following figure shows the normal screen:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(9)
(6)
(8)
(7)
3-5
(1) Patient information area: displays patient information, including patient category, gender, department, room
number, bed number, and so on. The displayed patient information is configurable. Selecting this area enters
the Patient Management menu. For more information, see 5.3 Managing Patient Information.
(2) The current configuration
(3) Technical alarm information area: displays prompt messages on the above; displays technical alarm messages
at the bottom.
(4) Physiological alarm information area: displays high priority physiological alarms on the above; displays
medium and low priority physiological alarms at the bottom.
(5) System status information area: displays alarm symbol, battery status, network status, currently connected
CMS, storage device status, and system time. For more information, see 3.6.1 On-screen Symbols.
(6) Parameter numerics area: displays parameter values, alarm limits, and alarm status. This area also displays
parameter list. Selecting a parameter numeric block enters corresponding parameter menu. Selecting the
parameter list enters tabular trend review. For more information, see 3.9.3 Displaying the Parameter List.
(7) Quick key area: displays selected quick keys.
(8) Parameter waveform/numerics area: displays parameter waveforms, parameter values, alarm limits, and alarm
status. This area also displays parameter list. Selecting a parameter numeric area or waveform area enters
corresponding parameter menu. Selecting the parameter list enters tabular trend review. For more
information, see 3.9.3 Displaying the Parameter List.
(9) Parameter waveform area: displays parameter waveforms and parameter alarms. Select a waveform enters
corresponding parameter menu. For more information, see 3.9.3 Displaying the Parameter List.
3.6.1 On-screen Symbols

The following table lists the on-screen symbols displayed on the system status information area:
Adult, male Adult, female
Pediatric, male Pediatric, female
Neonate, male Neonate, female
Wireless network is connected. The solid part Wireless network is not connected.
indicates network signal strength.
Wired network is connected. Wired network is not connected.
All the alarms are paused. Individual physiological alarms are turned off
or the monitor is in the alarm off status.
Audible alarm tones are paused. Audible alarm tones are turned off.
3-6
Alarms are acknowledged and the alarm The battery is working correctly. The green
system is reset. portion represents the remaining charge.
The battery has low power and needs to be The battery has critically low charge and
charged. needs to be charged immediately. Otherwise,
the monitor will soon automatically shut
down soon.
The battery is being charged. No battery is installed.
3.6.2 Dialogs
All dialogs have similar style and structure, see the figure below:
(1) (4)
(2)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(1) Dialog heading
(2) Tabs
(3) Operation buttons
(4) Exit button: closes the current dialog.
(5) Main body area: includes dialog items and options.
(6) Switch:
◆ Green: the switch is on.

◆ Gray: the switch is off.
3.6.3 Quick Keys

The monitor provides quick keys to allow quick access to some functions. The quick key area is located at the
bottom of the screen. The Main Menu key is permanently located the right, and the More key is permanently
located at the left. Selecting the More quick key shows more quick keys. The quick keys displayed on the screen
are configurable.
3-7
3.6.3.1 Available Quick Keys
The following table shows available quick keys.
Symbol Label Function Symbol Label Function
Main Menu Enters the main menu. More Shows more quick keys.
Alarm Setup Enters the Alarm dialog. Alarm Reset Acknowledges ongoing
alarms and reset the
alarm system.
Audio Pause Pauses alarm tone. Discharge Enters the Discharge

Patient Patient dialog.
Review Enters the Review dialog. Standby Enters Standby mode.
Patient Enters the Patient Screen Setup Enters the Screen Setup
Management Management dialog. dialog.
NIBP Start/ Starts an NIBP Stop All Stops all NIBP

Stop measurement or stops the measurements.
current NIBP
measurement.
NIBP STAT Starts a five-minute NIBP Measure Enters the NIBP Measure
continuous NIBP dialog.
measurement.
Zero IBP Enters the Zero IBP dialog. C.O. Measure Opens the C.O. Measure
screen.
PAWP Enters the PAWP screen. Venipuncture Inflates the NIBP cuff to
help venous puncture.
Parameters Enters the Parameters Remote View Opens the Remote View
Setup Setup dialog. screen.
Manual Event Manually triggers and Minitrends Enters the Minitrends

saves an event. screen.
OxyCRG Opens the OxyCRG screen. ECG Full- Enters the ECG full screen.
Screen
Privacy Mode Enters Privacy mode. Night Mode Enters Night mode.
Intubation Enters the intubation Unit Enters the Unit dialog.

Mode mode.
3-8
Symbol Label Function Symbol Label Function
Volume Enters the Volume dialog. Freeze Freezes waveforms.
Calculations Enters the Calculations Load Config Enters the Load Config
dialog. dialog.
Print Starts printing a real-time Record Starts/Stops a recording.

report.
ECG Lead/Gain Enters the ECG Lead/Gain Call Help Sends the Call Help signal
dialog. over the network.
GCS Enters the GCS dialog. EWS Enters the EWS screen.
Discharged Enters the Discharged ECG 24h Sum Views the 24-hour ECG
Patients Patients dialog. summary.
CPB Mode Enters the CPB mode. Integrated Enters the Integrated
Devices Device screen
3.6.3.2 Configuring the Displayed Quick Keys

To select the quick keys for display, follow this procedure:
1. Access Quick Key in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key → the Select Quick Keys tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Quick Keys.
2. Select the Current tab to configure the quick keys for display on the screen: From the top of this page,
select a block location to show a certain quick key, and then select the quick key from the quick key list. For
example, to show the Screen Setup quick key at the first block, select the first block, and then select
Screen Setup from the list.
3. Select the More tab to configure the quick keys for display when the More quick key is selected.
3.7 Operating Modes

The monitor provides different operating modes. This section describes the different monitoring modes and
standby modes.
3.7.1 Monitoring Mode

Monitoring mode is the most frequently used clinical mode for patient monitoring. When the monitor is turned
on, it automatically enters Monitoring mode.
3.7.2 Privacy Mode

Privacy mode is a special clinical monitoring mode. In Privacy mode, the monitor does not display patient
information and monitoring data. This provides controlled access to patient data and ensures confidentiality.
Privacy mode is only available when the patient admitted by the monitor is also monitored by the CMS. The
monitor continues monitoring the patient, but patient data is only visible at the CMS.
3-9
3.7.2.1 Entering Privacy Mode
To enter Privacy mode, choose either of the following ways:
■ Select the Privacy Mode quick key → select OK.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Privacy Mode → select OK.
The monitor has the following features after entering Privacy mode:
■ The screen turns blank.
■ Except for the low battery alarm, the monitor inactivates alarm tones and alarm lights for all other alarms.
■ The monitor suppresses all system sounds, including heart beat tone, pulse tone, and prompt tone.
WARNING
•
.
In Privacy mode, all audible alarms are suppressed and the alarm light is deactivated at the monitor.
Alarms are presented only at the CMS. Pay attention to potential risk.
NOTE
• Privacy mode is not available if the Department is set to OR.
• You cannot enter Privacy mode if a low battery alarm is active.
3.7.2.2 Exiting Privacy Mode

The monitor automatically exit Privacy mode in any of the following situations:
■ The monitor disconnects from the CMS.
■ The low battery alarm occurs.
You can also operate the touchscreen, mouse, or keyboard to manually exit Privacy mode.
3.7.3 Night Mode

Night mode is a special clinical monitoring mode used to avoid disturbing the patient. Night mode reduces
screen brightness, sound volumes, and pauses NIBP measurements.
3.7.3.1 Entering Night Mode

To enter Night mode, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Night Mode quick key, or select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select
Night Mode.
2. Change Night mode settings if necessary.
3. Select Enter Night Mode.
Night mode settings are as follows by default:

■ Brightness: 1
■ Alarm Volume: 2
■ QRS Volume: 1
■ Key Volume: 0
■ NIBP End Tone: Off
■ Stop NIBP: Off
CAUTION
• Verify Night mode settings before entering Night mode. Pay attention to the potential risk if the
setting value is low.
3 - 10
3.7.3.2 Exiting Night Mode
To cancel Night mode, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Night Mode quick key, or select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select
Exit Night Mode.
2. Select OK.
NOTE
• If the monitor is connected to the CMS, it automatically exits Night mode when being disconnected
from the CMS.
• The monitor resume the previous settings after exiting Night mode.
3.7.4 Standby Mode

Standby mode can Temporarily stop patient monitoring without switching off the monitor.
3.7.4.1 Entering Standby Mode

1. Select the Standby quick key, or select the Main Menu quick key → from the Patient Management
column select Standby.
2. Set Location to define where the patient is when the monitor enters Standby mode.
3. Select OK.
The monitor behaves as follows after entering Standby mode:

■ Stops all parameter measurements.
■ Disables all the alarms and prompt messages, except for the battery low alarm.
■ Turns screen brightness to the dimmest after entering Standby mode for 30 seconds.
WARNING
• Pay attention to the potential risk of placing the monitor to standby. In Standby mode, the monitor
stops all parameter measurements and disable all the alarm indications, except for the battery low
alarm.
3.7.4.2 Changing the Patient Location at Standby

To change the patient’s location, select Location from the Standby screen.
3.7.4.3 Exiting Standby Mode

To exit Standby mode, choose any of the following ways:
■ Select Resume Monitor to exit Standby mode and resume monitoring the current patient.
■ Select Discharge Patient to discharge the current patient.
■ Select New Patient to exit Standby mode and admit a new patient.
If the monitor automatically enters Standby mode after a patient is discharged, choose any of the following ways
to exit Standby mode:
■ Select New Patient to exit Standby mode and admit a new patient.
■ Select Pre-admit to enter the patient information for preparing to admit a new patient.
3.7.5 Discharge Mode

Discharge mode is a special Standby mode after a patient is discharged.
3 - 11
3.8 Configuring the Monitor
Configure the monitor before putting it in use.
3.8.1 Setting the Date and Time

To set the system time, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the System column select Time.
2. Set Date and Time.
3. Set Date Format.
4. Switch off 24 Hour Time to use the 12-hour mode.
5. Switch on Daylight Savings Time to use daylight savings time. You can manually switch on or off the
daylight saving time only when the auto daylight savings time function is disabled. For more information,
see 3.8.2 Adjusting the Screen Brightness for details.
If the monitor is connected to a central monitoring system (CMS) or hospital clinical system (HIS), the date and
time are automatically taken from the CMS. In this case, you cannot change the date and time on the monitor.
CAUTION
• Changing the date and time affects the storage of trends and events and may result in loss of data.
3.8.2 Adjusting the Screen Brightness

The brightness of the primary screen and secondary screen can be adjusted separately. To adjust the screen
brightness, follow this procedure:
1. Access Display in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Display tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Display.
2. Set Brightness for the corresponding display.
NOTE
• Screen brightness automatically changes with ambient light level when Brightness is set to Auto.
3.8.3 Adjusting the Volume

■ Set Alarm Volume in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Volume quick key.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Alarm column select Setup.
■ Set Reminder Volume by selecting the Main Menu quick key → from the Alarm column select Setup.
■ Set QRS Volume in any of the following ways:
◆ Select the Volume quick key.
◆ From the ECG dialog select Setup.
◆ From the SpO2 dialog select PR Setup.
■ Select the Volume quick key to set Key Volume.
3 - 12
3.9 General Operation
This section describes the operations that are generally used when monitoring a patient.
3.9.1 Switching On or Off a Parameter

You can also manually switch on or off a parameter when its module is connected. If setting parameter switches
is not password protected, follow this procedure to set parameter switches:
1. Access Parameters On/Off in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Parameters On/Off tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Parameters column select Parameters On/Off.
2. Enable or disable desired parameters.
When a parameter is switched off, the monitor stops data acquisition and alarming for this measurement.
NOTE
• When a parameter is manually switched off and the corresponding parameter module is plugged in,
you cannot monitor this parameter.
3.9.2 Displaying Parameter Numerics and Waveforms

Configure the parameter numerics, waveforms, and their sequence displayed on the normal screen by following
this procedure:
1. Access Tile Layout in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Tile Layout tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Tile Layout.
2. Select a parameter numeric area or waveform area, and then from the popup list select an element to
display in this area. The parameters and waveforms not selected will not displayed.
If you are using the independent secondary display, you can select parameter and waveform locations on the
secondary display.
NOTE
• ECG parameters and waveform are always displayed on the first line of the parameter numeric area
and waveform area.
3.9.3 Displaying the Parameter List

You can display trends of HR, SpO2, RR, and NIBP/IBP in the parameter numerics area. To do so, follow this
procedure:
Select the parameter numerics area where you want to display the parameter list, and then from the popup list
select Parameter List.
3.9.4 Accessing Parameter Setup Dialogs

Each parameter has a setup dialog to allow adjusting the alarm and parameter settings. Enter a parameter setup
dialog by using any of the following methods:
■ Select the parameter numeric area or waveform area.
■ Press the setup hard key on the module front.
■ Select the Parameter Setup quick key, and then select the desired parameter.
3 - 13
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Parameters column select Setup → select the desired
parameter.
NOTE
• In this manual, the first method is normally used to enter the setup dialog. But you can use any
method you prefer.
3.9.5 Changing Measurement Colors

Set the color of measurement values and waveforms for each parameter by following this procedure:
1. Select Main Menu quick key → from the Parameters column select Parameter Color.
2. Select the Current tab and set the colors of the currently monitoring measurement values and waveforms.
3. Select the All tab and set the colors of measurement values and waveforms for all parameters.
3.10 Freezing Waveforms

During patient monitoring, the freeze feature allows you to freeze the currently displayed waveforms on the
screen so that you can have a close examination of the patient’s status. Additionally, you can select any frozen
waveform for recording.
3.10.1 Freezing Waveforms

To freeze waveforms, select the Freeze quick key. Except waveforms of the following screens, all displayed
waveforms stop refreshing and scrolling after you select the Freeze quick key:
■ Minitrends screen
■ OxyCRG screen
■ Remote View screen
■ EWS screen
3.10.2 Viewing Frozen Waveforms

To view the frozen waveforms, follow this procedure:
■ Select the or button in the Freeze screen.
■ Slide the frozen waveform leftward or rightward.
At the lower right corner of the bottom-most waveform displays the freeze time. The initial frozen time is 0 s.
With the waveforms scrolling, the freeze time changes at an interval of 1 second. For example, -2 s means two
seconds before the frozen time. This change will be applied for all waveforms on the screen.
NOTE
• You can view the frozen waveforms of up to 120 seconds.
3.10.3 Unfreezing Waveforms

To unfreeze the frozen waveforms, select the button at the upper right corner of the Freeze Big
Numerics.
3.10.4 Printing Frozen Waveforms

To print the frozen waveforms, select the button at the upper left corner of the Freeze Big Numerics.
3 - 14
3.11 Checking Software Licenses
To run the following functions in the monitor, software licenses are required:
■ Early Warning Score (EWS)
■ ECG 24H Summary
To check the licenses, select the Main Menu quick key → select License → Local.
To install the licenses, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the USB drive with the licenses in to the monitor’s USB connector.
2. Select the Main Menu quick key →select License → select External.
3. Select Install.
3.12 Capturing the Screen

The monitor provides the function of screen capture. To capture the current screen display, follow this
procedure:
1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB connector.
2. Press and hold the More quick key. Wait until it turns from blue to grey.
The captured pictures are automatically saved in the USB drive.
3.13 Connecting the CMS

You can connect the monitor to the BeneVision CMS through wired LAN or wireless LAN. When connected to the
CMS, the system provides the following function.
■ The monitor can transmit parameter values, waveforms, alarms, and events to the CMS. From the CMS, you
can check the patient’s monitoring data and alarms.
■ The monitor can transmit parameter values and alarms from the connected external devices to the CMS.
From the CMS you can check the patient’s monitoring data and alarms obtained from the connected
external devices.
■ Patient information, alarm settings, and alarm status can be synchronized between the monitor and the
CMS.
■ You can start or stop NIBP measurements from the CMS.
■ In case of network disconnection, the monitor can transmit the offline data to the CMS when the network is
reconnected.
For more information on the CMS, see BeneVision Central Monitoring System Operator's Manual (PN: 046-010879-
00).
To select a CMS, select the system status information area at the top right corner of the main screen. Select the
desired CMS from the popup CMS list.
NOTE
• You can select CMS only when the Select CMS switch is on. For more information, see
25.12.7 Enabling Selecting a CMS.
3.14 Connecting the eGateway

You can connect the monitor to the eGateway through wired LAN or wireless LAN to implement interaction
between the monitor and external devices. When connected to the eGateway, the system provides the following
functions:
■ The monitor can transmit parameter values, waveforms, alarm settings, and events to the eGateway.
■ The monitor can transmit parameter values and alarm settings received from the BeneLink-connected
external devices to the eGateway.
■ Clock can be synchronized between the monitor and the eGateway.
3 - 15
3.15 Disconnecting the Wireless Network
To disconnect the wireless network manually, follow this procedure:
1. Swipe the screen from top down with a single finger.
2. Select .
To reconnect the wireless network after it is disconnected manually, follow this procedure:
1. Swipe the screen from top down with a single finger.
2. Select .
3.16 Turning Off the Monitor

Before turning off the monitor, perform the following check:
1. Ensure that patient monitoring has been completed.
2. Disconnect the cables and sensors from the patient.
3. Save or clear the patient data as required.
To turn off the monitor, press and hold the power switch for 3 seconds.
Turning off the monitor does not disconnect the monitor from the AC mains. To completely disconnect the
power supply, unplug the power cord.
CAUTION
• Press and hold the power switch for 10 to forcibly shut down the monitor if it could not be shut down
normally. This may cause loss of patient data.
NOTE
• If a monitor is on during a power loss, then the monitor is automatically switched on when the power
is restored.
• In case of a temporary power failure, if the power is restored within 30 minutes, monitoring will
resume with all active settings unchanged. If the monitor is without power for more than 30
minutes, it behaves the same as if it were normally turned off.
3 - 16
4 User Screens
The monitor provides different user screens to facilitate patient monitoring in different departments and clinical
applications.
4.1 Choosing a Screen

The monitor enters the normal screen after it is powered on. The normal screen is most frequently used for
patient monitoring. To select other screens, follow this procedure:
1. Access the Choose screen tab in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose screen.
2. Select the desired screen.
4.2 Normal Screen

The normal screen is most frequently used for patient monitoring. For general department, ICU, and CCU, normal
screen is used by default.
4.2.1 Entering the Normal Screen

To enter the normal screen, choose any of the following ways:
■ Swipe left or right on the touchscreen with two fingers to switch to the normal screen.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Choose Screen tab → select Normal Screen.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen → select Normal
Screen.
4.2.2 Configuring the Normal Screen

You can configure the parameter numerics, waveforms, and their sequence displayed on the normal screen. To
do so, follow this procedure:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key.
2. Select a parameter numeric area or waveform area, and then from the popup list select an element you
want to display in this area. The parameters and waveforms you did not select will not displayed.
NOTE
• ECG parameters and waveform are always displayed on the first line of the parameter numeric area
and waveform area.
4-1
4.3 The Big Numerics Screen
The Big Numerics screen displays parameter numerics in big font size. The Big Numerics screen displays
measurement values and waveforms of up to six parameters. You can configure the parameters and their layout
on the big numeric screen.
4.3.1 Entering the Big Numerics Screen

To enter the big numerics screen, choose any of the following ways:
■ Swipe left or right on the touchscreen with two fingers to switch to the big numerics screen.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Choose Screen tab → select big numerics Screen.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen → select big
numerics Screen.
4.3.2 Configuring the Big Numerics Screen

To configure the big numerics screen, follow this procedure:
1. Access Choose screen in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Screen Setup quick key .
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose screen.
2. Select the Big Numerics tab
3. Select a parameter numeric area or waveform area, and then from the popup list select an element to
display in this area.
4.4 Minitrends Screen

The Minitrends screen shows the recent graphic trends of parameters.
4.4.1 Entering the Minitrends Screen

Choose one of the following methods to enter the Minitrends screen:
■ Select the Minitrends quick key.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → Select the Choose Screen tab→ select Minitrends.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen → select Minitrends.
4-2
4.4.2 The Display of Minitrends Screen
The following figure shows the minitrends screen. Your display may be configured to look slightly different.
(3)
(1)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(2) (7)
(1) Scale
(2) Routine Vital/Baseline button. If the department is set to OR, then the Baseline
button is available. For other departments, the Routine Vital button is available.
(3) Routine Vital/Baseline
(4) Select this button to view the trends of longer time
(5) Time line
(6) Alarm statistic area
(7) Aldrete Score button. This button is available for the OR department.
4.4.3 Viewing Trends of Longer Time

To view the trends of longer time, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Minitrends screen.
2. Select button from the Minitrends screen, or swipe right on the screen with a finger.
4.4.4 Setting Minitrends Parameters

To set parameters, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Setup button.
3. Set parameters. If you want to use the default parameters, select Default Parameter.
4-3
4.4.5 Setting the Minitrend Length
To set the Minitrend length, follow this procedure:
3. Set the Minitrend Length.
4.4.6 Setting the Alarm Statistics Switch

The Minitrends screen can be configured to display the statistic number of physiological alarm in its lower half
screen. To set the alarm statistics switch, follow this procedure:
3. Switch on or off the Alarm Statistics switch.
4.4.7 Setting the Alarm Statistics Length

The time length within which the alarms statistics are made is configurable. To set the alarm statistics length,
follow this procedure:
3. Set Alarm Statistics Duration.
4.4.8 Routine Vital/Baseline

The Routine Vital/Baseline function is used for marking the parameter measurements of certain moment for
later reference. If the department is set to OR, then the Baseline button is available. For other departments, the
Routine Vital button is available.
4.4.8.1 Manually Marking the Routine Vital/Baseline

To manually mark the Routine Vital/Baseline, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Routine Vital button or Baseline button.
NOTE
• If you do not see the Baseline button or Routine Vital button in the Minitrends screen, you can select
the Setup button and switch on the Baseline switch, or set the Routine Vital to Manual or Auto.
4.4.8.2 Configuring Automatic Routine Vital Settings

The monitor can automatically mark the routine vital sign values. To enable this function, follow this procedure:
3. Select Auto from the dropdown list of Routine Vital.
4. Select Time to set the time for marking the first routine vital sign values.
5. Select Interval to set the interval for marking the routine vital sign values.
4-4
4.4.9 Aldrete Score
Select Aldrete Score to show the latest score and scoring time. To understand the current patient status, select a
score for each item and then select OK to get a new score.
WARNING
• The Aldrete score and recommendation is for reference only. Clinicians must make the decision of
discharging the patient from recovery according to the patient’s actual condition.
4.5 The OxyCRG Screen

The OxyCRG screen is the default user screen when the neonatology department is selected. It displays 6-minute
HR/btbHR, SpO2 trends, CO2/Resp compressed waveform, ABD parameters, and the latest ABD events.
The OxyCRG function is intended for neonatal patents only.
4.5.1 Entering the OxyCRG Screen

To enter the OxyCRG screen, choose any of the following ways:
■ Swipe left or right on the touchscreen with two fingers to switch to the OxyCRG screen.
■ Select the OxyCRG quick key.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Choose Screen tab → select OxyCRG.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen → select OxyCRG.
4.5.2 OxyCRG Events

The following table lists the ABD events and their criteria:
Event type Description Remarks
A Apnea event: the apnea duration exceeds the threshold. A20 is a red event
• A20: the apnea duration is greater or equal to 20 seconds.
• A15: the apnea duration is between 15 to 20 seconds (excluding 20 seconds).
• A10: the apnea duration is between 10 to 15 seconds (excluding 15 seconds).
B Bradycardia event: the duration of low heart rate, bradycardia, extreme bradycardia, /
or asystole exceeds the threshold.
D Low SpO2 event: the duration of SpO2 Desat exceeds the threshold. /
BD Bradycardia and low SpO2 happen at the same time. /
AB Apnea and bradycardia happens at the same time. Red event
AD Bradycardia and low SpO2 happen at the same time. Red event
ABD Apnea, bradycardia, and low SpO2 happen at the same time. Red event
NOTE
• The monitor records all ABD events for OxyCRG review, but only red events displays in the ABD list of
the OxyCRG screen.
4.5.3 The Display of the ABD Event Area

The ABD event area displays parameter values of currently active OxyCRG events and lists the latest red ABD
events.
4-5
4.5.4 Setting OxyCRG Parameters
Select parameter trends or compressed waveform to set parameters and the compressed waveform you want to
display. The selected parameters will be used for ABD event calculation.
4.5.5 Setting the Threshold of ABD Events

Select any parameter trend or the compressed waveform to perform the following setup:
■ Set the threshold of ABD events.
■ Set Event Storage Format:
◆ 1 min+3 min: stores data one minute before and three minutes after the event.
◆ 3 min+1 min: stores data three minutes before and one minute after the event.
◆ 2 min+2 min: stores data two minutes before and two minutes after the event.
The stored data includes the trends of the OxyCRG parameters, compressed waveform, alarm thresholds, NIBP,
and Temp measurements.
4.5.6 Editing ABD Events

To edit ABD events, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Mark button to enter the Mark dialog box.
2. Drag the event list upwards and downwards to select the desired event.
3. Select the patient’s status when the event happens.
4. Select Save.
4.6 The SpO2 Screen

For neonatal patients, if you are only concerned with the patient’s SpO2 and pulse rate, you can use the SpO2
screen.
The SpO2 screen displays SpO2 related data. It also displays realtime Temp and NIBP measurements.
NOTE
• The SpO2 screen is intended for neonatal patient only.
4.6.1 Entering the SpO2 Screen

To enter the SpO2 screen, choose any of the following ways:
■ Swipe left or right on the touchscreen with two fingers to switch to the SpO2 screen.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Choose Screen tab → select SpO2 Screen.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen → select SpO2
Screen.
4-6
4.6.2 The Display of SpO2 Screen
The following figure shows the SpO2 screen. Your display may be configured to look slightly different.
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(4) (6)
(1) Tabular trend: displays trends of SpO2, PR, and PI.
(2) SpO2 statistics area: displays the statistics data of each SpO2 section.
(3) Temp area: displays Temp measurements and alarm limits.
(4) NIBP area: displays NIBP measurements and alarm limits.
(5) SpO2 area: displays measurements and alarm limits of PR, and PI. The dashboards show information of alarm
limits. The △ pointers indicate the current measurement values.
(6) The Pleth waveform
4.6.3 Operating the SpO2 Screen

You can access parameter setup and trends review from the SpO2 screen. To do so, follow this procedure:
■ Select the trend of SpO2, PR, or PI to enter the Tabular Trends review page.
■ Select the SpO2 statistics area to enter the SpO2 Statistics Setup dialog. Set the range of each SpO2
section and the target section.
■ Select the value of SpO2, PR, or PI, the dashboard, or Pleth waveform to enter the SpO2 dialog.
■ Select the Temp area to enter the Temp dialog.
■ Select the NIBP area to enter the NIBP dialog.
4.7 Remote View

On the monitor, you can observe alarm conditions and view real time physiological data from patients on other
compatible remote networked monitoring devices, such as a bedside monitor or a telemetry device.
A device from a remote site is called a remote device or bed. The monitor can simultaneously watch up to 12
remote devices. They all can show waveforms of one remote device.
You can watch the remote devices in the Remote View screen, or the alarm watch tiles on the main screen.
In the Remote View screen, you can view real time parameters and waveforms from one specific device, and
watch the alarms of other monitored devices at the same time.
NOTE
• A particular monitor (for example Monitor 1) can be viewed by at most 32 remote devices at the
same time, of which eight of those remote devices can watch Monitor 1’s waveforms.
4-7
4.7.1 Entering the Remote View Screen
To enter the Remote View screen, choose one of the following ways:
■ Select the Remote View quick key.
■ Select the bed at the alarm watch tile on the main screen. For more information, see 4.7.10.2 Displaying the
Alarm Watch Tile on the Main Screen.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Primary Display tab or Secondary Display tab (as
available)→ select the Choose Screen tab → select Remote View.
4.7.2 About the Remote View

The following figure shows the Remote View window.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Alarm watch area
◆ Display all the monitored remote beds.

◆ Each bed displays the room number, bed number, connection status and alarm status. The
background color indicates the alarm status on the corresponding bed.
Background Color Description
Green No alarm is occurring to the bed.
Red The remote device is disconnected or a high priority alarm is occurring. The high
priority alarm currently is the highest alarm level on the bed. If the remote device is
disconnected, the icon is displayed.
Yellow The medium priority alarm is occurring. The medium priority alarm currently is the
highest alarm level on the bed.
Cyan The low priority alarm is occurring. The low priority alarm currently is the highest
alarm level on the bed.
Grey The bed is in the standby mode.
(2) Main body
Display the patient’s information, alarm status and messages, waveforms, measurements, etc. of the
selected bed. This bed is called main bed.
4-8
WARNING
• The data presented in the Remote View screen has a delay. Do not rely on this screen for real time
data.
4.7.3 Adding a Bed

After adding the desired remote devices, then the alarms from these devices can be viewed on the monitor. To
add a remote device, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Select Bed dialog. To do so, choose either of the following ways:
◆ In the Remote View screen, select Select Bed. For more information, see 4.7.1 Entering the Remote
View Screen.
◆ Select the icon at the alarm watch tile if the tile is configured to display on the main screen.
2. In the Select Bed dialog, select a desired department. All the beds under this department will be listed.
3. Select a desired tile at the A-W1or A-W2 area and then select a bed from the bed list. The selected bed will
appear in the tile.
NOTE
• The added bed is indicated by a check mark (√) at the right of the bed list.
4.7.4 Removing a Bed

To remove a remote device from remote monitoring, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Select Bed dialog. Choose either of the following ways:
◆ In the Remote View screen, select Select Bed. For more information, see 4.7.1 Entering the Remote
View Screen.
◆ Select the icon in the alarm watch tile if the tile is configured to display on the main screen.
2. In the Select Bed dialog, select a bed at the A-W1or A-W2 area, and then select Clear Bed. If you want
remove all beds, select Clear All Beds.
4.7.5 Displaying the Main Bed

In the Remote View screen, you can select a bed in the alarm watch area, then the main body of the Remote
View screen will display the real time monitoring screen of the device.
4.7.6 Saving a Manual Event

You can initiate a manual event on the remote monitor by selecting Manual Event in the Remote View screen.
4.7.7 Managing Alarms from Remote Devices

You can view and manage the alarms coming from remote devices.
If the monitor and remote devices have alarms at the same time, the monitor presents alarms according to the
following rules:
■ If the alarm tone pattern for the monitor is same as that for the remote devices, the monitor prioritizes all
the alarms and sounds the highest alarm tone.
■ If the alarm tone pattern for the monitor is different from that for the remote devices, the monitor sounds
the alarms in their corresponding tone.
The monitor provides the same alarm tone pattern for the remote device alarms as those for the monitor alarms
by default. You can change the alarm tone pattern of the remote monitor; see 25.3.5.5 Setting the Tone Pattern for
Alarms from Remote Devices.
4-9
4.7.8 Resetting Alarms for Remote Devices
You can reset the alarms on the remote devices by selecting Alarm Reset in the Remote View screen. This
function needs to be enabled. For more information, see 25.3.5.1 Resetting Alarms for Remote Devices.
4.7.9 Selecting Beds By Care Group

If configured, the monitor automatically selects beds in the same care group during the shift of care groups in
the CMS. To enable this function, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Select Bed window. Choose either of the following ways:
◆ In the Remote View window, select Select Bed. For more information, see 4.7.1 Entering the Remote
View Screen for entering the Remote View window.
◆ Select the icon in the alarm watch tile if the tile is configured to display on the main screen.
2. In lower left corner of the Select Bed window, select Select Beds By Care Group.
4.7.10 Alarm Watch

The alarm watch function provides the alarm notification by color and sound.
■ The monitor sounds the highest priority alarm tone from all the monitored remote devices.
■ The monitor displays the highest priority alarm in corresponding background color for each bed at the
following areas:
◆ At the top of the Remote View. For more information, see 4.7.2 About the Remote View for details.
◆ On the main screen. For more information, see 4.7.10.1 About Alarm Watch Tile for details.
4.7.10.1 About Alarm Watch Tile

The main screen can display up to three alarm watch tiles, namely A-W1, A-W2 and A-W3. Each tile can
accommodate up to six beds.
The following figure shows the alarm watch tiles.
(1) (3) (2)
(5) (4)
(1) Alarm watch tile label
(2) Disconnection icon: when the remote device is disconnected, this icon displays at the tile, and the tile
background color is red.
(3) Select bed icon: select it to enter the Select Bed window.
(4) More than one bed tile: when more than one bed is assigned to a tile, the tile displays the alarm status,
connection status, etc.
(5) One bed tile: when only one bed is assigned to a tile, the tile displays the parameter value and alarm
message from this bed, etc.
The alarm watch tile is similar to alarm watch area in the Remote View. For more information, see 4.7.2 About the
Remote View.
4 - 10
4.7.10.2 Displaying the Alarm Watch Tile on the Main Screen
To configure the alarm watch tile to be displayed on the monitor’s main screen, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen to enter the Screen
Setup dialog.
2. Select the Tile Layout tab.
3. Select the numeric area where you want to display the alarm watch tile, and then in the drop-down list,
select Alarm Watch → A-W1or A-W2.
4 - 11
5 Managing Patients
5.1 Starting Monitoring a Patient

After turning on the monitor, follow this procedure to monitor a patient:
1. Admit the patient.
2. Check patient settings. Make sure that alarm limits, patient category and paced status, and so on, are
appropriate for the patient. Change them if necessary.
3. Perform desired measurements. For more information, see corresponding measurement chapters.
5.2 Admitting a Patient

The monitor admits a new patient in the following situations:
■ After a patient is manually discharged, the monitor automatically admits a new patient.
■ After being switched off for the selected time period, the monitor automatically discharges the previous
patient and admits a new patient at startup.
■ If the monitor has not detected certain patient vital signs (ECG, SpO2, PR, RR, NIBP) for 30 minutes, it will
prompt whether to start monitoring a new patient if any of the above vital signs are detected again.
Always input patient information as soon as the patient is admitted. For more information, see5.2.2 Editing
Patient Information for details.
WARNING
• The default Patient Category setting is Adult, and Paced setting is Unspecified. Set Paced and check
if the Patient Category setting is correct for the patient.
• For paced patients, set Paced to Yes. If it is incorrectly set to No, the monitor could mistake a pace
pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm when the ECG signal is too weak.
• For non-paced patients, set Paced to No.
5.2.1 Entering the Patient Management Dialog

Use any of the following methods to enter the Patient Management dialog:
■ Select the patient information area at the top left corner of the screen.
■ Select the Patient Management quick key.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Patient Management column select Patient Management.
5.2.2 Editing Patient Information

Edit patient information after a patient has been admitted, or when patient information is incomplete, or when it
is necessary to change patient information:
To edit patient information, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Patient Management dialog. For more information, see 5.2.1 Entering the Patient Management
Dialog.
2. Edit patient information as required.
If a barcode reader is connected to the monitor, scanning the patient’s barcode will enter the patient’s
information.
5-1
NOTE
• The monitor will reload the configuration if you changed the patient category.
5.2.3 Loading Patient Information from the CMS

If the monitor is connected to the central monitoring system (CMS). You can load patient information from the
CMS to the monitor. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Find Patient dialog in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Patient Management column select Find Patient.
◆ From the Patient Management dialog select Find Patient.
2. Input query criteria.
3. Select Search. Then a list pops up, including all the patients that meet the query criteria.
4. Select a patient from the patient list, and then select Admit. Corresponding patient information in the
monitor will be updated.
NOTE
• If ADT Query is switched on, input query criteria from the Discharged Patient page.
5.2.4 Loading Patient Information from the ADT Server

If the monitor is connected with the Admit-Discharge-Transfer (ADT) server through the eGateway. You can load
patient information from ADT server to the monitor.
To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Find Patient dialog in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Patient Management column select Find Patient.
◆ Select Find Patient from the Patient Management dialog.
2. Input query criteria.
3. Select Search. Then a list pops up, including all the patients that meet the query criteria.
4. Select a patient from the patient list, and then select Admit. Corresponding patient information in the
monitor will be updated.
NOTE
• You can load patient information from the ADT server only when ADT Query is enabled. For more
information, see 25.12.12 Using the ADT Gateway.
• The monitor can automatically upload the patient information from the ADT server when:
◆ The configured keywords of the monitor and the eGateway are the same.
◆ The IP address of the monitor is added to the eGateway configuration dialog.
• Loading patient information from the ADT server updates only patient information in the monitor.
The patient’s monitoring data is not changed and the patient is not discharged.
5.3 Exporting Patient Data

To export the data of the current patient and discharged patients, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB connector.
2. Access the Discharged Patients dialog box by either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Discharged Patients quick key.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Patient Management column select Discharged
Patients.
3. From the patient list select desired patients.
5-2
4. Select Export Data.
5.4 Deleting Patient Data

To delete the data of discharged patients, follow this procedure:
Patients.
2. From the patient list select desired patients.
3. Select Delete.
5.5 Stopping a Parameter Measurement

To stop monitoring a parameter, follow this procedure:
1. Remove corresponding sensor from the patient.
2. Disconnect the sensor from the patient cable.
3. Disconnect the patient cable from the parameter module.
5.6 Discharging a Patient

Before monitoring a new patient, discharge the previous patient. The technical alarms are reset, and monitor
settings returns to their defaults. For more information, see 24.3 Setting Default Patient Category.
After a patient is discharged, the monitor automatically admits a new patient.
WARNING
• Always discharge the previous patient before starting to monitor a new patient. Failure to do so can
lead to data being associated with the wrong patient.
To manually discharge a patient, use any of the following methods to access the Discharge Patient dialog:
■ Swipe down the touchscreen with two fingers.
■ Select the Discharge Patient quick key.
■ Select the patient information area at the top left corner of the screen→ Discharge Patient.
■ Select the Patient Management quick key → Discharge Patient.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Patient Management column select Discharge.
Select a button in the Discharge Patient dialog:
■ Print End Case Report: prints the end case report when the patient is discharged.
■ Discharge: clears the waveform data of the current patient. The monitor loads the default configuration
and goes to the standby mode. The current patient becomes a discharged patient.
■ Clear Patient Data: discharges the current patient and clears the waveform data. The monitor still uses the
current configuration and does not go to the standby mode. The current patient becomes a discharged
patient.
5-3
6 Interfacing with External Devices
6.1 BeneLink Introduction

BeneLink module is intended for connecting external devices, such as ventilators and anesthesia machines, to
the monitor. It allows information (patient data, alarms, etc.) from external devices to be displayed, saved,
recorded, or printed through the monitor. If the monitor is connected with the CMS or eGateway, information
from external devices can also be transmitted to the CMS or eGateway.
For more information on connecting external devices via the BeneLink module, see BeneLink Module Operator’s
Manual (PN: 046-011948-00).
6.2 BeneLink Safety Information
WARNING
• Devices of the same category cannot be connected to the BeneLink module simultaneously.
• The parameter labels used on the patient monitor may be different from those used on the external
device.
• The alarms from external devices may be delayed before transmission to the patient monitor.
• There can be differences between the alarm priorities displayed on the monitors and the priorities
displayed on external devices interfaced through BeneLink.
NOTE
• The alarm messages from external devices are derived from the open protocol of the corresponding
external device. For more information about these alarms, please see the operator’s manual for the
corresponding devices.
6-1
6.3 Differences in Displayed Values
In certain cases, there may be differences between the numerics displayed on the monitor and those on external
devices. The table below lists some situations and possible reasons.
Situation Possible Reasons
Some parameter values are displayed as invalid The patient monitor and the external device may have different
values on the monitor. parameter configuration or displaying range of values. If the
patient monitor displays a parameter not configured in the
external device, or a parameter value from the external device
exceeds the displaying range of the monitor, then the
corresponding parameter value is displayed on the monitor as an
invalid value.
The monitor and external device display parameter The monitor displays parameter values from the external device
values with different numbers of places of decimals. based on the monitor displaying rules. Same parameter value is
displayed differently when the monitor and the external device
display numbers with different precision.
Non-continuously measured values and For non-continuously measured values, the monitor displays the
continuously measured values have the same latest measured values until a new measurement is transmitted by
displaying mode in the patient monitor. the external device.
Parameter values displayed on the patient monitor Some parameter values are converted to different units when
and those displayed in the external device are transmitted to the monitor. Sometimes, values from the external
slightly different. device may be delayed before transmission to the patient monitor.
NOTE
• When the pressure units are converted among cmH2O, hPa and mbar, the parameter values remain
unchanged, for example, 1cmH2O=1hPa=1mbar, which may differ from some external devices.
6.4 Connecting an External Device

An external device is connected to the BeneLink module through an ID adapter. The ID adapter supports only its
matching device.
(1) (3) (4)
(2) (5)
(6)
(1) BeneLink Module (2) Label
(3) RJ45 connecting cable (4) ID Adapter
(5) External device (6) Serial port adapting cable (optional)
6-2
To connect an external device, follow this procedure:
1. Insert the BeneLink module into the module rack.
2. Connect the ID adapter that matches the external device to the BeneLink module with an RJ45 connecting
cable.
3. Plug the ID adapter into the RS232 port on the external device. Some external devices may have ports
incompatible with the ID adapter. In this case, a serial port adapting cable is required.
4. Stick a device name label to the RJ45 connecting cable at the end close to the BeneLink module. When the
BeneLink module is connected to several external devices, you can tell devices easily with these labels.
Switch on the external device.
After the external device is connected to the monitor, the indicators on both the ID adapter and the BeneLink
module illuminate to show that the monitor successfully communicates with the external device.
CAUTION
• First installation and debugging should be executed by Mindray service personnel or an authorized
technician.
• Please check the compatibility of the external device and the ID adapter before connection.
Otherwise, unpredictable system failure may result.
• Ports on the BeneLink module are not conventional network connectors. They are intended for
connecting with the serial port of designated devices only. Do not connect them to network
interfaces.
6.5 Accessing the Integrated Devices Screen

You can view the information of external devices in the Integrated Devices screen of the monitor. The
Integrated Devices screen provides information of both individual device and multi devices. To access the
Integrated Devices screen, follow this procedure:
■ Select the Integrated Device quick key.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select Integrated Devices.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen →select Integrated
Devices.
■ Select the numeric area or waveform area of any parameter from the external device →select Integrated
Devices button.
The Integrated Devices screen has the following features:

■ For the parameters measured by the external device, the measurements display directly after the
parameter labels.
■ For the parameters controlled by the external device, the settings are enclosed in parenthesis after
parameter labels.
6-3
■ For the parameters measured and controlled by the external device, measurements and settings are
displayed after parameter labels, and settings are also enclosed in parenthesis. For example, PEEP 18 (20),
in which PEEP is parameter label, 18 is the measurement, and (20) is the setting.
NOTE
• Parameters in the Integrated Devices screen are displayed in the order as shown in the selection
dialog. If the screen cannot display all the selected parameters, only the beginning selected
parameters are displayed.
6.6 Displaying Parameters from External Devices

This monitor can display parameters from external devices in the main screen:
■ Display waveforms from external devices in the waveform area.
■ Display labels and measurements of parameters from external devices in the numeric area.
■ Display respiratory loops of parameters from external deivices in the Loops screen.
NOTE
• When displayed in the monitor main screen, parameter labels of external devices are prefixed with
the plug sign “+”. For example, if SpO2 is from an external device, its label is displayed as “+SpO2”,
and its waveform label is displayed as “+Pleth”.
• If a parameter can be obtained either from the monitor or an external device, the measured value,
waveform or loops coming from the monitor will be displayed preferentially.
6.6.1 Setting Waveform Properties for Parameters from External Devices

To set the waveform properties for parameters from external devices, follow this procedure:
1. Access the parameter setup dialog by selecting its waveform area or numeric area.
2. Set Speed or Scale.
6.6.2 Setting Alarms from External Devices

To enable or disable the storage, display, and sound of the external device alarms of a certain priority and
category, follow this procedure:
1. From the Integrated Devices screen select Setup.
2. Set switches as desired.
If the storage, display, or audio settings of a specific alarm are different from its category or priority, set them
individually by adding the Alarm ID to the alarm list. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. From the Integrated Devices screen select Setup.
2. Input the Alarm ID for this alarm, and select Add.
To delete the special case handling of a specific external device alarm, select the desired Alarm ID, and select
Delete.
Refer to the BeneLink Module Operator’s Manual (PN: 046-011948-00) for the list of supported alarms and
Alarm IDs.
6.6.3 Setting Parameters from External Devices for Display

To select parameters displayed in the Integrated Devices screen, follow this procedure:
1. From the Integrated Devices screen select Select Parameter.
2. Select desired parameters.
6-4
In the main screen, the numeric area of some parameters from an external device, for example the +Paw
parameter, can display multiple parameters. To select parameters for display, follow this procedure:
1. Select the numeric area of the parameter from the external device.
2. Select the Select Parameter tab.
3. Select the parameters for display.
6.6.4 Setting Units for Parameters from External Devices

To set units for parameters from external devices, follow this procedure:
1. Select the numeric area or waveform area of any parameter from the external device.
2. Select the Unit tab.
3. Set the unit for O2, CO2, Pressure or Temp.
6.6.5 Accessing the Loops Screen

To access the Loops screen, follow this procedure:
1. Select the numeric area or waveform area of +Paw, +Flow, or +Vol to enter its corresponding setup dialog.
2. Select the Loops button.
NOTE
• The monitor only displays real-time loops of the external device, and these loops cannot be
displayed or saved as reference loops.
6.7 Viewing Alarms from External Devices

If the patient monitor is configured to do so, the monitor displays alarms from external devices in the
physiological and technical alarm information areas. A plus sign “+” is added before each alarm message from
external devices.
6.8 Viewing Parameter Trends from External Devices

If the patient monitor is configured to do so, the monitor saves parameters trends and alarm events from
external devices. You can review these data in the Tabular Trends, Graphic Trends, Events and Full Disclosure
pages in the Review screen.The monitor adds a “+” before the parameter label of external devices.
For more information, see 18 Review.
NOTE
• Parameters from external devices are saved and displayed according to the time on the monitor.
6.9 Recording and Printing Parameter Trends from External Devices

You can record or print parameter trends from external devices. For more information, see 18 Review,
21 Recording, and 22 Printing.
6-5
7 Alarms
7.1 Alarm Introduction

This chapter describes alarm functions and alarm settings.
7.2 Alarm Safety Information
WARNING
• A potential hazard can exist if different alarm presets and default configuration settings are used for
the same or similar equipment in the same care area, for example an intensive care unit or cardiac
operating room.
• If the monitor is connected to the central monitoring system (CMS) or other monitors, alarms can be
presented and controlled remotely. Remote suspension, inhibition, or reset of monitor alarms via
the CMS or other monitors may cause a potential hazard. For more information, see the operator’s
manuals for the CMS and the other monitors.
• The monitors in the care area may each have different alarm settings to suit different patients.
Always check that the alarm settings are appropriate for the patient before starting the monitoring.
Always make sure that necessary alarm limits are active and set according to the patient's clinical
condition.
• Setting alarm limits to extreme values may cause the alarm system to become ineffective. For
example, setting the SpO2 high alarm limit to 100%, is equivalent to switching the alarm off.
• When the alarm sound is switched off, the monitor gives no alarm tones even if a new alarm occurs.
Be careful when considering to switch off the alarm sound. When the alarms are off or while alarm
audio is paused either temporarily or indefinitely, observe the patient frequently.
• When monitoring patients that are not continuously attended by a clinical operator, properly
configure the alarm system and adjust alarm settings as per the patient's condition.
• Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for monitoring. Adjustment of alarm volume to a
low level may result in a hazard to the patient.
7.3 Understanding the Alarms
7.3.1 Alarm Categories

The monitor has two different types of alarms: physiological alarms and technical alarms.
■ Physiological alarms are triggered by patient measurement exceeding the parameter limits, or by an
abnormal patient conditions.
■ Technical alarms are triggered by an electrical, mechanical, connectivity, or other monitor abnormal
operation, or by failure of a sensor or component. Technical alarm conditions may also be caused when an
algorithm cannot classify or interpret the available data.
Apart from the physiological and technical alarms, the monitor can also prompt with some messages describing
the system status or patient status.
7.3.2 Alarm Priorities

By severity, the alarms are classified into the following priority levels:
■ High priority alarms: indicates a life threatening situation or a severe device malfunction. High priority
alarms require an immediate response.
■ Medium priority alarms: indicates abnormal vital signs or a device malfunction. Medium priority alarms
require a timely response.
7-1
■ Low priority alarms: indicate a discomfort condition, a device malfunction, or an improper operation. Low
priority alarms require you to be aware of this condition.
■ Messages: provides additional information on the patient or the equipment.
7.3.3 Alarm Indicators

When an alarm occurs, the monitor indicates it through visual or audible alarm indications. For more
information, see the following table.
Alarm Indicator High Priority Medium Low Priority Message Comments

Alarm Priority Alarm Alarm
Alarm lamp Red Yellow Cyan None None

Flashing Flashing No flashing
frequency: 1.4 - frequency: 0.4 - Duty cycle:
2.8 Hz 0.8 Hz 100% on
Duty cycle: 20 - Duty cycle: 20 -
60% on 60% on
Audible ISO Repeat pattern Repeat pattern Single beep None None
tone of triple + of triple beeps
pattern double+ triple +
double beeps
Mode 1 Repeat pattern Repeat pattern Low-pitched None

of high-pitched of double beeps single -beep
single beep
Mode 2 Repeat pattern Repeat pattern Low-pitched None

of high-pitched of double beeps single beep
triple beeps
Alarm message White text Black text inside Black text inside White Alarm messages are
inside a red box a yellow box a cyan box text displayed in the alarm
information area at the
top of the screen. You
can select the alarm
messages to show the
alarm list.
Alarm priority *** ** * None The indicator appears in

indicator front of the
corresponding alarm
message.
Parameter value White text Black text inside Black text None None
inside a flashing a flashing inside a flashing
red box yellow box cyan box
NOTE
• When multiple alarms of different priority levels occur simultaneously, the monitor selects the
highest priority alarm to light the alarm lamp and issue the alarm tone.
• When multiple alarms of different priority levels occur simultaneously and should be displayed in
the same area, the monitor only displays the messages from the highest priority alarm.
• When multiple alarms of the same priority levels occur simultaneously and should be displayed in
the same area, all the alarm messages are displayed cyclically.
• Some physiological alarms, such as Asystole, are exclusive. They have identical alarm tones and
alarm lights with normal high level physiological alarms, but their alarm messages are displayed
exclusively. That is, when an exclusive physiological alarm and a normal high level physiological
alarm are triggered simultaneously, only exclusive physiological alarm message will be displayed.
7-2
7.3.4 Alarm Status Symbols
Apart from the alarm indicators as described in 7.3.3 Alarm Indicators, the monitor uses the following symbols
to indicate the alarm status:
Alarm pause: indicates that all the alarms are paused.
Alarm off: indicates that individual measurement alarms are turned off or the system is in the
alarm off status.
Audio pause: indicates that audible alarm tones are paused.
Audio off: indicates that audible alarm tones are turned off.
Alarm reset: indicates that alarms are acknowledged and the alarm system is reset.
7.4 Accessing On-screen Help for Technical Alarms (AlarmSight)

In the technical alarm list, alarm messages followed by Detail include help messages or pictures to help you
identify the problem. This function is called AlarmSight. To access AlarmSight, follow this procedure:
1. Select an alarm displaying in the technical alarm information area to enter the Alarms dialog.
2. From the alarm list select the desired alarm.
NOTE
• If there are no displayed alarms, then selecting the technical alarm area will not open any dialogs.
7.5 Checking the Physiological Alarms List

If the patient monitor has more than one physiological alarm, you can see the physiological alarm list by
selecting the physiological alarm information area to enter the Alarms dialog. If there is only one physiological
alarm, selecting the physiological alarm information area enters the Review dialog for the event created by this
alarm.
7-3
7.6 Changing Alarm Settings
Alarms settings can be changed by selecting Main Menu and choosing from the list in the Alarm column.
7.6.1 Setting Parameter Alarm Properties

To set parameter alarm properties, follow this procedure:
1. Access the Limits page in either of the following WAYS:
◆ Select the Alarm Setup quick key.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Alarm column select Limits.
2. Select a parameter tab and set alarm properties as desired.
You can also change the alarm properties of individual parameter from the corresponding parameter dialog.
NOTE
• The monitor may be configured to require an password or login to change alarm settings. For more
information, refer to 25.13.3 Selecting Password for User Authentication.
7.6.2 Setting Alarm Tone Properties
7.6.2.1 Changing the Alarm Volume

To change the alarm volume, follow this procedure:
1. Access the Setup page in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Alarm Setup quick key → select the Setup tab.
2. Set Alarm Volume. The alarm volume can be set from X to 10, in which X is the minimum volume allowed
by your department, and 10 is the maximum volume.
3. Select High Alarm Volume to set the volume of the high priority alarm.
4. Select Reminder Volume to set the volume of the reminder tone.
NOTE
• Alarm volume can only be set to 0 if the monitor is connected to a Central Monitoring System.
• When the alarm volume is set to 0, the alarm sound is turned off and the audio off symbol appears
on the screen.
7-4
• You cannot set the volume of high priority alarms if Alarm Volume is set to 0.
• You can set the Alarm Volume to 0 only when your monitor is connected to the CMS. If your monitor
is not connected to the CMS, the lowest setting of Alarm Volume is 1.
• When your monitor is connected to the CMS and Alarm Volume is set to 0, Alarm Volume
automatically changes to 2 if the CMS is disconnected.
7.6.3 Setting the Auto Limits for New Patient Switch

If the Auto Limits for New Patient function is enabled, a dialog box can pop up to ask you whether to set alarm
limits based on the latest parameter measurements for a newly admitted patient. To set the Auto Limits for
New Patient switch, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the alarm setup page in any of the following ways:
2. Set the Auto Limits for New Patient switch.
When Auto Limits for New Patient is switched on, the confirmation dialog box pops up if all of the following
requirements are met:
■ Within 10 minutes after the patient is admitted.
■ Continuous measurements are stable.
■ An NIBP measurement has been taken
■ HR alarm switch is on.
■ No fatal alarms are triggered.
■ The patient is not in poor perfusion condition.
■ Alarm limit of any parameter was not manually changed.
■ The monitor is not in intubation mode, rescue mode, private mode, or CPB mode.
NOTE
• The Auto Limits for New Patient function is intended for newly admitted patients only.
• The automatically set alarm limits take effect only after being confirmed.
7.6.4 Initiating Auto Alarm Limits

The monitor provides the auto alarm limits function to automatically adjust alarm limits according to the
patient’s vital signs. When auto limits are selected, the monitor calculates safe auto limits based on the latest
measured values. To get accurate auto alarm limits, collect a set of measured vital signs as a baseline.
To initiate auto alarm limits, follow this procedure:
1. Access the Limits page in either of the following ways:
2. From the Limits page, select Auto Limits at the left bottom.
3. Select OK from the popup dialog box.
Then the monitor will automatically calculate alarm limits based on the latest measured values. Before applying
these automatically created alarm limits, confirm if they are appropriate for the patient from the Limits dialog. If
not, you can adjust them manually. These alarm limits will remain unchanged until you select auto limits again
or adjust them manually.
The monitor calculates auto limits based on the following rules:
7-5
Module Parameter Lower Limit Upper Limit Auto Limit Range
Adult/ Neonate Adult/ Neonate

pediatric pediatric
ECG HR/PR HR × 0.8 or 40 (HR - 30) or 90 HR × 1.25 or (HR + 40) or Adult/pediatric: 35 to 240
(bpm) (whichever is (whichever is 240 200 Neonate: 55 to 225
greater) greater) (whichever is (whichever is
smaller) smaller)
Resp RR (rpm) RR × 0.5 or 6 (RR - 10) or 30 (RR × 1.5) or (RR + 25) or Adult/pediatric: 6 to 55
(whichever is (whichever is 30 (whichever 85 (whichever Neonate: 10 to 90
greater) greater) is smaller) is smaller)
SpO2 SpO2 (%) Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the
default alarm default alarm default alarm default alarm measurement range
limit limit limit limit
NIBP NIBP-S (SYS × 0.68 + (SYS - 15) or (SYS × 0.86 + (SYS + 15) or Adult: 45 to 270
(mmHg) 10) 45 (whichever 38) 105 Pediatric: 45 to 185
is greater) (whichever is
Neonate: 35 to 115
smaller)
NIBP-D (Dia × 0.68 + (Dia - 15) or (Dia × 0.86 + (Dia + 15) or Adult: 25 to 225
(mmHg) 6) 20 (whichever 32) 80 (whichever Pediatric: 25 to 150
is greater) is smaller)
Neonate: 20 to 90
NIBP-M (Mean × 0.68 (Mean - 15) or (Mean × 0.86 (Mean + 15 or Adult: 30 to 245
(mmHg) + 8) 35 (whichever + 35) 95) Pediatric: 30 to 180
is greater) (whichever is
Neonate: 25 to105
smaller)
Temp Txx (°C) (Txx - 0.5) (Txx - 0.5) (Txx + 0.5) (Txx + 0.5) 1 to 49
(xx refers
ΔT (°C) Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the
to
temperat
ure site) limit limit limit limit
IBP: ART/ IBP-S SYS × 0.68 + (SYS - 15) or SYS × 0.86 + (SYS + 15) or Adult: 45 to 270
Ao/UAP/ (mmHg) 10 45 (whichever 38 105 Pediatric: 45 to 185
BAP/FAP/ is greater) (whichever is Neonate: 35 to 115
LV/P1-P4 smaller)
(Arterial
pressure) IBP-D (Dia × 0.68 + (Dia - 15) or (Dia × 0.86 + (Dia + 15) or Adult: 25 to 225
(mmHg 6) 20 (whichever 32) 80 (whichever Pediatric: 25 to 150
is greater) is smaller) Neonate: 20 to 90
IBP-M Mean × 0.68 + (Mean - 15) or Mean × 0.86 + (Mean + 15) Adult: 30 to 245
(mmHg) 8 35 35 or 95 Pediatric: 30 to180
(whichever is (whichever is Neonate: 25 to 105
greater) smaller)
IBP: PA IBP-S SYS × 0.75 SYS × 0.75 SYS × 1.25 SYS × 1.25 3 to 120
(mmHg)
IBP-D Dia × 0.75 Dia × 0.75 Dia × 1.25 Dia × 1.25 3 to 120
(mmHg
IBP-M Mean × 0.75 Mean × 0.75 Mean × 1.25 Mean × 1.25 3 to 120
(mmHg)
IBP: CPP CPP CPP × 0.68 + 8 (CPP-15) or CPP × 0.86 + (CPP+15) or Adult: 20 to 235
(mmHg) 35, 35 95, Pediatric: 25 to175
(whichever is (whichever is Neonate: 25 to 100
greater) smaller)
7-6
Module Parameter Lower Limit Upper Limit Auto Limit Range
Adult/ Neonate Adult/ Neonate

pediatric pediatric
IBP: CVP/ IBP-M Mean × 0.75 Mean × 0.75 Mean × 1.25 Mean × 1.25 3 to 40
LAP/ (mmHg)
RAP/
UVP/P1-
P4
(Venous
pressure)
CO2 EtCO2 0 to 32: 0 to 32: 0 to 32: 0 to 32: Same as the

(mmHg) remains the remains the remains the remains the measurement range
same same same same
33 to 35: 29 33 to 35: 29 33 to 35: 41 33 to 35: 41 Same as the

measurement range
36 to 45: 36 to 45: 36 to 45: 36 to 45: Same as the

(etCO2 - 6) (etCO2 - 6) (etCO2 + 6) (etCO2 + 6) measurement range
46 to 48: 39 46 to 48: 39 46 to 48: 51 46 to 48: 51 Same as the

measurement range
>48: remains >48: remains >48: remains >48: remains Same as the
the same the same the same the same measurement range
FiCO2 None None Same as the Same as the Same as the

default alarm default alarm measurement range
limit limit
awRR awRR × 0.5 or (awRR - 10) or awRR × 1.5 or (awRR+25) or Adult/pediatric: 6 to 55

(rpm) 6 (whichever 30 (whichever 30 (whichever 85 rpm Neonate: 10 to 90
is greater) is greater) is smaller) (whichever is
smaller)
AG EtCO2 Same as the CO2 module
FiCO2 Same as the CO2 module
awRR awRR × 0.5 or (awRR - 10) or awRR × 1.5 or awRR+25 or Adult/pediatric: 6 to 55

(rpm) 6 (whichever 30 (whichever 30 (whichever 85 (whichever Neonate: 10 to 90
is greater) is greater) is smaller) is smaller)
FiAA/EtAA Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the
FiO2/EtCO2 Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the
FiN2O/ Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the Same as the
EtN2O default alarm default alarm default alarm default alarm measurement range
C.O. TB (°C) Adult: (TB - 1) N/A Adult: (TB + 1) N/A Same as the
Pediatric: N/A Pediatric: N/A measurement range
C.I. N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
TFC N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
7.6.5 Setting the Apnea Delay Time

To set the zero respiration rate delay time, follow this procedure:
1. Access the Setup page in either of the following ways in either of the following ways:
7-7
2. Select Apnea Delay to set the zero respiration rate delay time.
7.6.6 Switching on or off V-Tach Latching

When V-Tach Latching Lock is switched on, you can switch on or off V-Tach Latching. To do so, follow this
procedure:
1. Access the Setup page in either of the following ways in either of the following ways:
2. Switching on or off V-Tach Latching.
7.6.7 Restoring the Default Alarm Settings

To reset all alarm settings to the defaults, follow this procedure:
1. Access the Alarm page in either of the following ways:
2. On the Limits page, select Defaults at the bottom.
7.6.8 Setting the Length of Printed Waveforms

You can define the length of printed waveforms when an alarm is triggered. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Access the Setup page in either of the following ways:
2. Set Printing Duration On Alarm.
7.7 Pausing Alarms/Pausing Alarm Tones

You can either pause alarms or pause alarm tones. This depends on the pause setting. To set the pause function,
refer to 25.3.3 Defining the Pause Function.
7.7.1 Pausing Alarms

If the Pause function is configured to alarm pause, pressing the Alarm Pause quick key can temporarily disable
alarm indicators. For the configuration of the pause function, see 25.3.3 Defining the Pause Function. When
alarms are paused, the following rules are followed:
■ No physiological alarm will be presented.
■ For technical alarms, alarm sounds are paused, but alarm lamps and alarm messages continue to be
presented.
■ The remaining alarm pause time is displayed in the physiological alarm information area.
■ The alarm pause symbol is displayed in the system information area.
When the alarm pause time expires, the alarm paused state is automatically deactivated. You can also cancel the
alarm paused state by pressing the Alarm Pause quick key again.
7.7.1.1 Prolonging the Alarm Pause Time

If enabled, you can temporarily prolong the alarm pause time after the monitor enters the alarm paused state.
This capability is disabled by default. To prolong the alarm pause time, follow this procedure:
1. In the physiological alarm information area, select the alarm pause countdown.
2. Select Pause 5 min, Pause 10 min, or Pause 15 min.
7-8
NOTE
• Prolonging alarm pause time does not affect the setting of alarm pause time.
7.7.1.2 Switching Off All Alarms

If Pause Time is set to Permanent (see section 25.3.3.1 Setting the Alarm Pause Time/Alarm Tone Pause Time),
Pressing the Alarm Pause quick key permanently switches off all alarms. The alarm off state has the following
features:
■ Physiological alarms are switched off. The alarm lamp does not flash and alarm sound is not issued.
■ Alarm sound of technical alarms is switched off, but alarm lamp flashes and alarm messages are presented.
■ The message Alarm Off with red background is displayed in the physiological alarm information area.
■ The alarm off symbol is displayed in the system status information area.
To exit the alarm off state, press the Alarm Pause quick key again.
WARNING
• Pausing or switching off alarms may result in a hazard to the patient.
7.7.2 Pausing Alarm Sound

If the Pause function is configured to Audio Pause, pressing the Audio Pause quick key pauses alarm tone and
sets the quick key to be highlighted. For the configuration of the pause function, see section 25.3.3 Defining the
Pause Function. When alarm tones are paused, the following rules are followed:
■ The sound of all physiological alarms and technical alarms are switched off.
■ The remaining audio pause time is displayed in the physiological alarm information area.
■ The audio pause symbol is displayed in the system information area.
When the audio pause time expires, the audio paused state is automatically deactivated. You can also cancel the
audio paused state by pressing the highlighted Audio Pause quick key.
7.7.2.1 Prolonging the Alarm Tone Pause Time

If enabled on the machine, you can temporarily prolong the alarm tone pause time after the monitor enters the
alarm tone paused state. This capability is disable by default. To prolong the audio pause time, follow this
procedure:
1. In the physiological alarm information area, select the alarm pause countdown.
2. Select the alarm tone pause time. Options may include Pause 5 min, Pause 10 min, or Pause 15 min.
NOTE
• Prolonging alarm pause time does not affect the setting of alarm tone pause time.
7.7.2.2 Switching Off Alarm Sound

If Pause Time is set to Permanent (see section 25.3.3.1 Setting the Alarm Pause Time/Alarm Tone Pause Time),
pressing the Audio Pause quick key permanently switches off all alarm sound. The audio off state has the
following features:
■ Alarm sound of both physiological alarms and technical alarms is switched off.
■ The audio off symbol is displayed in the system information area.
To exit the audio off state, press the Audio Pause quick key again.
WARNING
• Pausing or switching off alarm sound may result in a hazard to the patient.
7-9
7.8 Resetting Alarms
Press the Alarm Reset quick key to acknowledge the ongoing alarms and reset the alarm system. When the
alarm system is reset, the alarm reset symbol displays in the system status information area for alarm symbols.
NOTE
• If a new alarm is triggered after the alarm system is reset, the alarm reset icon will disappear and the
alarm light and alarm tone will be reactivated.
7.8.1 Resetting Physiological Alarms

For physiological alarms, when the alarm system is reset, the following occur:
■ The alarm sound is silenced.
■ A √ appears before the alarm message, indicating that the alarm is acknowledged.
■ The color of the parameter numeric background corresponds with the alarm priority, but the parameter
numeric does not flash.
7.8.2 Resetting Technical Alarms

For technical alarms, when the alarm system is reset, the following occur:
■ Some technical alarms are cleared. The monitor gives no alarm indications.
■ Some technical alarms are changed to prompt messages.
■ For some technical alarms, the alarm is silenced and a √ appears before the alarm message, indicating that
the alarm is acknowledged.
For details about the indications of technical alarms when the alarm system is reset, see D.2 Technical Alarm
Messages.
7.9 Latching Alarms

The latching setting for physiological alarms defines how alarm indicators behave if you do not reset the alarms.
■ If you do not “latch” physiological alarms, their alarm indications disappear when the alarm condition ends.
■ If you “latch” physiological alarms, all visual and audible alarm indications remains (if configured) until the
alarms are reset. For latched alarms the time when the alarm is last triggered is displayed behind the alarm
message.
The monitor can be set to separately latch visual indications or simultaneously latch the visual and the audible
indications.
■ When visual indications are latched, visual indications, including alarm lamp, alarm message and its
background remains when the alarm condition ends and the time when the alarm last triggered is
displayed behind the alarm message.
■ When audible indications are latched, the monitor continues to issues alarm sounds when the alarm
condition ends.
To set how you want to latch the physiological alarms, see section 25.3.4 Latching Physiological Alarms.
NOTE
• Changing alarm priority may affect the latching status of the corresponding alarm. Determine if you
need to adjust the latching status for the specific alarm when you have changed its alarm priority.
• When the alarm system is reset, latched physiological alarms are cleared.
7 - 10
7.10 Nurse Call
The monitor provides a nurse call connector to output a nurse call signal when a user-defined alarm occurs. To
obtain a nurse call signal, use the nurse call cable to connect the hospital nurse call system with the monitor’s
nurse call connector.
Alarms are indicated on the nurse call device only when the following conditions are met:
■ The nurse call system is enabled.
■ A user-defined alarm occurs.
■ Alarms are not paused or reset.
WARNING
• Do not rely exclusively on the nurse call system for alarm notification. Remember that the most
reliable alarm notification combines audible and visual alarm indications with the patient’s clinical
condition.
7.11 Calling for Help

This monitor can be configured to call monitors in the same department, the central station, and the nurse call
system so that nearby doctors and nurses can come for help.
7.11.1 Issuing the Call Help Signal

To call help, select the Call Help quick key and select OK from the popup dialog box. If OK is not selected within
5 seconds then the monitor will automatically send out the call help signal.
After the call help signal is sent out, the Call Help quick key flashes in red. Select the Call Help quick key again to
stop the call help signal.
Monitors receiving the call help signal issue a sound and a dialog box pops up indicating which monitor is
calling. Select OK to acknowledge the call and stop the sound at this monitor.
NOTE
• The call help function works only when the monitor is connected to the network.
• The call help sound may disturb patients in the same department.
7.12 CPB Mode

The CPB (Cardiopulmonary Bypass) mode is activated only if you set the department to OR.
In the CPB mode, all the physiological alarms and technical alarms are switched off. So when performing CPB,
you can put the monitor in the CPB mode to inactivate unnecessary alarms.
7.12.1 Entering the CPB Mode

To enter the CPB mode, choose either of the following ways:
■ Select the CPB Mode quick key.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Alarm column select CPB Mode.
In the CPB mode, CPB Mode is displayed in the physiological alarm area with a red background color.
NOTE
• When the CPB mode is entered, the monitor stops all NIBP measurements. You can restart NIBP
measurements after entering the CPB mode.
7 - 11
7.12.2 Exiting the CPB Mode
To exit the CPB mode, choose either of the following ways:
■ Select the CPB Mode quick key.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Alarm column select Exit CPB Mode.
7.13 Intubation Mode

Intubation mode is available for Resp, CO2, and AG monitoring. When performing intubation during general
anesthesia, you can put the monitor in the intubation mode in order to inactivate unnecessary alarms.
In the intubation mode, Resp, CO2 and AG related physiological alarms are switched off.
7.13.1 Entering the Intubation Mode

To enter the intubation mode, choose either of the following ways:
■ Select the Intubation Mode quick key.
■ From the bottom of the Resp, CO2, or AG dialog, select Intubation Mode.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Alarm column select Intubation Mode.
7.13.2 Exiting the Intubation Mode

To exit the intubation mode, choose either of the following ways:
■ Select the Intubation Mode quick key.
■ From the bottom of the Resp, CO2, or AG dialog, select Exit Intubation Mode.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key from the Alarm column → select Exit Intubation Mode.
7.14 Testing Alarms

The monitor automatically performs a selftest at startup. Check that an alarm tone is heard, the alarm lamp
illuminates, one after the other, in red, yellow, and cyan. This indicates that the visible and audible alarm
indicators functions correctly.
7 - 12
8 Monitoring ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT
8.1 ECG Introduction

The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and displays it on the monitor as
waveforms and numerics. ECG monitoring provides 3-, 5-, 6-, and 12-lead ECG monitoring, ST-segment analysis,
arrhythmia analysis, QT/QTc measurements, and optional 12-lead resting analysis via the Glasgow algorithm.
The associated monitor incorporating ST analysis has the ST label.
The associated monitor incorporating 12-lead has the 12-lead label.
8.2 ECG Safety Information
WARNING
• This equipment is not intended for direct cardiac application.
• Ensure that the conductive parts of ECG electrodes and associated connectors, including the neutral
electrode, do not come into contact with any other conductive parts including earth.
• Always use defibrillation-proof ECG cables during defibrillation.
• Do not touch the patient, or metal devices connected to the patient, during defibrillation.
• To minimize the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedures, ensure that the
monitor’s cables and transducers never come into contact with the electrosurgery unit (ESU).
• To minimize the hazard of burns during use of high-frequency surgical unit (ESU), the ECG
electrodes should not be located between the surgical site and the ESU return electrode.
CAUTION
• Only use parts and accessories specified in this manual. Follow the instructions for use and adhere to
all warnings and cautions.
• Periodically inspect the electrode application sites to ensure skin integrity. If the skin quality
changes, replace the electrodes or change the application site.
• Interference from an ungrounded instrument near the patient or electrosurgery usage can induce
noise and artifact into the waveforms.
8.3 ECG Display

The following figures show the ECG waveform and numeric areas. The display may be configured to look slightly
different.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
8-1
(1) ECG lead label of the displayed waveform (2) ECG waveform gain
(3) ECG filter mode (4) Notch filter status
(5) Paced status: If Paced is set to Yes, is displayed. If Paced is set to No, is displayed.
(6) HR/PR alarm message
(7) Pace pulse marker: If Paced is set to Yes, pace pulse markers “|” are displayed corresponding to detected
pacer for each beat.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(1) Parameter label (2) HR measurement unit
(3) HR alarm limits (4) HR value
8.4 Preparing for ECG Monitoring
8.4.1 Preparing the Patient Skin

Proper skin preparation is necessary to ensure good signal quality at the electrode sites, as the skin is a poor
conductor of electricity. To properly prepare the skin, choose flat areas and then follow this procedure:
1. Shave hair from skin at chosen electrode sites.
2. Gently rub skin surface at sites to remove dead skin cells.
3. Thoroughly cleanse the site with a mild soap and water solution. We do not recommend using ether or
pure alcohol, because this dries the skin and increases the resistance.
4. Dry the skin completely before applying electrodes.
8.4.2 Applying Electrodes and Connecting the Patient

To connect ECG cables, follow this procedure:
1. Check that electrode packages are intact and the electrodes are not past the expiry date. Ensure the
electrode gel is moist. If you are using snap electrodes, attach the snaps to the electrodes before placing
electrodes on the patient.
2. Place the electrodes on the prepared sites. Ensure that all electrodes have good skin contact.
3. Connect the leadwires to the patient cable if not already connected.
4. Plug the patient cable into the ECG connector.
CAUTION
• Never mix patient electrode types or brands. This may lead to impedance mismatches issues.
NOTE
• When applying the electrodes, avoid bony area, obvious layers of fat, and major muscles. Muscle
movement can result in electrical interference. Applying electrodes on major muscles, for example
8-2
on muscles of the thorax, may lead to erroneous arrhythmia alarms due to excessive muscle
movement.
8.4.3 Lead Wire Color Code

The following table lists the color coding of leadwires for AHA standards:
Lead Label Color
Right arm RA White
Left arm LA Black
Right leg (neutral) RL Green
Left leg LL Red
Chest 1 V1 Brown/Red
Chest 2 V2 Brown/Yellow
Chest 3 V3 Brown/Green
Chest 4 V4 Brown/Blue
Chest 5 V5 Brown/Orange
Chest 6 V6 Brown/Violet
8.4.4 ECG Electrode Placements

In this section, electrode placement is illustrated using the AHA naming convention.
8.4.4.1 3-leadwire Electrode Placement

The following is the electrode configuration when a 3-leadwire cable is
used: RA LA
■ RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right

shoulder.
■ LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left
shoulder.
■ LL placement: on the left lower abdomen. LL
8.4.4.2 5-leadwire and 6-leadwire Electrode Placement

The following is the electrode configuration for a 5-leadwires cables:
■ RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right RA LA
shoulder.
■ LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left
shoulder. V
■ RL placement: on the right lower abdomen.

LL
■ LL placement: on the left lower abdomen.
RL
■ V placement: on the chest in any of the V1 to V6 positions.
For 6-leadwire placement, you can use the position for the 5 -
leadwire placement but with two chest leads. The two chest leads (Va
and Vb) can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions. For
8-3
more information, see 8.4.4.3 Chest Electrode Placement. The Va and Vb lead positions are configurable. For more
information, see 8.5.3.3 Changing Va and Vb Labels.
8.4.4.3 Chest Electrode Placement

The chest electrode can be placed at the following positions:
■ V1 placement: on the fourth intercostal space to the right of
the sternum. V6
■ V2 placement: on the fourth intercostal space to the left of

V1
the sternum. V5
■ V3 placement: midway between the V2 and V4 electrode V4

positions.
■ V4 placement: on the fifth intercostal space at the left
midclavicular line.
V2 V3
■ V5 placement: on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with
the V4 electrode position.
■ V6 placement: on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position.
■ V3R-V6R placement: on the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to those on the left.
NOTE
• For the 5-leadwire and 6-leadwire placement, place the precordial electrode according to the
physician's preference.
8.4.4.4 10-leadwire Electrode Placement

12-lead ECG uses 10 electrodes, which are placed on the patient’s four limbs
and chest. The limb electrodes should be placed on the limb extremities and
the chest electrodes placed according to the physician’s preference. The figure
at right illustrates the conventional 10-leadwire electrode placement.
8.4.4.5 Lead Placement for Surgical Patients

The surgical site should be taken into consideration when placing electrodes on a surgical patient. For example,
for open-chest surgery, the chest electrodes can be placed on the lateral chest or back. To reduce artifacts and
interference from electrosurgical units, you can place the limb electrodes close to the shoulders and lower
abdomen and the chest electrodes on the left side of the mid-chest. Do not place the electrodes on the upper
arm. Otherwise, the ECG waveform will be very small.
8-4
WARNING
• To reduce the hazard of burns during use of electrosurgical units (ESU), the ECG electrodes should
not be located between the surgical site and the ESU return electrode.
• Never entangle the ESU cable and the ECG cable together.
• When using ESU, never place ECG electrodes near the grounding plate of the ESU, as this can cause a
lot of interference on the ECG signal.
• When using electrosurgery units, ensure proper contact of the ESU return electrode to the patient to
avoid burns at monitor measurement sites. Also ensure that the ESU return electrode is near the
operating area.
8.4.5 Choosing the ECG Lead Type

To choose ECG lead type, follow this procedure:
1. Select the ECG numeric area or waveform area to enter the ECG dialog.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Set Lead Set according to the lead type you are going to use. The default lead type is Auto. In this case, the
monitor automatically detects the lead type.
8.4.6 Checking Paced Status

It is important to correctly set the patient’s paced status before you start monitoring ECG. The paced symbol
is displayed when Paced is set to Yes. Pace pulse markers “|” are displayed on each ECG waveform whenever a
pacer signal is detected. If Paced is set to No or unspecified, the symbol will be shown in the ECG waveform
area.
To change the paced status, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Pacer tab.
3. Set Paced to Yes or No.
You can also change the patient’s paced status from the Patient Management dialog. For more information, see
5.2.1 Entering the Patient Management Dialog.
If you did not set the paced status, the monitor issues a prompt tone when pace pulse is detected. At the same
time, the paced symbol flashes and the message Please check if the patient has a pacemaker? appears in
the ECG waveform area. Check and set the patient’s paced status.
WARNING
• For paced patients, you must set Paced to Yes. If it is incorrectly set to No, the monitor could mistake
a pace pulse for a QRS complex and fail to alarm when the ECG signal is too weak. On ventricular
paced patients, episodes of ventricular tachycardia may not always be detected. Do not rely entirely
upon the system’s automated arrhythmia detection algorithm.
• False low heart rate or false asystole alarms may result with certain pacemakers because of
pacemaker artifacts, such as electrical overshoot of the pacemaker overlapping the true QRS
complexes.
• Do not rely entirely on rate meter alarms when monitoring patients with pacemakers. Always keep
these patients under close surveillance.
• The auto pacer recognition function is not applicable to pediatric patients, neonatal patients, and
patients with NMT monitoring.
8-5
8.4.7 Enabling Pacer Rejection
The pace pulse rejection function is disabled by default. To enable this function, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Pacer tab.
3. Switch on Pacer Reject.
NOTE
• When pace pulses are detected, the pace pulse markers “|” are shown on the ECG waveforms. Pacer
Rejection setting has no impact on the display of pace pulse markers “|”.
• You can switch on pacer rejection only when Paced is set to Yes. If Paced is set to no, the Pacer Reject
function is disabled.
8.5 Changing ECG Settings
8.5.1 Choosing an ECG Screen

When monitoring ECG, several display options are available.
■ For 3-lead ECG monitoring, only normal screen is available.
■ For 5-lead ECG monitoring, besides the normal screen, you can also choose Full-screen (7-lead) or Half
Screen (7-lead).
■ For 6-lead ECG monitoring, besides the normal screen, you can also choose Full-screen (8-lead) or Half
Screen (8-lead).
■ For 12-lead ECG monitoring, besides the normal screen, you can also choose Full-screen (7-lead), Half
Screen (7-lead), or 12-Lead (12-lead analysis).
To choose the desired screen configuration, follow this procedure:

2. Select Full-Screen, Half-Screen, or 12-Lead when visible.
To return to the normal screen, press the highlighted button to unselect that screen.
Alternately you can choose the desired screen configuration as follows:
1. Select the Screen Setup quick key → Choose Screen or select the Main Menu quick key → from the
Display column select Choose Screen.
2. Select ECG Full-Screen, ECG Half-Screen, or ECG 12-Lead.
8.5.2 Setting ECG Alarm Properties

To select the desired ECG alarm options, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab.
3. Select the desired alarm options.
8.5.3 Changing ECG Wave Settings
8.5.3.1 Selecting the Leads of Displayed ECG Waveforms

To select the desired ECG waveforms to be displayed, follow this procedure:
3. Select ECG to set the lead of each displayed ECG waveform.
8-6
4. If more than three ECG waveforms are to be displayed, select the More Leads tab, and then select ECG to
set leads of other ECG waveforms.
For optimal ECG analysis, select leads with the following characteristics:
■ The QRS complex should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should not be biphasic.
■ The QRS complex should be tall and narrow.
■ The P waves and T waves should be less than 0.2mV.
CAUTION
• Ensure that you have selected the optimal leads with the best waveform amplitude and the highest
signal-to-noise ratio. Selecting the optimal leads is important for detecting beats, classifying beats,
and detecting ventricular fibrillation.
8.5.3.2 Changing ECG Waveform Size

If the ECG waveform is too small or clipped, you can change its size by selecting the appropriate Gain setting. To
3. Select ECG gain to set the size of each ECG waveform.
4. If more than three ECG waveforms are displayed, select the More Leads tab, and then select ECG Gain to
change the sizes of other ECG waveforms. If you select Auto, the monitor automatically adjusts the size of
the ECG waveforms for all the leads.
8.5.3.3 Changing Va and Vb Labels

When monitoring ECG with 6-leadwire. You can change the labels of Va and Vb leads. To do so, follow this
procedure:
3. Set Va and Vb according to the locations of the Va and Vb electrode sites. Default settings are Va and Vb.
8.5.3.4 Changing ECG Waveform Speed

To change ECG waveform speed, follow this procedure:
3. Set the desired Speed.
8.5.3.5 Setting the ECG Filter

To set the appropriate ECG waveform filter mode, follow this procedure:
3. Set Filter.
◆ Diagnostic: use when diagnostic quality ECG is required. The unfiltered ECG waveform is displayed so
that changes such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segment are
visible.
◆ Monitor: use under normal monitoring conditions.
◆ Surgery: use when the signal is distorted by high frequency or low frequency interference. High
frequency interference usually results in large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular.
Low frequency interference usually leads to wandering or rough baseline. The surgery filter reduces
8-7
artifacts and interference from electrosurgical units. Under normal measurement conditions,
selecting Surgery may suppress certain features or details of the QRS complexes.
◆ ST: recommended for ST monitoring.
8.5.3.6 Switching On or Off the Notch Filter

The notch filter removes the line frequency interference. To switch on or off the notch filter, follow this
procedure:
3. Switch on or off Notch Filter.
NOTE
• The notch filter can only be switched on or off when ECG Filter is set to Diagnostic. In other filter
modes, the notch filter is always on.
8.5.4 Disabling the Smart Lead Off Function

The monitor provides the smart lead off function. When the lead corresponding to the first ECG wave gets
detached but another lead is available, the monitor automatically switches to the available lead to recalculate
heart rate, and to analyze and detect arrhythmias. When you reconnect the detached leads, the monitor
automatically switches back to the original lead.
The smart lead off function is enabled by default. To disable this function, follow this procedure:
3. Switch off Smart Lead.
8.5.5 Adjusting the QRS Volume

To adjust the QRS volume, follow this procedure:
3. Set QRS Volume.
When valid SpO2 measurements are available, the monitor adjusts the pitch of QRS tone based on the SpO2
value.
8.5.6 Adjusting the Minimum QRS Detection Threshold

To avoid false asystole alarm due to low R wave amplitude, and to avoid tall T waves and P waves being mistaken
for QRS complexes, the monitor provides a means to manually adjust the minimum QRS detection threshold.
To adjust the minimum QRS detection threshold, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Setup tab and set Filter to Monitor.
3. Select the QRS Threshold tab.
4. Select up or down arrow buttons to adjust the minimum threshold for QRS detection. Selecting Default
resets the QRS threshold to the default value (0.16 mV).
CAUTION
• The setting of the QRS detection threshold can affect the sensitivity for arrhythmia, ST, QT/QTc
detection, and heart rate calculation.
8-8
• If the QRS amplitude is low, the monitor might not be able to detect the beats and false asystole calls
may occur.
NOTE
• The minimum QRS detection threshold can only be adjusted when the ECG filter is set to Monitor.
8.6 Monitoring Arrhythmia

Arrhythmia monitoring is intended for adult and pediatric patients.
8.6.1 Arrhythmia Safety Information
WARNING
• Heart rate reading may be affected by cardiac arrhythmias. Do not rely entirely on heart rate alarms
when monitoring patients with arrhythmias. Always keep these patients under close surveillance.
• The arrhythmia analysis program is intended to detect ventricular arrhythmias and atrial
fibrillation. It is not designed to detect all the atrial or supraventricular arrhythmias. It may
incorrectly identify the presence or absence of an arrhythmia. Therefore, a physician must analyze
the arrhythmia information with other clinical findings.
• Atrial fibrillation (Afib) detection function is not intended for pediatric and neonatal patients.
CAUTION
• Since the arrhythmia detection algorithm sensitivity and specificity are less than 100%, it is possible
for false arrhythmias to be detected and true arrhythmia events to not be detected. The possibility
increases when the signal is noisy.
• The ECG size and minimum QRS detection threshold settings affect arrhythmia detection and heart
rate calculation sensitivity.
• If QRS amplitude is low, the monitor might be unable to calculate heart rate and thus create false
asystole calls. During the learning phase of the algorithm, arrhythmia detection may not be
available. It is recommended to closely monitor patient condition during, and for several minutes
after, the learning phase to allow the algorithm to reach optimal detection performance.
8.6.2 Arrhythmia Events

This section lists all arrhythmia events and their criteria.
8.6.2.1 Lethal Arrhythmia Events
Arrhythmia message Description
Asystole No QRS complex detected within the set time interval in the absence of ventricular
fibrillation or chaotic signal.
V-Fib/V-Tach A fibrillatory wave for 6 consecutive seconds.

A dominant rhythm of adjacent PVCs and the ventricular rate is greater than the V-tach rate
limit.
V-Tach The number of consecutive PVCs is greater than or equal to the V-Tach PVCs limit, and the
ventricular rate is greater than or equal to the V-Tach rate limit.
8-9
8.6.2.2 Nonlethal Arrhythmia Events
Arrhythmia message Description
Vent Brady The number of consecutive PVCs is greater than or equal to V brady PVC limit and the
ventricular rate is less than the V-Brady Rate limit.
Extreme Tachy The heart rate is greater than the extreme tachycardia limit.
Extreme Brady The heart rate is less than the extreme bradycardia limit.
R on T R on T PVC is detected.
Run PVCs More than two consecutive PVCs, but lower than the V-Brady PVCs limit, and the ventricular
rate is lower than the V-Tach rate limit.
Couplet A Pair of PVCs detected in between normal beats.
Multiform PVC Multiform PVCs detected in Multif. PVC's Window (which is adjustable).
PVC One PVC detected in between normal beats.
Bigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V, N, V*.
Trigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, N, V,N, N, V, N, N, V*.
Tachy The heart rate is greater than the tachycardia limit.
Brady The heart rate is lower than the bradycardia limit.
Pacer not Capture No QRS complex detected for 300 ms following a pace pulse (for paced patients only).
Pacer not Pacing No pace pulse detected for 1.75 x average R-to-R intervals following a QRS complex (for
paced patients only).
Missed Beat At least 3 consecutive Ns*, and

The current RR interval is greater than 1.5 x previous RR interval, and
The next RR interval is lower than 1.5 x average RR interval, and
HR lower than 100 and the current RR interval is greater than 1.75 x average RR interval , or
HR is greater than or equal to 100 and the current RR interval is greater than 1000 ms.
Nonsus V-Tach The number of consecutive PVCs is lower than the V-Tach PVCs limit but greater than 2, and
the ventricular rate is greater than or equal to the V-Tach Rate limit.
Vent Rhythm The number of consecutive PVCs is greater than or equal to the V-Brady PVCs limit, and
ventricular rate is greater than or equal to the V-Brady Rate limit but lower than V-Tach Rate
limit.
Pause No QRS complex is detected within the set pause time threshold.
Irr Rhythm Consistently irregular rhythm (N*, irregular RR interval change is greater than 12.5%)
A-Fib (for adult only) P wave is absent and normal beat RR intervals are irregular.
PVCs/min PVCs/min exceeds high limit.
Pauses/min Pauses/min exceeds high limit.
Irr Rhythm End Irregular rhythm no longer detected for the irregular rhythm end delay time.
A-Fib End (for adult only) Atrial fibrillation no longer detected for the A-Fib end delay time.
*N: normal beat; V: ventricular beat
8.6.3 Displaying Arrhythmia Information

You can display the arrhythmia information in the numeric area. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Access Tile Layout using either of the following ways:
◆ Select Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Tile Layout.
8 - 10
2. Click the numeric area where you want to display the arrhythmia information, and then select ECG →
Arrhythmia.
8.6.4 Changing Arrhythmia Settings
8.6.4.1 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings

To set the arrhythmia alarm properties, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Arrhythmia tab→ Alarm tab.
3. Set alarm properties as desired.
NOTE
• You can switch off lethal arrhythmia alarms only when the monitor is set to enableLethal Arrh
Alarms Off. For more information, see 25.3.9.1 Setting the Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms Switch.
• The priority of lethal arrhythmia alarms is always high. It cannot be altered.
8.6.4.2 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Threshold Settings

You can change threshold settings for certain arrhythmia alarms. When an arrhythmia exceeds its threshold, an
alarm will be triggered. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Arrhythmia tab → select the Threshold tab.
3. Enter the password if required. For more information, refer to 25.13.3 Selecting Password for User
Authentication.
4. Set the threshold for the desired arrhythmia alarms.
NOTE
• The asystole delay time relates to ECG relearning. When heart rate is less than 30 bpm, it is
recommended to set Asystole Delay to 10 sec.
8.6.4.3 Arrhythmia Threshold Range
Arrhythmia Threshold Range
Asystole Delay 3 sec to 10 sec
Tachy (HR High) 60 bpm to 295 bpm
Brady (HR Low) 16 bpm to 120 bpm
Extreme Tachy 60 bpm to 300 bpm
Extreme Brady 15 bpm to 115 bpm
Multif PVCs Window 3 beats to 31 beats
V-Tach Rate 100 bpm to 200 bpm
V-Brady Rate 15 bpm to 60 bpm
V-Tach PVCs 3 beats to 99 beats
V-Brady PVCs 3 beats to 99 beats
PVCs/min High 1 to 100
Pauses/min 1 to 15
8 - 11
Arrhythmia Threshold Range
Pause Threshold 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec, 2.5 sec, 3.0 sec
AF/Irr Rhy End Time 0 min, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30
min
8.6.4.4 Setting Thresholds for PVC-Related Alarms

PVC-related alarms are detected on the basis of the current PVC rate and the number of consecutive PVCs.
To set the required thresholds for PVC-related alarms, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Arrhythmia tab → select the More Threshold tab.
Authentication.
Adjust V-Tach PVCs, V-Tach Rate, V-Brady PVCs, and V-Brady Rate as necessary to set the thresholds for the
desired PVC-related alarms.
The following figure illustrates the conditions under which PVC alarms will be generated if V-Tach PVCs is set to
6, V-Tach Rate is set to 130, V-Brady PVCs is set to 5, and V-Brady Rate is set to 40.
If both V-Tach PVCs and V-Tach Rate are greater than or equal to the limits, a V-Tach alarm is generated.
■ If the number of consecutive PVCs is lower than the V-Tach PVCs limit (6) but greater than 2, and PVC rate is
greater or equal to the V-Tach Rate limit (130), a Nonsus V-Tach alarm is generated.
■ If the number of consecutive PVCs is greater than or equal to the V-Brady PVCs limit (5), and PVC rate is
lower than the V Brady limit (40), a Vent Brady alarm is generated.
■ If both the V-Brady PVCs and V-Brady Rate are lower than the limits, but V-Brady PVCs is greater than 2, a
Run PVCs alarm is generated.
■ If the V-Brady PVCs and V-Brady Rate are greater than or equal to limits, but the Vent rate is is lower than V-
Tach Rate (130), a Vent Rhythm alarm is generated.
8.6.5 Intelligent Arrhythmia Alarm

Normally, an arrhythmia alarm is presented when an alarm condition is detected. However, there are certain
situations that can inhibit audible and visible alarm indications even though an alarm condition was detected.
For more information, see 8.6.5.1 Arrhythmia Alarm Chains and 8.6.5.2 Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Rules.
8 - 12
8.6.5.1 Arrhythmia Alarm Chains
If multiple alarms overlap, announcing all of the detected alarm conditions would be confusing, and a more
serious condition might be overlooked. So arrhythmia alarms are prioritized by alarm "chains".
Asystole
High Priority
VͲFib/VͲTach
VͲTach / Vent Brady
Extreme Tachy/
Extreme Brady
Beat Detection
PVC Alarm Chain Rate Alarm Chain AͲFib Alarm Chain
Alarm Chain
Nonsus VͲTach / AͲFib/

Pauses/min Tachy/Brady
Vent Rhythm AͲFib End
HR High / Irr. Rhythm/

Run PVCs Pause
Medium Priority
HR Low Irr.Rhythm End
Couplet Pacer not Capture /

Pacer not Pacing /
Missed Beats
R on T
Bigeminy
Trigeminy
PVCs/min
Multiform PVC
PVC
8.6.5.2 Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Rules

The following table explains how audible and visual alarms are indicated during arrhythmia alarm timeout.
Previous alarm Current alarm Alarm indication
Alarm in high priority Alarm in high priority chain Alarm light and alarm tone
chain
Alarm in medium priority chain During timeout period, alarm light and alarm tone
are disabled. When the timeout period is reached,
alarm light and alarm tone are reactivated.
Alarm in medium Alarm in high priority chain Alarm light and alarm tone
priority chain
Alarm in the same medium priority Alarm light and alarm tone
chain, but with higher priority
The same alarm reoccurs During timeout period, alarm light and alarm tone
are disabled. When the timeout period is reached,
Alarm in the same medium priority During timeout period, alarm light and alarm tone
chain, but with lower priority are disabled. When the timeout period is reached,
Alarm in other medium priority chain Alarm light and alarm tone
8 - 13
8.6.5.3 Arrhythmia Alarm Refractory Period
For the following eight alarms in medium priority chain, there is a 30-second refractory period. That is to say, if
the same alarm is not presented within 30 seconds after the previous alarm disappears.
■ Couplet
■ R on T
■ PVCs/min High
■ Multiform PVCs
■ PVC
■ Missed Beat
■ Pacer not Capture
■ Pacer not Pacing
8.7 ST Segment Monitoring

ST segment analysis is intended for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.To use this feature, the MPM must be
labeled to support ST analysis, see 8.1 ECG Introduction.
8.7.1 ST Safety Information
WARNING
• ST segment deviation values may be affected by such factors as certain drugs or metabolic and
conduction disturbances.
• ST deviation is often calculated at a fixed offset from the J point. Changes in heart rate may affect ST.
• The significance of ST segment changes needs to be determined by a physician.
• This monitor provides information regarding changes in ST deviation levels. The clinical significance
of the ST level change information should be determined by a physician.
8.7.2 Enabling ST Monitoring

The ST monitoring function is disabled by default. Before you start ST monitoring, enable the ST function. To do
so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ST tab→ select the Setup tab.
3. Switch on ST Analysis.
Reliable ST monitoring cannot be ensured under the following situations:

■ You are unable to get a lead that is not noisy.
■ Arrhythmias, such as atrial fibrillation or atrial flutter, which may cause an irregular baseline.
■ The patient is continuously ventricularly paced.
■ The patient has left bundle branch block.
In these cases, you may consider switching off ST monitoring.
8.7.3 Displaying ST Deviation Numerics

To display ST numerics, follow this procedure:
1. Access Tile Layout by either of the following ways:
2. Click the numeric area where you want to display the ST numerics, and then select ECG → ST.
8 - 14
The ST parameter display area is configured differently according to the ECG cable used:
■ When you are using the 3-lead ECG leadwires, a separate ST numeric area does not appear on the display.
The ST deviation value displays in the ECG numeric area.
■ When you are using the 5-lead ECG leadwires, the ST numeric area displays 7 ST deviation values: ST-I, ST-II,
ST-III, ST-aVR, ST-aVL, ST-aVF, ST-V.
■ When you are using the 6-lead ECG leadwires, the ST numeric area displays 8 ST deviation values: ST-I, ST-II,
ST-III, ST-aVR, ST-aVL, ST-aVF, ST-Va, ST-Vb.
■ When you are using the 12-lead ECG leadwires, the ST numeric area displays12 ST deviation values: ST-I, ST-
II, ST-III, ST-aVR, ST-aVL, ST-aVF, ST-V1, ST-V2, ST-V3, ST-V4, ST-V5, ST-V6.
This example shows the ST numeric area when 5-lead ECG cable is used. The monitor screen may look slightly
different:
(4) (5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Parameter label (2) ST measurement unit
(3) ST alarm off symbol (4) Lead labels
(5) ST numerics: a positive value indicates ST segment elevation, and a negative value indicates ST
segment depression.
8.7.4 Displaying ST Segments in the Waveform Area

You can display ST segments in the waveform area. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the waveform area where you want to display the ST segments, and then select ST→ ECG → ST
Segment.
ST segment shows a QRS complex segment for each measured ST lead. The current ST segment is drawn in the
same color as the ECG wave, usually green, superimposed over the stored reference segment, drawn in a
different color. The information is updated once every ten seconds.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) (5)
8 - 15
(1) ST lead (2) Current ST deviation value
(3) Baseline ST deviation value (4) 1 mV scale
(5) Current ST segment (green) and baseline ST segment (white)
8.7.5 Entering the ST View

In ST View mode a complete QRS segment for each ST lead is displayed. The color of the current ST segments
and ST deviation values is consistent with the color of the ECG waveforms, normally green. The color of the
baseline ST segments and ST deviation values is white.
To enter the ST View, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ST tab.
3. From the bottom of the dialog, select ST View.
8.7.6 Saving the Current ST Deviation and Segment as Baseline

ST deviation is typically monitored as a relative change from a baseline value. Set an ST baseline when ST
deviation values become stable. If you did not set the ST baseline, the monitor automatically saves the baseline
when valid ST deviation values appear for 5 minutes. To set the ST baseline, follow this procedure:
1. From the ST View, select Set Baseline.
2. From the pop-up dialog box, select OK to set the current ST segments and values as the baseline.
From the ST View, you can also perform the following operations:
■ Display or hide ST baseline by selecting Display Baseline or Hide Baseline.
■ Display or hide the position of ISO point, J point and ST point by selecting Display Marker or Hide Marker.
CAUTION
• Updating ST baseline affects ST alarms.
8.7.7 Entering the ST Graphic

To display ST Graphic, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ST tab.
3. Select ST Graphic.
The following figure shows the ST Graphic when ST Alarm Mode is set to Absolute. The height of the bar
indicates the ST deviation value of corresponding ST lead. The color of the bar indicates ST alarm status: green
indicates that corresponding ST deviation value is within alarm limits; cyan, yellow and red indicate that the ST
deviation value exceeds the alarm limits. The color matches ST alarm priority.
8 - 16
The following figure shows the ST Graphic when ST Alarm Mode is set to Relative. The height of grey bar
indicates the baseline ST deviation value and the green bar (cyan, yellow or red if an alarm occurs) indicates
relative ST from that baseline.
8.7.8 Changing ST Settings
8.7.8.1 Setting ST Alarm Properties

To set ST alarm properties, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ST tab→ Alarm tab.
3. Set ST Alarm Mode to Absolute or Relative.
◆ Absolute: you can separately set the alarm properties for each ST alarm for each lead.
◆ Relative: you can set the alarm properties for ST Single and ST Dual alarms.
4. Set ST alarm properties.
8.7.8.2 Changing Leads for ST Display

The monitor automatically selects the three most deviated leads for ST display. You can also manually select the
leads. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ST tab → select the Setup tab.
3. Set ST Segment. You can select up to 3 leads.
8 - 17
8.7.8.3 Showing ISO Point, J Point, and ST Point Markers
In the waveform area, the ISO point, J point, and ST point marker do not display on the ST segments by default.
To display these markers, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ST tab→ select the Setup tab.
3. Switch on Show Markers.
8.7.9 Adjusting ST Measurement Points
8.7.9.1 About ST Point, ISO Point, and J Point

The ST deviation value for each beat is the potential difference between the isoelectric (ISO) point and the ST
point. The ISO point provides the baseline. The ST point is located between the J point and the start of the T-
wave. The J point is the end of the QRS complex. As the ST point is at a fixed distance away from the J point (40,
60, 80 etc msec), manually adjusting the J point helps you correctly position the ST point.
(1) (2) (3) T (4)

P
(1) ISO point (2) J point (3) ST point (4) ST deviation
8.7.9.2 Setting ST Point, ISO Point, and J Point
CAUTION
• If Auto Adjust is Off, or if the patient's heart rate or ECG morphology changes significantly, the ISO
and ST points need to be occasionally adjusted because this may affect the QT interval and thus the
location of the ST point. False ST segment depression or elevation may occur if the isoelectric point
or the ST point is incorrectly set.
• Always ensure that the locations of ST points are appropriate for the patient.
To set the ST point, ISO point, and J point, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ST tab→ select the Adjust tab.
3. Set ST Point.
The setting for Auto Adjust defines the method of adjusting the ISO and J point locations. Auto Adjust is
enabled by default. In this case, the locations of the ISO point and J point are automatically determined by the
algorithm. When Auto Adjust is disabled, you need to manually adjust the position of the ISO point and J point
using the arrows at the right sides of ISO and J.
■ The ISO point (isoelectric) location shown is relative to the R-wave peak. Position the ISO point in the
middle of the flattest part of the waveform (between the P and Q waves).
■ The J point location is indicated relative to the R-wave peak. Position the J point at the end of the QRS
complex and the beginning of the ST segment.
8 - 18
■ The ST point is positioned a fixed distance from the J point. Position the ST point relative to the J point at
J+60/80ms, J+40ms, J+60ms or J+80ms. When J+60/80ms is selected, the ST point will be positioned 80
ms (heart rate 120 bpm or less) or 60 ms (heart rate more than 120 bpm) from the J point.
8.8 QT/QTc Interval Monitoring

The QT interval is the time between the beginning of the Q-wave and the end of the T-wave. It represents the
total duration of the depolarization (QRS duration) and repolarization (ST-T) phases of the ventricles. QT interval
monitoring can assist in the detection of long QT syndrome.
The QT interval has an inverse relationship to heart rate. Faster heart rates shorten QT interval and slower heart
rates prolong QT interval. Therefore, several formulas are commonly used to correct the QT interval for heart
rate. The heart rate corrected QT interval is abbreviated as QTc.
QT/QTc interval monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients.
8.8.1 QT/QTc Monitoring Limitations

Some conditions may make it difficult to achieve reliable QT/QTc monitoring, for example:
■ R-wave amplitudes are too low
■ The presence of frequent ventricular ectopic beats
■ RR intervals are unstable
■ P-waves tending to encroach on the end of the previous T-wave at high heart rates
■ The T-wave is very flat or T-wave are not well defined
■ The end of the T-wave is difficult to delineate because of the presence of U-waves
■ QTc measurements are not stable
■ In the presence of noise, asystole, ventricular fibrillation, atrial fibrillation, or ECG lead off
For reliable QT/QTc monitoring, choose lead with good T-wave amplitude and no visible flutter activity, and
without a predominant U-wave or P-wave.
Some conditions such as left or right bundle branch block or ventricular hypertrophy can lead to a widened QRS
complex. If a long QTc is observed you should verify it to ensure that it is not caused by QRS widening.
Because normal beats followed by ventricular beats are not included in the analysis, no QT measurement will be
generated in the presence of a bigeminy rhythm.
If the heart rate is extremely high (over 150 bpm for adults and over 180 bpm for pediatrics and neonates), QT
will not be measured. When the heart rate changes, it can take several minutes for the QT interval to stabilize. For
reliable QTc calculation it is important to avoid measurements when the heart rate is changing.
8.8.2 Enabling QT/QTc Monitoring

The QT monitoring function is disabled by default. Before you start QT monitoring, enable the QT function. To do
so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the QT tab→ select the Setup tab.
3. Switch on QT Analysis.
8.8.3 Displaying QT Numerics and Segments

To display QT numerics and Segments, follow this procedure:
2. Click the parameter numeric area where you want to display the QT numerics, and then select ECG → QT/
QTc.
8 - 19
NOTE
• QTc values are calculated based on the QT-HR, not the ECG HR. To view the QT-HR, open the QT View.
For more information, see 8.8.4 Entering the QT View.
The following picture shows the QT numeric area. The monitor screen may look slightly different:
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(1) (6)
(1) QTc alarm limit (if QTc alarm is off, the alarm off symbol is displayed)
(2) Parameter label (3) QTc value
(4) ΔQTc value (the difference between the current and baseline QTc values)
(5) QT value
8.8.4 Entering the QT View

QT View shows the current and baseline QT parameter values and waveforms. To enter QT View, follow this
procedure:
2. Select the QT tab.
3. Select QT View.
The following picture shows a typical QT view.
■ The current waveform is shown in the upper half in green.

■ The baseline waveform is shown below in white.
■ The waveform of selected lead is highlighted, while the waveforms of other leads are in light green or light
gray.
■ The start of the QRS complex and the end of the T wave are marked with a vertical line.
■ In some conditions, no QT measurement can be made. Then the cause of failed QT measurement is shown
at the bottom of the QT numerics area and the message “Cannot Analyze QT” is shown in the technical
alarm area.
Select the left or right arrow to switch leads, and the corresponding waveform will be highlighted.
8 - 20
8.8.5 Saving the Current QTc as Baseline
In order to quantify changes in the QTc value, you can set a QTc baseline. If no baseline has been set for this
patient within the first five minutes after getting valid QT values, the monitor will automatically set a baseline. To
set the current values as baseline, follow this procedure:
1. From the QT View, select Set Baseline.
2. From the pop-up dialog box, select OK. This baseline will then be used to calculate ΔQTc.
If you set a new baseline the previous baseline is discarded.

From the QT View, you can also perform the following operations:
■ Select the left or right arrow to select a lead label to highlight corresponding waveform.
■ Select Display Baseline or Hide Baseline to display or hide the baseline waveform.
CAUTION
• Updating QTc baseline affects the ΔQTc value and alarm.
8.8.6 Changing QT Settings
8.8.6.1 Setting QT Alarm Properties

To set QT alarm properties, follow this procedure:
2. Select the QT tab→ select the Alarm tab.
3. Set QTc and ΔQTc alarm properties.
8.8.6.2 Selecting Leads for QT Calculation

You can select one lead or all leads for QT calculation. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the QT tab→ select the Setup tab.
3. Set QT Leads. All is selected by default. This means all leads are used for QT calculation.
8.9 ECG Relearning

Changes in ECG beat morphology could result in incorrect arrhythmia alarms and/or inaccurate heart rate. ECG
relearning allows the monitor to learn the new dominant beat morphology and thus reduce false arrhythmia
alarms and inaccurate HR values. Once learning is complete, the dominant QRS complex is stored as a reference
template. The reference template is used as the normal morphology of that patient and it is compared with
incoming beats to identify possible arrhythmias.
8.9.1 Auto ECG Relearning

Auto arrhythmia relearning happens in the following situation:
■ The ECG lead type or lead label is changed.
■ ECG leads are off and are not reconnected within 60 seconds.
■ The patient‘s paced status is changed.
8 - 21
8.9.2 Initiating an ECG Relearning Manually
If you suspect that false arrhythmia alarms are presented, you may need to manually initiate an ECG relearn. To
2. Select Relearn.
CAUTION
• Initiate ECG relearning only during periods of predominantly normal rhythm and when the ECG
signal is relatively noise-free. If ECG learning takes place during arrhythmias, the ectopic beats may
be incorrectly learned as normal QRS complexes. This may result in missed detection of subsequent
arrhythmia events.
8.10 Defibrillation Synchronization Pulse Output

The 12-lead MPM module provides an analog out connector to output synchronization pulses for defibrillators. If
a defibrillator is connected, it receives a synchronization pulse (100 ms, +5 V) through the analog out connector
each time an R-wave is detected. The 3/5/6 lead MPM module does not offer this output.
WARNING
• According to IEC 60601-2-4: 2010, the peak of the synchronized defibrillator discharge should be
delivered within 60 ms of the peak of the R wave. The signal at the ECG output (sync pulse) on the
monitor is delayed by maximum of 30 ms. the biomedical engineer should verify that the ECG/
Defibrillator combination does not exceed recommended maximum delay of 60 ms.
• Before defibrillation, ensure that both defibrillator and monitor have passed the system test and
can be safely used together.
8.11 ECG Troubleshooting

This section lists some of the problems that might be encountered during ECG monitoring. If you encounter
problems when using the monitor or accessories, check the table below before requesting for services. If the
problem persists after you have taken corrective actions, contact the service personnel.
NOTE
• For the physiological and technical alarm messages, see D Alarm Messages.
Problem Corrective Actions
Noisy ECG traces 1. Check that the electrodes are not detached or dry. Replace with fresh and
moist electrodes if necessary.
2. Check that leadwires are not defective. Replace leadwires if necessary.
3. Check that the patient cable or leadwires are not routed too close to other
electrical devices. Move the patient cable or leadwires away from electrical
devices and their cables if necessary.
Excessive electrosurgical Interference Use ESU-proof ECG cables. For more information, see 29.1 ECG Accessories.
Muscle Noise Inadequate skin preparation, tremors, tense subject, and/or poor electrode
placement.
1. Perform skin preparation again and re-place the electrodes. For more
information, see 8.4.1 Preparing the Patient Skin and 8.4.2 Applying Electrodes
and Connecting the Patient.
2. Apply fresh, moist electrodes. Avoid muscular areas.
8 - 22
Problem Corrective Actions
Intermittent Signal 1. Check that cables are properly connected.

2. Check that electrodes are not detached or dry. Perform skin preparation
again as described in 8.4.1 Preparing the Patient Skin and apply fresh and
moist electrodes.
3. Check that the patient cable or leadwires are not damaged. Change them
if necessary.
Excessive alarms: heart rate, lead fault 1. Check that electrodes are not dry. Perform skin preparation again and
re-place the electrodes. For more information, see 8.4.1 Preparing the
Patient Skin and 8.4.2 Applying Electrodes and Connecting the Patient.
2. Check for excessive patient movement or muscle tremor. Reposition the
electrodes. Replace with fresh and moist electrodes if necessary.
Low Amplitude ECG Signal 1. Check that the ECG gain is not set too low. Adjust the gain as required.
For more information, see 8.5.3.2 Changing ECG Waveform Size.
2. Perform skin preparation again and re-place the electrodes. For more
information, see 8.4.1 Preparing the Patient Skin and 8.4.2 Applying
Electrodes and Connecting the Patient.
3. Check electrode application sites. Avoid bone or muscular area.
4. Check that electrodes are not dry or used for a prolonged time. Replace
with fresh and moist electrodes if necessary.
No ECG Waveform 1. Check that the ECG gain is not set too low. Adjust the gain as required.
For more information, see 8.5.3 Changing ECG Wave Settings.
2. Check that the leadwires and patient cables are properly connected.
3. Change cable and lead wires if necessary.
4. Check that the patient cable or leadwires are not damaged. Change them
if necessary.
Base Line Wander 1. Check for excessive patient movement or muscle tremor. Secure
leadwires and cable.
2. Check that electrodes are not detached or dry and replace with fresh and
moist electrodes if necessary. For more information, see 8.4.1 Preparing
the Patient Skin and 8.4.2 Applying Electrodes and Connecting the Patient.
3. Check for ECG filter setting. Set ECG Filter mode to Monitor to reduce
baseline wander on the display.
8 - 23
9 Resting 12-Lead ECG Analysis
9.1 Resting 12-Lead ECG Analysis Introduction

The monitor can be configured with the Glasgow 12-lead resting ECG analysis algorithm.The monitor
incorporating the Glasgow algorithm is labelled with the logo of Glasgow as shown in 8.1 ECG Introduction.
The Glasgow algorithm is intended for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients.
9.2 Entering the 12-Lead Screen

To enter the 12-Lead screen, follow this procedure:
2. From the bottom of the ECG dialog, select 12-Lead.
You can also enter the 12-Lead screen by following this procedure:
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Choose Screen tab → select ECG 12-Lead.
■ Select Main Menu quick key → from the Display column select Choose Screen → select ECG 12-Lead.
NOTE
• The ECG 12-Lead screen is available only when the Glasgow algorithm is configured (associated
module has the Glasgow label) and Lead Set is set to Auto or 12-Lead.
9.3 Initiating Resting 12-Lead ECG Analysis

Before initiating 12-lead ECG analysis, check that all electrodes are correctly connected to the lead wires and the
ECG trunk cable is properly connected. Check that patient information is correct. Keep the patient still.
To initiate 12-Lead ECG analysis, select Analyze from the bottom left of the 12-Lead screen.
9.4 Changing 12-Lead ECG Analysis Settings

On the ECG 12-Lead screen, you can set the high frequency filter, baseline drift removal (BDR) filter, and the
waveform layout.
9.4.1 Setting the High Frequency Filter

The high frequency filter attenuates muscle artifact by restricting the included frequencies. The setting of the
high frequency filter is 35 Hz by default. To change the setting, follow this procedure:
1. On the ECG 12-Lead screen, select the ECG numeric area or waveform area to enter the ECG dialog.
3. Set High-Freq Cut-off.
The high frequency filter is a low-pass filter. That is to say, signal frequencies higher than the set frequency are
filtered out. For example, if you set High-freq Cutoff to 35 Hz, then signal below 35 Hz is kept in the signal and
signal exceeding 35 Hz is attenuated.
9-1
9.4.2 Setting the Baseline Drift Removal Filter
The baseline drift removal (BDR) filter suppresses most baseline drift interference and also is able to preserve the
fidelity of the ST-segment level. BDR is switched on by default. To set the BDR, follow this procedure:
3. Switch on or off Baseline Drift Removal as desired. If BDR is switched off, the 0.05 Hz high pass filter is
used.
NOTE
• BDR introduces around 1-second delay. Using BDR is recommended except when the delay is
unacceptable.
9.4.3 Setting the 12-Lead Waveform Layout

To set the 12-lead waveform layout, follow this procedure:
3. Set Waveform Layout.
◆ Standard: the waveform sequence is I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6.
◆ Cabrera: the waveform sequence is aVL, I, -aVR, II, aVF, III, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6.
For the Glasgow algorithm, the sequence of the chest leads depends on the setting of V3 placement. If V3
placement is set to V4R, the sequence of chest leads is V4R, V1, V2, V4, V5, V6.
9.4.4 Editing Patient Information

Some patient information may directly affect ECG analysis. Complete and correct patient information is helpful
for accurate diagnosis and treatment of the patient. Enter patient information before starting a resting ECG
analysis.
To enter patient information, follow this procedure:
1. On the ECG 12-Lead screen, select Setup to enter the 12-Lead Setup dialog.
2. On the Patient Demographics page, input or edit patient information.
NOTE
• Saving information will also save the information as though it was entered in the Patient
Management dialog.
• Changes are not saved until you press Save. So changing to another tab without saving and then
pressing the exit button “X” will lose any changes.
• Check that patient information is correct before starting a resting 12-lead analysis.
• Using pediatric lead placement V4R, V1, V2, V4 - V6 is recommended if the patient is under 16 years
of age. Please record V4R using the V3 electrode. Also set V3 Electrode to V4R. This is a normal
practice for a patient of this age.
9.4.5 Setting Tachycardia and Bradycardia Thresholds

To set tachycardia and bradycardia thresholds, follow this procedure:
3. Set Tachy and Brady.
9-2
NOTE
• The tachycardia threshold only applies to patients whose age exceeds 180 days.
• The bradycardia threshold only applies to patients whose age exceeds 2191 days (6 years).
9.4.6 Setting the 12-Lead Interpretation Report

To set the 12-lead interpretation report, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Report tab.
3. Set the format and items included in the 12-lead interpretation report.
9.5 Saving the 12-Lead Interpretation Report

At the completion of 12-lead ECG interpretation, select Save to save the report. You can review the saved 12-
lead interpretation reports. For more information, see 18.2.11 12-Lead ECG Review Page.
9.6 Printing the 12-Lead Interpretation Report

At the completion of 12-lead ECG interpretation, select Print or Record to output the report via printer or
recorder.
9.7 Exiting the ECG 12-Lead Screen

To exit the ECG 12-Lead screen, select Exit on the ECG 12-Lead screen.
9-3
10 Monitoring Impedance Respiration (Resp)
10.1 Resp Introduction

Impedance respiration is measured across the thorax. When the patient is breathing or ventilated, the volume of
air changes in the lungs, resulting in impedance changes between the electrodes. Impedance respiration rate
(RR) is calculated from the signal representing these impedance changes, and a respiration waveform is
displayed on the patient monitor screen.
Impedance respiration monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.
Respiration may also be measured using a CO2 module or anesthetic gas (AG) module. Refer to 10 Monitoring
Impedance Respiration (Resp) and 17 Monitoring Anesthetic Gas (AG) for respiration information specific to those
modules.
10.2 Impedance Resp Safety Information
WARNING
• When monitoring the patient’s impedance respiration, do not use ESU-proof ECG cables. The
monitor cannot measure impedance respiration with ESU-proof ECG cables.
• If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual detection mode, it may
not be possible for the monitor to detect zero respiration rate. If you set the detection level too low,
the monitor is more likely to detect cardiac activity, and to falsely interpret cardiac activity as
respiratory activity in case of zero respiration rate.
• The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of zero respiration rates. It only
indicates an alarm if a pre-adjusted time has elapsed without a breath being detected since the last
detected breath. Therefore, it cannot be used for diagnostic purpose.
• If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard IEC 60601-1-2 (Radiated Immunity 3V/
m), field strengths above 3V/m may cause erroneous measurements at various frequencies.
Therefore, it is recommended to avoid the use of electrically radiating equipment in close proximity
to the impedance respiration measurement unit.
• The current used to measure impedance respiration may cause rate changes in Minute Ventilation
Rate Responsive Pacemakers. If you suspect the patient monitor is affecting the pacemaker rate
then replace the ECG cable with an ECG cable that contains ESU filters.
CAUTION
• Only use parts and accessories specified in this manual.
• Impedance respiration monitoring is not for use on patients while they are active, as this can cause
false alarms.
10.3 Resp Display
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
10 - 1
(1) Resp waveform gain (2) Resp lead label (3) Alarm limits
(4) Respiration rate (RR) (5) RR source
NOTE
• If ESU-proof ECG cables are used, the Resp waveform area will display the message “Check Leads”.
Replace the ECG cable if necessary.
10.4 Preparing for Impedance Resp Monitoring
10.4.1 Preparing the Patient

Follow this procedure to prepare the patient:
1. Shave hair from skin at chosen sites.
2. Gently rub skin surface at sites to remove dead skin cells.
3. Thoroughly cleanse the site with a mild soap and water solution.
4. Dry the skin completely before applying the electrodes.
CAUTION
• Proper skin preparation is necessary for good signal quality at the electrode site, as the skin is a poor
conductor of electricity.
10.4.2 Placing the Electrodes

Impedance respiration is acquired using standard ECG electrodes and cables. Either lead I (RA-LA) or lead II (RA-
LL) can be used.
For more information, see 8.4.4 ECG Electrode Placements
.
(1) (2)
(1) Lead I (2) Lead II
10 - 2
CAUTION
• Correct electrode placement can help to reduce interference from cardiac related impedance
changes: avoid including the liver area and the ventricles of the heart between the respiratory
electrodes. This is particularly important for neonates.
• Some patients with restricted movements breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you may
need to place the left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal
expansion to optimize the respiratory waveform.
• Some patients (especially neonates) expand their chests laterally, causing a negative intrathoracic
pressure. In these cases, it is better to place the two respiration electrodes in the right midaxillary
and the left lateral chest areas at the patient’s maximum point of the breathing movement to
optimize the impedance respiration waveform.
• To optimize the impedance respiration waveform, place the RA and LA electrodes horizontally when
monitoring respiration with ECG Lead I; place the RA and LL electrodes diagonally when monitoring
respiration with ECG Lead II.
• Periodically inspect electrode application sites to ensure skin integrity. If the skin quality changes,
replace the electrodes or change the application site.
NOTE
• Store the electrodes at room temperature. Open the electrode package immediately prior to use.
• Check that the electrode packages are intact and that the electrodes are not past the expiration
date. Ensure the electrode gel is moist.
10.5 Changing Resp Settings
10.5.1 Setting the Resp Alarm Properties

To set the Resp alarm properties, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Resp numeric area or waveform area to enter the Resp dialog.
3. Enter the password if required. For more information, refer to 25.13.3 Selecting Password for User Authentica-
tion.
10.5.2 Setting the RR Source

To set RR source, follow this procedure:
3. Choose RR Source from the dropdown list.
When you select Auto, the monitor automatically selects the RR source following order of priority: first CO2, and
then ECG. When the manually selected RR source is not available, the monitor automatically switches the RR
Source to Auto.
10.5.3 Choosing the Respiration Lead

To set the respiration lead, follow this procedure:
3. Set Resp Lead.
If you cannot get an acceptable impedance Resp waveform or you suspect the veracity of the Resp value after
choosing the Resp lead, you may need to adjust the electrode placement.
10 - 3
10.5.4 Setting the Resp Waveform Size
To set the Resp waveform size, follow this procedure:
3. Set Gain.
10.5.5 Setting the Resp Waveform Speed

To set the Resp waveform speed, follow this procedure:
3. Set Speed.
10.5.6 Setting the Auto Detection Switch

To set the auto detection switch, follow this procedure:
3. Switch on or off Auto Threshold Detection.
◆ If Auto Threshold Detection is switched on, the monitor automatically adjusts the Resp waveform
detection level, or threshold.
◆ If Auto Threshold Detection is switched off, you have to manually adjust the Resp waveform
threshold. For more information, see 10.5.7 Adjusting the Resp Waveform Detection Threshold.
In the auto threshold detection mode, if you are monitoring Resp and the ECG parameter is switched off, the
monitor cannot compare the heart rate and Resp rates to detect cardiovascular artifact. The respiration
detection level is automatically set higher to prevent the detection of cardiovascular artifact as respiration.
In the manual detection mode (where auto threshold detection is off ), cardiovascular artifact can, in certain
situations, trigger the respiration rate counter. This may lead to a false indication of a high respiration or an
undetected zero respiration rate condition. If you suspect that cardiovascular artifact is being registered as
respiratory activity, raise the detection level above the zone of cardiovascular artifact. If the Resp wave is so small
that raising the detection level is not possible, you may need to optimize the electrode placement.
10.5.7 Adjusting the Resp Waveform Detection Threshold

Use the manual detection mode (where auto threshold detection is off ) in the following situations:
■ The respiration rate and the heart rate are close.
■ Patients have intermittent mandatory ventilation.
■ Respiration is weak. Try repositioning the electrodes to improve the signal.
To set the Resp waveform threshold to the desired level, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Threshold tab.
3. Select the up and down arrows below Upper Line and Lower Line to define the Resp waveform threshold.
Once set, the detection level will not adapt automatically to different respiration depths. It is important to
remember that if the depth of breathing changes, you may need to change the detection level.
10 - 4
11 Monitoring Pulse Oxygen Saturation (SpO ) 2
11.1 SpO2 Introduction

Pulse Oxygen Saturation (SpO2) monitoring is a non-invasive technique used to measure the amount of
oxygenated hemoglobin and pulse rate by measuring the absorption of selected wavelengths of light. The light
generated in the emitter side of the probe is partly absorbed when it passes through the monitored tissue. The
amount of transmitted light is detected in the detector side of the probe. When the pulsative part of the light
signal is examined, the amount of light absorbed by the hemoglobin is measured and the pulse oxygen
saturation can be calculated. This device is calibrated to display functional oxygen saturation.
SpO2 monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.
The monitor can be configured with Masimo or Nellcor SpO2 module:
■ Masimo SpO2: the connector is purple with a logo of Masimo SET.
■ Nellcor SpO2: the connector is grey with a logo of Nellcor.
■ Mindray SpO2: the connector is blue without any logo.
NOTE
• The SpO2 extension cable used must be compatible with the SpO2 sensor connectors used. For
example, only connect the Masimo SpO2 extension cable can be connected to the Masimo SpO2
sensor connectors.
• A functional tester or SpO2 simulator can be used to determine the pulse rate accuracy.
• A functional tester or SpO2 simulator cannot be used to assess the SpO2 accuracy.
11.2 SpO2 Safety Information
WARNING
• When a trend toward patient deoxygenation is indicated, analyze the blood samples with a
laboratory co-oximeter to completely understand the patient’s condition.
• Do not use SpO2 sensors during magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). Induced current could
potentially causes burns. The sensor may affect the MRI image, and the MRI unit may affect the
accuracy of the oximetry measurements.
• Prolonged continuous monitoring may increase the risk of undesirable changes in skin
characteristics, such as irritation, reddening, blistering or burns. Inspect the sensor site every two
hours and move the sensor if the skin quality changes. Change the application site every four hours.
For neonates, or patients with poor peripheral blood circulation or sensitive skin, inspect the sensor
site more frequently.
• If the sensor is too tight because the application site is too large or becomes too large due to edema,
excessive pressure for prolonged periods may result in venous congestion distal from the
application site, leading to interstitial edema and tissue ischemia.
• When patients are undergoing photodynamic therapy they may be sensitive to light sources. Pulse
oximetry may be used only under careful clinical supervision for short time periods to minimize
interference with photodynamic therapy.
• Setting alarm limits to extreme values may cause the alarm system to become ineffective. For
example, high oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this is a
consideration, do not set the high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to switching off the
alarm.
• SpO2 is empirically calibrated in healthy adult volunteers with normal levels of carboxyhemoglobin
(COHb) and methemoglobin (MetHb).
11 - 1
CAUTION
• Change the application site or replace the sensor and/or patient cable when a persistent SpO2 Low
Signal Quality message is displayed on the equipment. These messages may indicate that patient
monitoring time is exhausted on the patient cable or sensor.
• Replace the cable or sensor when a “SpO2 Sensor Off”, “SpO2 No Sensor”, or “SpO2 Low Signal
Quality” message is consistently displayed while monitoring consecutive patients after completing
troubleshooting steps listed in this manual.
• Variation in measurements may be profound and may be affected by sampling technique as well as
the patient's physiological conditions. Any results exhibiting inconsistency with the patient’s clinical
status should be repeated and/or supplemented with additional test data. Blood samples should be
analyzed by laboratory instruments prior to clinical decision making to completely understand the
patient’s condition.
• Use only SpO2 sensors specified in this manual. Follow the SpO2 sensor’s instructions for use and
adhere to all warnings and cautions.
NOTE
• Additional information specific to the Masimo sensors compatible with the equipment, including
information about parameter/measurement performance during motion and low perfusion, may be
found in the sensor's directions for use (DFU).
• Masimo cables and sensors are provided with X-Cal™ technology to minimize the risk of inaccurate
readings and unanticipated loss of patient monitoring. Refer to the Cable or Sensor DFU for the
specified duration of the patient monitoring time.
11.3 SpO2 Measurement Limitations

The following factors may influence the accuracy of SpO2 measurement:
■ Patient physiological characteristics:
◆ Cardiac arrest
◆ Hypotension
◆ Darkly pigmented skin
◆ Shock
◆ Severe vasoconstriction
◆ Hypothermia
◆ Severe anemia
◆ Ventricular septal defects (VSDs)
◆ Venous pulsations
◆ Poor perfusion
◆ Dysfunctional hemoglobin, such as carboxyhemoglobin (COHb) and methemoglobin (MetHb)
◆ Elevated levels of bilirubin
◆ Vasospastic disease, such as Raynaud’s, and peripheral vascular disease
◆ Hemoglobinopathies and synthesis disorders such as thalassemias, Hb s, Hb c, sickle cell, etc.
◆ Hypocapnic or hypercapnic conditions
◆ Birthmark(s), tattoos, skin discolorations, moisture on skin, deformed or abnormal fingers. etc.
■ Interfering substances:
◆ Intravascular dyes (such as indocyanine green, methylene blue, indigo carmine, etc.)
◆ Dyes in the measure site, such as nail polish
■ Environmental conditions:
◆ Excessive ambient light
◆ Electrosurgery equipment
11 - 2
◆ Defibrillation (may cause inaccurate reading for a short amount of time)
◆ Excessive patient/sensor motion
◆ Electromagnetic field
◆ Arterial catheters and intra-aortic balloon
■ Others
◆ Inappropriate positioning of the SpO2 sensor, or use of incorrect SpO2 sensor
◆ Cuff or arterial blood pressure measurement device on the same limb as the SpO2 sensor
11.4 SpO2 Display
(5)
(4)
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Pleth waveform (Pleth/Plethb): visual indication of patient’s pulse. The waveform is not normalized.
(2) Oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO2): percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to the sum of
oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin.
(3) Perfusion indicator: the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial pulsation.
(4) Pulse rate (derived from the pleth wave): detected pulsations per minute.
(5) Perfusion index (PI): gives the numerical value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial
pulsation. PI is an indicator of the pulsatile strength. You can also use it to assess the SpO2 signal strength.
◆ Above 1 is optimal.
◆ Between 0.3 and 1 is acceptable.
◆ Below 0.3 indicates low perfusion. Set Sensitivity to Maximum first. Reposition the SpO2 sensor or find a
better site. If low perfusion persists, choose another method to measure oxygen saturation if possible.
NOTE
• PI is displayed for Masimo SpO2 and Mindray SpO2 modules.
11.5 Preparing for SpO2 Monitoring

To prepare to monitor SpO2, follow this procedure:
1. Select an appropriate sensor according to the module type, patient category and weight.
2. Clean the contact surface of the reusable sensor.
3. Remove colored nail polish from the application site.
4. Apply the sensor to the patient according to the instruction for use of the sensor.
5. Select an appropriate extension cable according to the connector type and plug the cable into the SpO2
connector.
6. Connect the sensor to the extension cable.
CAUTION
• Do not apply sensor too tightly as this results in venous pulsation which may severely obstruct
circulation and lead to inaccurate measurements.
• At elevated ambient temperatures, be careful with measurement sites that are not well perfused,
because this can cause burns after prolonged application.
11 - 3
• Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an arterial catheter, an NIBP cuff or an intravascular
venous infusion line.
• For neonatal patients, make sure that all sensor connectors and adapter cable connectors are
outside the incubator. The humid atmosphere inside can cause inaccurate measurements.
11.6 Changing the SpO2 Settings
11.6.1 Changing the SpO2 Alarm Settings

To change the SpO2 alarm settings, follow this procedure:
1. Select the SpO2 numeric area or waveform area to enter the SpO2 dialog.
Authentication.
4. Set the alarm properties as desired.
NOTE
• The desat alarm is a high level alarm notifying you of potentially life threatening drops in oxygen
saturation. When the SpO2 value is below the desat alarm limit and desat alarm switch is set on, the
message “SpO2 Desat” is displayed.
• You can switch off the SpO2 Desat alarm only when the SpO2 Desat Alarm Off is enabled. For more
information, see section 25.3.7.6 Setting the Switch of the SpO2 Desat Alarm Off.
11.6.2 Nellcor SatSecondsTM Alarm Management

With traditional alarm management, high and low alarm limits are set for monitoring oxygen saturation. During
monitoring, once an alarm limit is violated, an audible alarm immediately sounds. When the patient SpO2
fluctuates near an alarm limit, the alarm sounds each time the limit is violated. Such frequent alarms can be
distracting. Nellcor’s SatSeconds alarm management technique is used to reduce these nuisance alarms.
The SatSeconds feature is available with the Nellcor SpO2 to decrease the likelihood of false alarms caused by
motion artifacts. With SatSeconds alarm management, high and low alarm limits are set in the same way as
those with traditional alarm management. A SatSeconds limit is also set. The SatSeconds limit controls the
amount of time that SpO2 saturation may be outside the set limits before an alarm sounds.
The method of calculation is as follows: the percentage points of the SpO2 saturation falling outside the alarm
limit is multiplied by the number of seconds remaining outside the limit. This can be stated as the equation:
SatSeconds = Points × Seconds
Only when the SatSeconds limit is reached, the monitor gives a SatSeconds alarm. For example, the figure below
demonstrates the alarm response time with a SatSeconds limit set at 50 and a low SpO2 limit set at 90%. In this
example, the patient SpO2 drops to 88% (2 points) and remains there for 2 seconds. Then it drops to 86% (4
points) for 3 seconds, and then to 84% (6 points) for 6 seconds. The resulting SatSeconds are:
% SpO2 Seconds SatSeconds
2× 2= 4
4× 3= 12
6× 6= 36
Total SatSeconds= 52
11 - 4
After approximately 11 seconds, a Sat-Second alarm would sound, because the limit of 50 SatSeconds would
have been exceeded.
%SpO2
Seconds
Saturation levels may fluctuate rather than remaining steady for a period of several seconds. Often, the patient
SpO2 may fluctuate above and below an alarm limit, re-entering the non-alarm range several times. During such
fluctuation, the monitor integrates the number of SpO2 points, both positive and negative, until either the
SatSeconds limit is reached, or the patient SpO2 re-enters the non-alarm range and remains there.
NOTE
• The SpO2 Too Low or SpO2 Too High alarm is presented in the case that SpO2 value violates the alarm
limits 3 times within one minute even if the setting of SatSeconds is not reached.
To set the SatSeconds, follow this procedure:

3. Set Sat-Seconds.
11.6.3 Setting SpO2 Sensitivity (for Masimo SpO2)

For Masimo SpO2, selects the Sensitivity as per signal quality and patient motion.
Normal sensitivity is the recommended for patients who are experiencing some compromise in blood flow or
perfusion. It is advisable for care areas where patients are observed frequently, such as the intensive care unit
(ICU).
Adaptive Probe Off Detection (APOD) sensitivity is the recommended sensitivity mode where there is a high
probability of the sensor becoming detached. It is also the suggested mode for care areas where patients are not
visually monitored continuously. This mode delivers enhanced protection against erroneous pulse rate and
arterial oxygen saturation readings when a sensor becomes inadvertently detached from a patient due to
excessive movement.
Maximum sensitivity is recommended for use on patients with weak signals (e.g. high ambient noise and/or
patients with very low perfusion) and for use during procedures or when clinician and patient contact is
continuous such as in higher acuity settings.The settings of sensitivity in the SpO2 module and SpO2b module
are linked.
To set SpO2 sensitivity, follow this procedure:
2. Select the SpO2 Setup tab.
3. Set Sensitivity to Maximum, Normal, or APOD.
11 - 5
CAUTION
• When using the Maximum Sensitivity setting, performance of "Sensor Off" detection may be
compromised. If the equipment and the sensor becomes detached from the patient, the potential
for false readings may occur due to environmental noise such as light, and vibration.
NOTE
• The settings of sensitivity in the SpO2 module and SpO2b module are linked.
11.6.4 Changing Averaging Time (for Masimo and Mindray SpO2)

The SpO2 value displayed on the monitor screen is the average of data collected within a specific time. The
shorter the averaging time is, the quicker the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation
level. Contrarily, the longer the averaging time is, the slower the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s
oxygen saturation level, but the SpO2 measurement is more stable. For critically ill patients, selecting a shorter
averaging time will help with understanding the patient’s state.
To set the averaging time, follow this procedure:
3. Set Averaging.
11.6.5 Monitoring SpO2 and NIBP Simultaneously

When monitoring SpO2 and NIBP on the same limb simultaneously, you can switch on NIBP Simul to lock the
SpO2 alarm status until the NIBP measurement ends. If you switch off NIBP Simul, low perfusion caused by NIBP
measurement may lead to inaccurate SpO2 readings and therefore cause false physiological alarms.
To set the NIBP Simul, follow this procedure:
3. Set NIBP Simul.
11.6.6 Changing the Sweep Speed of the Pleth Wave

To set the sweep speed of Pleth waveforms, follow this procedure:
3. Set Speed.
11.7 Changing the PR Settings
11.7.1 Changing the PR Alarm Settings

To change the PR alarm settings, follow this procedure:
2. Select the PR Alarm tab.
3. Enter the password if required. For more information refer to 25.13.3 Selecting Password for User
Authentication.
11 - 6
11.7.2 Changing the QRS Volume
If the Alarm Source is set to PR, the QRS tone is derived from PR measurements. To set the QRS volume, follow
this procedure:
2. Select the PR Setup tab.
3. Set QRS Volume.
If the SpO2 value is valid, the monitor also adjusts the QRS tone (pitch tone) according to the SpO2 value. For
information, see25.14.3 Setting the SpO2 Tone Mode.
NOTE
• Changing the QRS volume settings in the PR Setup page also changes the QRS volume settings in the
Setup page of the ECG dialog.
11.7.3 Setting the PR Source

Current pulse source is displayed in the PR numeric area if current PR source is not SpO2. The PR from current
pulse source has the following characteristics:
■ PR is stored in the monitor’s database and can be reviewed in the graphic and tabular trends.In graphic
trends, as the PR curve has the same color as that of current PR source.
■ PR is sent via the network to the CMS, if available.
To set which parameter is used as a PR source, follow this procedure:
2. Select the PR Setup tab.
3. Set PR Source.
The dropdown list of the PR Source displays the currently available PR sources from top to bottom by priority.
When you select Auto, the system will automatically select the first option as the PR source. If the current PR
source is unavailable, the system will automatically switch PR Source to Auto. When you select IBP, the system
will automatically select the first pressure label as the PR source.
11.7.4 Showing/Hiding PR
You can set whether to display the PR value in the SpO2 parameter area. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Select the SpO2 numeric area or waveform area to enter the SpO2 menu.
2. Select the PR tab.
4. Switch on or off Display PR.
11.8 SpO2 Troubleshooting

This section lists the problems that might occur. If you encounter the problems when using the equipment or
accessories, check the table below before requesting service. If the problem persists, contact your service
personnel.
NOTE
• For the physiological and technical alarm messages, see Appendix D Alarm Messages.
11 - 7
Problem Solution
Do not see SpO2 numeric area or waveform area 1. Check that the SpO2 is set to display in the Screen Setup → →
on the main screen Tile Layout page. For more information, see 3.9.2 Displaying
Parameter Numerics and Waveforms.
2. Check that the SpO2 parameter switch is enabled. If not, enable the
SpO2 measurement.For more information, see 3.9.1 Switching On or
Off a Parameter.
3. Check that the cable connections of the SpO2 sensor and the
extension cable are tight. Replace the SpO2 sensor or the extension
cable if needed.
Dashes “- -” display in place of numerics 1. Check that the cable connections of SpO2 sensor and the
extension cable are tight. Replace the SpO2 sensor or the extension
cable if needed.
2. Reconnect the SpO2 sensor if the alarm SpO2 Sensor Off appears.
3. Check the PI value. If the PI value is too low, adjust the SpO2 sensor,
or apply the sensor to a site with better perfusion.
4. Move the sensor to a place with weaker ambient light, or cover the
sensor to minimize the ambient light if the alarm SpO2 Too Much
Light appears.
Low amplitude SpO2 signal 1. The SpO2 sensor and NIBP cuff are placed on the same limb.
Change the monitoring site if necessary.
2. Check the PI value. If the PI value is too low. Adjust the SpO2 sensor,
or apply the sensor to a site with better perfusion.
SpO2 value is inaccurate 1. Check the patient’s vital signs.

2. Check for conditions that may cause inaccurate SpO2 readings. For
more information, see 11.3 SpO2 Measurement Limitations.
3. Check the monitor, the SpO2 module or the MPM for proper
functioning.
11.9 Masimo Information
Masimo Patents
This posting serves as notice under 35 U.S.C.§287(a) for Masimo patents: http://www.masimo.com/patents.htm.
No Implied License
Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with
unauthorized sensors or cables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of
one or more of the patents relating to this device.
11.10 Nellcor Information
Nellcor Patents
This posting serves as notice under 35 U.S.C.§287(a) for Covidien patents: http://www.covidien.com/patents.
No Implied License
unauthorized replacement parts which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of
one or more of the patents relating to this device.
11 - 8
12 Monitoring Temperature (Temp)
12.1 Temperature Introduction

The monitor can continuously monitor the patient’s skin temperature and core temperature. Thermally sensitive
resistors (thermistors) are used, and are based on the principle that electrical resistance of the thermistor
changes as temperature changes. The resistance change of the thermistors is used to calculate the temperature.
Up to two temperature sites can be monitored simultaneously and the difference between two measured sites is
calculated.
Temperature monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.
12.2 Temperature Safety Information

CAUTION
• Verify that the probe detection program works correctly before monitoring. Remove the
temperature probe cable from the temperature probe connector, and check that the monitor can
display the alarm messages and give alarm tones correctly.
12.3 Temperature Display

The following figure shows the Temp numeric area for temperature monitoring with the MPM module or Temp
module. Your display may be configured to look different.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2) (4)
(3)
(1) Temperature site (2) Temperature alarm limits (3) Temperature value
(4) Temperature difference (ΔT): Difference between two temperature sites. It displays only when ΔT is switched on.
12.4 Preparing for Temperature Monitoring

To prepare temperature monitoring, follow this procedure:
1. Select an appropriate probe for your patient according to patient category and measured site.
2. Plug the probe or temperature cable to the temperature connector. If using a disposable probe, connect
the probe to the temperature cable.
3. Follow the probe manufacturer’s instructions to connect the probe to the patient.
12 - 1
12.5 Changing Temperature Settings
12.5.1 Setting the Temperature Alarm Properties

To set the temperature alarm properties, follow this procedure:
1. Select the temperature numeric area to enter the Temp dialog.
Authentication.
12.5.2 Selecting the Temperature Label

Select the temperature label according to the measurement site. To do so, follow this procedure:
3. Set the temperature label.
Label Description Label Description
T1 Temperature of application site 1 T amb Ambient temperature
T2 Temperature of application site 2 T airw Airway temperature
T skin Skin temperature T vesic Vesical temperature
T core Core temperature T blood Blood temperature
T axil Axillary temperature T myo Myocardial temperature
T naso Nasopharyngeal temperature T tymp Tympanic temperature
T eso Esophageal temperature T cereb Cerebral temperature
T rect Rectal temperature
12.5.3 Displaying the Temperature Difference

To display the temperature difference between two measurement sites monitored by the same temperature
module, switch on ΔT. To do so, follow this procedure:
3. Switch on ΔT.
12.6 Temperature Troubleshooting

personnel.
NOTE
12 - 2
Problem Solution
Do not see Temp numeric area on the main 1. Check that if the Temp parameter switch is enabled. If not, enable
screen the Temp measurement. For more information, see 3.9.1 Switching
On or Off a Parameter.
2. Check that the connections of the temperature probe and the
temperature cable are tight.
Measurement fails/’--’ is displayed in the Temp 1. If using a disposable probe, check the connection between the
numeric area probe and the temperature cable.
2. Try using a known good probe in case the sensor is damaged.
12 - 3
13 Monitoring Noninvasive Blood Pressure (NIBP)
13.1 NIBP Introduction

The monitor uses the oscillometric method for measuring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure (NIBP). NIBP
measurement is based on the principle that pulsatile blood flow through an artery creates oscillations of the
arterial wall. The oscillometric device uses a blood pressure cuff to sense these oscillations that appear as tiny
pulsations in cuff pressure. The oscillometric devices measure the amplitude of pressure changes in the
occluding cuff as the cuff deflates from above systolic pressure. The amplitude suddenly increases as the pulse
breaks through the occlusion in the artery. As the cuff pressure decreases further, the pulsations increase in
amplitude, reach a maximum (which approximates to the mean pressure), and then diminish. The oscillometric
method measures the mean pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures.
NIBP monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients.
NOTE
• Blood pressure measurements determined with this device are equivalent to those obtained by a
trained observer using the cuff/stethoscope auscultatory method or an intra-arterial blood pressure
measurement device, within the limits prescribed by the American National Standard: manual,
electronic, or automated sphygmomanometers.
• NIBP measurement can be performed during electro-surgery and discharge of a defibrillator.
13.2 NIBP Safety Information
WARNING
• Be sure to select the correct patient category setting for your patient before NIBP measurement. Do
not apply the higher adult settings for pediatric or neonatal patients. Otherwise, it may present a
safety hazard.
• Do not measure NIBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or on the limb where skin damage has
occurred or is expected.
• Use clinical judgment to determine whether to perform frequent unattended blood pressure
measurements on patients with severe blood clotting disorders because of the risk of hematoma in
the limb fitted with the cuff.
• Do not use the NIBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial catheter in place. This
could cause tissue damage around the catheter when the infusion is slowed or blocked during cuff
inflation.
• Do not apply cuff on the arm on the side of a mastectomy.
• Continuous cuff pressure due to connection tubing kinking may cause blood flow interference and
result in harmful injury to the patient.
• NIBP reading can be affected by the measurement site, the position of the patient, exercise, or the
patient's physiologic condition. If you doubt the NIBP measurements, determine the patient’s vital
signs by alternative means, and then verify that the monitor is working correctly.
• Devices that exert pressure on tissue have been associated with purpura, ischemia, and neuropathy.
Inspect the application site regularly to ensure skin quality and inspect the extremity of the cuffed
limb for normal color, warmth and sensitivity. If the skin quality changes, or if the extremity
circulation is being affected, move the cuff to another site or stop the blood pressure measurements
immediately. Check more frequently when making automatic or STAT measurements. Auto NIBP
measurements with one and two minute intervals are not recommended for extended periods of
time.
• Do not modify or replace connectors of the NIBP air hose except with mindray-approved connectors.
Use neonatal and infant cuffs with CM1901 hoses only. Use pediatric/adult cuffs with CM1903 hoses
only.
13 - 1
• Never connect intra-arterial or intra-venous lines, or any other incompatible connectors to the NIBP
hose. This can cause serious injury or death.
• NIBP diagnostic significance must be decided by the hospital’s clinician staff.
CAUTION
• Only use parts and accessories specified in this manual. Follow the instructions for use and adhere to
all warnings and cautions.
• Accuracy of NIBP measurement depends on using a cuff of proper size. It is essential to measure limb
circumference and choose a cuff with proper size.
13.3 NIBP Measurement Limitations

Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 30 bpm or greater than 300 bpm, or if the
patient is on a heart-lung machine. The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible in the following
situations:
■ Regular arterial pressure pulses are hard to detect
■ Excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or convulsions
■ Cardiac arrhythmias
■ Rapid blood pressure changes
■ Severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries
■ On an edematous extremity
■ Obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations coming from the artery
NOTE
• The effectiveness of this sphygmomanometer has not been established in pregnant women,
including pre-eclamptic patients.
13.4 Measurement Modes

There are three NIBP measurement modes:
■ Manual: measurement on demand.
■ Auto: repeated measurements at set interval.
■ STAT: continual rapid series of measurements over a five minute period.
■ Sequence: continually automatic measurement at set durations and intervals.
13.5 NIBP Display

The NIBP display shows only numerics.
(3) (4) (5)
(2)
(6)
(1) (7)
(8)
(11) (10) (9)
13 - 2
(1) Systolic pressure alarm limits (2) NIBP unit: mmHg or kPa (3) The last NIBP measurement time
(4) Time to the next measurement (for Auto mode and Sequence mode)
(5) Measurement mode: for Auto NIBP, interval is displayed; for Sequence mode, the current phase and interval are
displayed
(6) Diastolic pressure (7) Diastolic pressure alarm limit (8) Mean pressure alarm limit
(9) Mean pressure (displayed after measurement completed) or cuff pressure (displayed during the measurement)
(10) Systolic pressure (11) Pulse Rate
NOTE
• If NIBP measurement fails, “XX” is displayed; if NIBP measurement is not taken or NIBP
measurement exceeds its measurement ranges, “--” is displayed.
• NIBP numerics in black color with a light outline indicate that the measurement is old and exceeds
the configured NIBP Measurement Timeout time (see section 25.5.5 Setting Parameter Measurement
Timeout). These NIBP values are not recommended for reference.
13.6 Preparing for NIBP Measurements
13.6.1 Preparing the Patient for NIBP Measurements

In normal use, perform NIBP measurement on a patient who is in the following position:
■ Comfortably seated
■ Legs uncrossed
■ Feet flat on the floor
■ Back, arm and feet supported
NOTE
• It is recommended that the patient remains calm and relaxes as much as possible before performing
the measurement and that the patient does not talk during the measurement.
• Other factors that have been shown to result in an overestimation of blood pressure are labored
breathing, full bladder, pain etc.
13.6.2 Placing the NIBP Cuff

To place the NIBP cuff, follow this procedure:
1. Verify that the patient category setting is correct.
2. Connect the air tubing to the NIBP connector on the MPM module.
3. Select an appropriately sized cuff for the patient, and then wrap it around the limb directly over the
patient’s skin as follows:
a Determine the patient’s limb circumference.
b Select an appropriate cuff by referring to the limb circumference marked on the cuff. The width of the
cuff should be 40% (50% for neonates) of the limb circumference, or 2/3 of the length of the upper
arm or the thigh. The inflatable part of the cuff should be long enough to encircle to overlap at least
50% to 80% of the limb.
c Apply the cuff to the patient’s upper arm or leg and make sure the Φ marking on the cuff matches the
artery location. The cuff should fit snugly, but with enough room for two fingers to be placed
between the cuff and the patient’s arm (on adults), and loosely on neonates with little or no air
present within the cuff. Otherwise it may cause discoloration and ischemia of the extremities. Make
sure that the cuff index line falls within the range markings on the cuff. If it does not, use a cuff that fits
better.
13 - 3
d Middle of the cuff should be at the level of the right atrium of the heart. If it is not, use the
measurement correction formula to correct the measurement. For more information, see
13.8.7 Setting the NIBP Display Format.
4. Connect the cuff to the air tubing. Avoid compression or restriction of pressure tubes. Air must pass
unrestricted through the tubing.
CAUTION
• Do not touch or apply external pressure against the cuff and air tubing during NIBP measurement.
This may cause inaccurate blood pressure values.
• Use care when placing the cuff on an extremity used for monitoring other patient parameters.
13.7 Starting and Stopping NIBP Measurements

Start and stop NIBP measurement by selecting the NIBP quick keys or from the NIBP dialog.
Task By Quick Key From NIBP dialog
Start a manual measurement NIBP Start/Stop quick key Start NIBP button
Start auto NIBP series NIBP Start/Stop quick key Setup tab → set Interval → Start NIBP
button
NIBP Measure quick key →select
interval
Start NIBP sequence NIBP Measure quick key → Sequence tab → set NIBP sequence
measurement Sequence →Start NIBP button
Start STAT measurement NIBP STAT quick key STAT button
NIBP Measure quick key → STAT
Stop the current NIBP NIBP Start/Stop quick key Stop NIBP button
measurements
End auto NIBP series or NIBP Stop All quick key Stop All button
Sequence
Stop STAT measurement and end NIBP Start/Stop quick key Stop NIBP or Stop All button
series
NIBP STAT quick key
13.8 Changing NIBP Settings
13.8.1 Setting the NIBP Alarm Properties

To set the NIBP alarm properties, follow this procedure:
1. Select the NIBP numeric area to enter the NIBP dialog.
Authentication.
13 - 4
13.8.2 Setting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure
To set initial cuff inflation pressure, follow this procedure:
2. Select Initial Pressure, and then select the appropriate setting.
NOTE
• For known hypertensive patients, you need to set initial cuff pressure to a higher value to reduce
the measurement time.
13.8.3 Setting the NIBP Interval

For auto NIBP measurement, you need to set the interval between two NIBP measurements. To set the NIBP
interval, follow this procedure:
2. Set Interval. Selecting Manual switches to manual mode.
NOTE
• NIBP Measure dialog gives quick access to starting and setting the interval. Selecting an option from
the NIBP Measure dialog will change the NIBP interval to that selection and start the NIBP
measurement.
13.8.4 Selecting NIBP Start Mode

Start mode defines how NIBP auto mode works. To set the start mode, follow this procedure:
2. Set Start Mode.
◆ Clock: after the first measurement, the monitor automatically synchronizes NIBP automatic
measurements with the real time clock. For example, if Interval is set to 20 min, and NIBP auto
measurement is started at 14:03, the next measurement will be taken at 14:20, and then at 14:40,
15:00, and so on.
◆ Interval: after the first measurement, the monitor automatically repeats measurements at set
interval. For example, if Interval is set to 20 min, and NIBP auto measurement is started at 14:03, the
next measurement will be taken at 14:23, and then at 14:43, 15:03, and so on.
13.8.5 Enabling the NIBP End Tone

The monitor can issue a reminder tone at the completion of NIBP measurement. The NIBP End Tone is off by
default. To switch on the NIBP end tone, follow this procedure:
2. Switch on NIBP End Tone.
13.8.6 Setting NIBP Sequence

NIBP sequence measurement can have up to five phases: A, B, C, D, and E. The duration and interval of each
phase can be set individually.
To set NIBP sequence, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Sequence tab.
3. Set Duration and Interval of each phase.
13 - 5
13.8.7 Setting the NIBP Display Format
To set the NIBP display format, follow this procedure:
1. Select the NIBP numeric area to enter the NIBP menu.
3. Set Display Format.
13.8.8 Setting the NIBP Alarm Limits Display Switch

To set whether to display the alarm limits of diastolic NIBP and mean NIBP, follow this procedure:
3. Switch on or off Display Alarm Limits.
13.8.9 Showing/Hiding PR
You can set whether to display the PR value in the NIBP parameter area. To do so, follow this procedure:
3. Switch on or off Display PR.
13.8.10 Correcting the NIBP Measurements

The middle of the cuff should be at the level of right atrium. If the limb is not at the heart level, the measurement
should be corrected as follows:
■ Add 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) to the displayed value for each centimetre higher.
■ Deduct 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) to the displayed value for each centimeter lower.
13.9 Assisting Venous Puncture

You can use the NIBP cuff to cause sub-diastolic pressure to block the venous blood vessel and therefore help
venous puncture. To assist venous puncture, follow this procedure:
1. Select the VeniPuncture quick key or select the NIBP numeric area → Setup tab.
2. Set Venipuncture pressure.
3. Select VeniPuncture at the bottom of the dialog.
4. Puncture vein and draw blood sample.
5. Select the NIBP Start/Stop quick key to deflate the cuff. If the cuff is not manually deflated, the cuff
automatically deflates after a fixed period of time (170 seconds for adult and pediatric patient, 85 seconds
for neonatal patient).
During venous puncture, pay attention to the cuff pressure and the remaining time displayed in the NIBP
numerics area.
13.10 NIBP Troubleshooting

accessories, check the table below before requesting for services. If the problem persists, contact your service
personnel.
NOTE
13 - 6
Problem Solution
Cannot see NIBP numeric area on the main 1. Check that the NIBP is set to display in the Screen Setup → Tile Layout
screen page. For more information, see.3.9.2 Displaying Parameter Numerics and
Waveforms
2. Check that if the NIBP parameter switch is enabled. If not, enable the NIBP
measurement. For more information, see 3.9.1 Switching On or Off a
Parameter.
13 - 7
14 Monitoring Invasive Blood Pressure (IBP)
14.1 IBP Introduction

IBP monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients. PAWP monitoring is only intended for
adult and pediatric patients.
You can monitor up to 4 (using the built-in IBP module and the external IBP module together) invasive blood
pressures.
The following picture shows the external IBP module.
(1) (2)
(3)
(3)
(1) IBP menu hard key (2) Zero IBP hard key (3) IBP cable connector
14.2 IBP Safety Information
WARNING
• Use only pressure transducers specified in this manual. Never reuse disposable pressure
transducers. See chapter 29 Accessories for specified pressure transducers.
• Make sure that the applied parts never contact other conductive parts.
• To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedures, ensure that the monitor’s
cables and transducers never come into contact with the high-frequency surgical units.
• When using accessories, their operating temperature should be taken into consideration. For more
information, see instructions for use of accessories.
• All invasive procedures involve risks to the patient. Use aseptic technique. Follow catheter
manufacturer's instructions.
• Mechanical shock to the invasive blood pressure transducer may cause severe shifts in zero balance
and calibration, and cause erroneous readings.
• The neutral electrode of the electro-surgery unit (ESU) shall properly contact the patient. Otherwise,
burns may result.
14 - 1
14.3 Preparing for IBP Monitoring
14.3.1 IBP Equipment to Patient Connection
(1)
ｍｍＨｇ
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(1) Pressure bag/Infusion pump (2) Monitor
(3) IBP cable (4) IBP transducer
(5) Three-way valve
14.3.2 Measuring an Invasive Blood Pressure

To monitor IBP, follow this procedure:
1. Connect one end of the IBP cable to the IBP cable connector, and the other end to the IBP transducer.
2. Flush the IBP transducer system to exhaust all air from the tubing according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Ensure that the system is free of air bubbles.
3. Connect the IBP transducer to the patient, making sure that the transducer is at the same horizontal level as
the heart.
4. Select the proper pressure label for currently measured pressure. For more information, see
14.6.2 Changing the Pressure Label.
5. Zero the IBP transducer. For more information, see.14.3.3 Zeroing the IBP transducer. After a successful
zeroing, turn off the three-way valve to the air and turn on the three-way valve to the patient.
CAUTION
• Make sure that all the transducers are zeroed correctly before making IBP measurements.
• Make sure that all air bubbles have been flushed from the IBP transducer system before making IBP
measurements.
• If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP) with a sitting patient, level the transducer with the top of the
patient’s ear. Incorrect leveling may give incorrect values (not applicable if measuring ICP with the
Codman ICP transducer).
14 - 2
14.3.3 Zeroing the IBP transducer
To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in accordance with
your hospital policy. The IBP transducer should be zeroed in the following conditions:
■ The IBP transducer, adapter cable or module is reconnected.
■ The monitor restarts.
■ The readings are in doubt.
■ The monitor displays the prompt message Zero Required.
To zero the transducer, follow this procedure:

1. Connect the IBP transducer, the IBP adapter cable and the module.
2. Turn off the three-way valve (the one near the transducer) to the patient, in order to vent the transducer to
the atmospheric pressure.
3. Zero the transducer by one of the following methods:
◆ Press the Zero hard key on the module. In the Zero IBP dialog, select to zero an IBP, or select to zero
all IBP.
◆ Select the numeric area (such as the Art numeric area), and then select Zero button.
◆ Select the IBP Zero quick key. In the Zero IBP dialog, select to zero an IBP, or select to zero all IBP.
4. After the zero calibration is completed, close the three-way valve to the air and open the three-way valve to
the patient.
Zero calibration may fail in case of pressure fluctuation or pressure exceeding the calibration range. If zero
calibration fails, follow this procedure:
1. Check that the three-way valve (the one near the transducer) is open to the air.
2. Perform zero calibration again. Do not sway the IBP transducer and tubing during zero calibration.
14.4 Measuring ICP Using the Codman ICP Transducer
14.4.1 Zeroing the Codman ICP transducer

The Codman ICP transducer (Model: 82-6653) must be zeroed before use. To zero the ICP transducer, follow this
procedure:
1. Connect the ICP transducer, the ICP adapter cable and the module.
2. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare the ICP transducer.
3. Zero the ICP transducer: when the message Zero Reference is displayed in the ICP numeric area, select the
ICP waveform area or numeric area to enter the ICP dialog → select the Zero tab → select the Zero button.
4. Record the zero reference value on the blank area of the ICP transducer for reference.
If the ICP transducer zero calibration failed or the zero reference value is in doubt, perform the zero calibration
again.
14.4.2 Measuring ICP

To perform the ICP measurement, follow this procedure:
1. Zero the Codman ICP transducer. For more information, see section 14.4.1 Zeroing the Codman ICP
transducer.
2. Disconnect the ICP transducer and ICP adapter cable. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply the
ICP transducer to the patient.
3. Reconnect the ICP transducer and ICP adapter cable.
4. Check that the zero reference value displayed on the monitor is consistent with that recorded on the ICP
transducer.
◆ Consistent: select Accept.
◆ Inconsistent: input the zero reference value recorded on the ICP transducer, and select Accept.
14 - 3
If the patient being monitored for ICP must be transported, check that the target monitor supports the Codman
ICP transducer. For more information, see 14.4.1 Zeroing the Codman ICP transducer. If the target monitor does
not support the Codman ICP transducer, do not use it for ICP monitoring.
If the target monitor supports the Codman ICP transducer, follow this procedure to transport the patient:
1. Disconnect the ICP adapter cable from the measurement module, or remove the module from the monitor.
2. Connect the ICP adapter cable, measurement module, and the target monitor, or insert the measurement
module into the target monitor.
3. Check that the zero reference value displayed on the monitor is consistent with that recorded on the ICP
transducer.
◆ Consistent: select Accept.
◆ Inconsistent: input the zero reference value recorded on the ICP transducer, and select Accept.
CAUTION
• If monitors of different brands are used to zero the Codman ICP transducer, the zero reference
values can be different. Use a Mindray monitor to Zero the Codman ICP transducer if you will take
ICP measurement using a Mindray monitor. Otherwise the ICP measurement could be inaccurate.
14.5 IBP Display

The IBP measurement is displayed on the monitor as a waveform and numeric pressures. For arterial pressure,
the IBP numeric area displays systolic pressure, diastolic pressure and mean pressure. For venous pressure, the
IBP numeric area displays only the mean pressure. The figure below shows the waveform and numerics for the
Art pressure.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(7) (6)
(1) Pressure label (2) Waveform
(3) Pressure Unit (4) Systolic pressure
(5) Diastolic pressure (6) Mean pressure
(7) PPV measurement
For some pressures, the parameter window may show the mean pressure only. For different pressures, their
defaults unit may be different. If the Art and ICP pressures are measured simultaneously, the ICP parameter area
will display numeric CPP, which is obtained by subtracting ICP from the Art mean.
14.5.1 Overlapping IBP Waveforms

The IBP waveforms can be displayed together. To combine IBP waveforms, follow this procedure:
2. Select the waveform area where you want to display the overlapped IBP waveforms, and then select the IBP
waves to be overlapped on the left side of the same line.
3. Repeat step 2 in another waveform area if needed.
4. Select to save the setting and exit the screen. The main screen will display the overlapped IBP waves.
14 - 4
Selecting the overlapped IBP waveforms on the main screen opens the Overlapping Waveform Setup dialog,
where you can make the following settings:
■ Scale
◆ Set Left Scale for the arterial pressure.
◆ Set Right Scale for the venous pressure.
◆ Set CVP Scale individually if the CVP waveform is combined and CVP unit is different from IBP unit.
◆ Set ICP Scale individually if the ICP waveform is combined and ICP unit is different from IBP unit.
◆ Set PA Scale individually if the PA waveform is combined.
■ Switch on or off Gridlines to show or hide gridlines in the overlapped waveform area.
■ Set Speed for the overlapped waveforms.
NOTE
• The unit of CVP scale is consistent with the CVP parameter unit.
14.6 Changing IBP Settings
14.6.1 Changing the IBP Alarm Settings

To change the IBP alarm settings, follow this procedure:
1. Select the IBP numeric area or waveform area to enter the corresponding pressure dialog.
Authentication.
4. Set the alarm properties of pressure.
14.6.2 Changing the Pressure Label

The pressure label is a unique identifier for each type of pressure. Therefore, it is recommended to select the
proper pressure label for the source of the pressure being monitored.
To select the pressure label, follow this procedure:
3. Set IBP1 Label or IBP2 Label.
Label Description Label Description
Art Arterial blood pressure PA Pulmonary artery pressure
Ao Aortic pressure UAP Umbilical arterial pressure
BAP Brachial arterial pressure FAP Femoral arterial pressure
CVP Central venous pressure LAP Left atrial pressure
RAP Right atrial pressure ICP Intracranial pressure
UVP Umbilical venous pressure LV Left ventricular pressure
P1 to P4 Non-specific pressure label
14 - 5
NOTE
• The same label cannot be selected for different pressures. When two pressures are detected having
the same label, the monitor automatically changes one pressure label to a currently unused one.
14.6.3 Setting the Pressure Type for Display

For the non-specific pressure (P1, P2, P3 or P4), the displayed pressure type is configurable. To set the displayed
pressure type, follow this procedure:
1. Select the numeric area or waveform area of the non-specific pressure to enter the corresponding pressure
dialog.
3. Set Measure:
◆ If this non-specific pressure is arterial pressure, set the Measure to All. In this case, its corresponding
numeric area displays systolic pressure, diastolic pressure and mean pressure.
◆ If this non-specific pressure is venous pressure, set the Measure to Mean Only. In this case, its
corresponding numeric area displays only the mean pressure.
14.6.4 Changing the Sensitivity

The IBP value displayed on the monitor screen is the average of data collected within a specific time. The shorter
the averaging time is, the quicker the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s blood pressure, and the
higher the sensitivity. Contrarily, the longer the averaging time is, the slower the monitor responds to changes in
the patient’s blood pressure, the lower the sensitivity, but the measurement accuracy will be improved. For
critically ill patients, selecting higher sensitivity will help with understanding the patient’s state.
To set the sensitivity, follow this procedure:
3. Set Sensitivity.
14.6.5 Setting the IBP Waveform

To set the IBP waveform, follow this procedure:
3. Set the following properties of the IBP waveform:
◆ Speed
◆ Scale: if Auto is selected, the size of the pressure’s waveform will be adjusted automatically.
14.6.6 Setting the Display Format of Artery Pressure

To set the display format of the artery pressure, follow this procedure:
1. Select the numeric area or waveform area of any arterial pressure to enter the corresponding menu.
3. Set Display Format.
14.6.7 Showing/Hiding the Alarm Limits of Artery Pressure

To set whether to display the alarm limits of the arterial pressure, follow this procedure:
1. Select the numeric area or waveform area of any arterial pressure to enter the corresponding menu.
3. Switch on or off Display Alarm Limits.
14 - 6
14.6.8 Setting the Use PA-D as PAWP Switch
The PA-D value can be configured to replace the PAWP value for hemodynamic calculation. To do so, follow this
procedure:
1. Select the PA numeric area or waveform area to enter the PA dialog.
3. Switch on or off Use PA-D as PAWP.
For more information on hemodynamic calculation, see 20.4 Hemodynamic Calculations.
14.6.9 Enabling PPV Measurement

PPV indicates pulse pressure variation. When measuring the arterial pressure (except PA), the PPV measurement
is available. To enable the PPV measurement, follow this procedure:
2. Select the PPV Setup tab.
3. Switch on PPV Measure.
You can select PPV source after enabling the PPV measurement.
WARNING
• This monitor can calculate PPV from beat-to-beat values of any arterial pulsatile pressure. The
circumstances under which the calculation of a PPV value is clinically meaningful, appropriate and
reliable must be determined by a physician.
• The clinical value of the derived PPV information must be determined by a physician. According to
recent scientific literature, the clinical relevance of PPV information is restricted to sedated patients
receiving controlled mechanical ventilation and mainly free from cardiac arrhythmia.
• PPV calculation may lead to inaccurate values in the following situations:
◆ at respiration rates below 8 rpm
◆ during ventilation with tidal volumes lower than 8 ml/kg
◆ for patients with acute right ventricular dysfunction (cor pulmonale).
• The PPV measurement has been validated only for adult patients.
14.7 PAWP
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP) values, used to assess cardiac function, are affected by fluid status,
myocardial contractility, and valve and pulmonary circulation integrity.
Obtain the measurement by introducing a balloon-tipped pulmonary artery flotation catheter into the
pulmonary artery. When the catheter is in one of the smaller pulmonary arteries, the inflated balloon occludes
the artery allowing the monitor to record changes in the intrathoracic pressures that occur throughout the
respiration cycle.
The pulmonary wedge pressure is the left ventricular end diastolic pressure when the airway pressure and valve
function are normal. The most accurate PAWP values are obtained at the end of the respiration cycle when the
intrathoracic pressure is fairly constant and the artifact caused by respiration is minimal.
WARNING
• PAWP monitoring is not intended for neonatal patients.
14 - 7
14.7.1 PAWP Equipment to Patient Connection
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(5)
(1) MPM/IBP module (2) Flush bag
(3) IBP transducer (4) Three-way valve
(5) PA distal port (6) Balloon inflation syringe
(7) Thermodilution catheter (8) Balloon
14.7.2 Preparing to Measure PAWP

To prepare to monitor PAWP, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the IBP transducer, the IBP cable and the module. For more information, see 14.3.2 Measuring an
Invasive Blood Pressure.
2. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to connect the PA port of the thermodilution catheter and the
patient end of the IBP transducer.
3. Zero the IBP transducer. For more information, see 14.3.3 Zeroing the IBP transducer.
4. Set the IBP label to PA since the PAWP is measured on PA. For more information, see 14.6.2 Changing the
Pressure Label.
14.7.3 Measuring PAWP

To measure the PAWP, follow this procedure:
1. Select the PA numeric area or waveform area to enter the PA dialog, and then select PAWP.
14 - 8
2. Wedge the flotation catheter into the pulmonary artery by observing the PA waveform changes on the
screen, referring to the following figure.
3. Select Start.
4. Inflate the balloon and pay attention to PA waveform changes on the screen when the prompt message
Ready For Balloon Deflation appears.
5. Deflate the balloon when the prompt message Ready For Balloon Deflation appears. If the PA waveform
is stable, but the monitor is still not showing the prompt message Ready For Balloon Deflation, select
Freeze to freeze the waveform, and deflate the balloon.
6. Select Accept to save the PAWP value.
7. If you need to start a new measurement, repeat step 3 to step 6.
If the measurement fails or you need to adjust the PAWP value, you can use the following buttons to adjust the
PAWP waveform and measurement.
■ Select the up or down arrow button to adjust the PAWP value.
■ Select the left or right arrow button to view the frozen waveforms of 40 seconds.
■ Select Accept to save the PAWP value.
14 - 9
WARNING
• Prolonged inflation can cause pulmonary hemorrhage, infarction or both. Inflate the balloon for the
minimum time necessary to get an accurate measurement.
• If the PAWP is greater than the PA (systolic), deflate the balloon and report the incident in
accordance with hospital policy. Because the pulmonary artery could be accidentally ruptured, and
the PAWP value derived will not reflect the patient’s hemodynamic state, but will merely reflect the
pressure in the catheter or balloon.
• If the flotation/thermodilution catheter drifts into the wedge position without inflation of the
balloon, the PA waveform assumes a wedged appearance. Take appropriate action, in accordance
with standard procedures, to correct the situation.
NOTE
• The PA alarm is turned off automatically when the monitor enters the PAWP screen.
14.7.4 Setting the Waveforms of the PAWP Screen

On the PAWP screen, select Setup to enter the PAWP Setup dialog. In the PAWP Setup dialog, you can make
the following settings:
■ Select Reference Waveform 1 to set an ECG lead wave as the first reference wave.
■ Select Reference Waveform 2 to set a respiration wave as the second reference wave.
■ Select Speed to set a sweep speed for the displayed waveforms on the PAWP screen.
■ Select Scale to set the size of the PA waveform on the PAWP screen.
14.7.5 Performing Hemodynamic Calculation

On the PAWP screen, select Hemo Calcs to enter the Calculations dialog. For more information, see
20.4 Hemodynamic Calculations.
14.8 Connecting a Camino Device

The IBP module can interface with the Camino multi-parameter monitor (Model: MPM-1) to measure intracranial
pressure (ICP).
To connect the Camino, follow this procedure:
1. Plug the IBP module into the module rack.
2. Connect the Camino ICP cable to the IBP module.
3. Connect the ICP connector to the ICP adapter.
4. Connect the Camino cable to the Camino monitor.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)
14 - 10
(1) External IBP module (2) Camino ICP cable
(3) ICP adapter (4) ICP connector
(5) Camino cable (6) Camino monitor
WARNING
• Refer to the Camino Operator’s Manual to adjust settings and connect the monitor with the patient.
• ICP alarm settings on the Mindray patient monitor are independent of the Camino monitor alarm
settings, and thus may be different. Please pay special attention to the alarms on the Camino
monitor.
14.9 IBP Troubleshooting

personnel.
NOTE
Problem Solution
Cannot see IBP numeric area or waveform 1. Check that the IBP is set to display in the Screen Setup dialog. For more
area on the main screen information, see.3.9.2 Displaying Parameter Numerics and Waveforms.
2. Check that if the IBP parameter switch is enabled. If not, enable the IBP
measurement. For more information, see 3.9.1 Switching On or Off a
Parameter.
3. Check the connection of IBP cable, IBP transducer and the monitor.
4. Check that the three-way valve is turned to the correct position.
5. Check that the IBP transducer has been zeroed. For more information, see
14.3.3 Zeroing the IBP transducer.
Cannot see systolic pressure and diastolic Set Measure to All in the P1/P2/P3/P4 setup page. For more information, see
pressure for P1/P2/P3/P4 14.6.3 Setting the Pressure Type for Display.
IBP readings seem unstable 1. Make sure there are no air bubbles in the transducer systems.
2. Check that the transducer is properly fixed.
3. Zero the transducer again.
4. Replace the transducer.
Zeroing of IBP channel(s) fails. 1. Ensure that the channels are open to air.
2. Perform zero calibration again. Do not sway the IBP transducer and
tubing during zero calibration. For more information, see 14.3.3 Zeroing
the IBP transducer.
3. If zero calibration still fails, replace the transducer.
14 - 11
15 Monitoring Cardiac Output (C.O.)
15.1 C.O. Introduction

The cardiac output (C.O.) measurement invasively measures cardiac output and other hemodynamic parameters
using the right heart (atria) thermodilution method. A cold solution of known volume and temperature is
injected into the right atrium through the proximal port of a pulmonary artery (PA) catheter. The cold solution
mixes with the blood in the right ventricle and the change in blood temperature is measured with a thermistor
at the distal end of the catheter in the pulmonary artery. The temperature change is displayed as a curve on the
C.O. split screen, and the monitor calculates the C.O. value from this curve. The C.O. value is inversely
proportional to the area under the curve. As cardiac output varies continuously, a series of measurements must
be carried out to achieve a reliable C.O. average value. Always use the average of multiple thermodilution
measurements for therapy decisions. The monitor is capable of storing 6 measurements.
C.O. monitoring is intended for adult patients only.
You can monitor C.O. using the built-in C.O. module or the external C.O. module.
The following picture shows the external C.O. module.
(1) (2)
(3)
(1) C.O. menu hard key (2) C.O. measure menu hard key (3) C.O. cable connector
15.2 C.O. Safety Information
WARNING
• The C.O. measurement results may be erroneous during electrosurgery.
• All invasive procedures involve risks to the patient. Use aseptic technique and follow catheter
manufacturer's instructions.
• Use only accessories specified in this manual. Make sure that the accessories never come into
contact with conductive parts.
• C.O. monitoring is not intended for pediatric and neonatal patients.
15 - 1
15.3 C.O. Measurement Limitations
The following factors may influence the accuracy of C.O. measurement:
■ temperature of injectate solution
■ volume of injectate solution
■ baseline of patient’s blood temperature
■ patient’s inspiratory/expiratory cycle
■ placement of catheter with relation to proximity of lung field
■ the catheter itself
■ patient’s heart rate and hemodynamic status
■ any solution infused with intravenous injection during the C.O. measurement
To obtain accurate C.O. measurements, follow these recommendations:

■ Temperature of injectate solution must be at least 10 ºC cooler than that of the patient’s blood.
■ Inject solution at end of expiration.
■ Inject solution rapidly and smoothly.
■ Finish injection within four to five seconds.
15.4 C.O. Display

The C.O. display shows only C.O., C.I. (cardiac index), and TB (blood temperature) in the C.O. numeric area.
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(1) C.O. label (2) Primary parameter unit
(3)Primary parameter (4) Secondary parameter
NOTE
• The C.O. value is invalid if it is displayed in outline font.
15 - 2
15.5 C.O. Equipment to Patient Connection

(1) Monitor (2) 12-pin C.O. cable (Model: CO7702) (3) TI cable connector
(4) In-line probe (5) Injectate solution (6) Injectate syringe
(7) Three-way valve (8) Proximal injectate port (9) Balloon inflation valve
(10) Thermistor connector (11) PA distal port (12) Thermodilution catheter
(13) Thermistor
15.6 Performing C.O. Measurement
15.6.1 Preparing for C.O. Measurement

1. Connect the C.O. cable to the C.O. module and thermistor connector, making sure the C.O. numeric area is
displayed on the monitor’s main screen.
2. Follow the hospital’s policy and procedures to prepare the patient for the C.O. measurement.
3. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to set up the catheter and other accessories.
4. Check that all the accessories are properly connected.
NOTE
• For an in-line probe setup, make sure the in-line sensor is securely connected to the tubing. For the
bath probe setup, make sure the bath probe is correctly sensing the injectate temperature.
15.6.2 Setting C.O. Measurement

Before performing the C.O. measurement, follow this procedure:
1. Select the C.O. numeric area to enter the C.O. Measure dialog.
2. Select the Setup.
3. Perform the following check or setup:
◆ Check if the height and weight are appropriate for your patient. Change if necessary. The patient's
height and weight values are required for determining cardiac index (C.I.).
◆ Check that the correct computation constant is entered. The computation constant has a close
relationship with the entered injectate volume, injectate probe type (in-line probe or bath probe) and
temperature. See the Instructions for Use of the pulmonary artery catheter to determine correctness.
15 - 3
To change the computation constant, select Comp Const and then input the correct value. When a
new catheter is used, the computation constant should be adjusted in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions for use.
◆ Switch on or off Auto TI. If Auto TI is switched on, the system automatically detects the injectate
temperature, and TI setting is disabled. If Auto TI is switched off, you need to input the injectate
temperature at TI.
◆ Switch on or off Auto Start. If Auto Start is switched on, the monitor automatically takes the C.O.
measurement after establishing a baseline of blood temperature. If Auto Start is switched off, you
need to click the Start button in the C.O. Measure dialog for a new measurement.
15.6.3 Performing C.O. Measurement

To perform the C.O. measurement, follow this procedure:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Average values (2) Historical measurement dialogs
(3) Current measurement values (4) Current C.O. curve
(5) Prompt message area (6) Buttons
2. Proceed as follows to perform the C.O. measure:

◆ If Auto Start is switched off, select the Start button, and then inject the solution quickly when you
see the message Please Wait. As shown in the figure above, during the measurement, the currently
measured thermodilution curve is displayed. At the end of the measurement, the thermodilution
curve is transferred to one of the 6 measurement areas and the monitor prompts you to wait for a
certain period of time before starting a new measurement.
◆ If Auto Start is switched on, inject the solution quickly when you see the message Ready for new set
of measurement. The monitor consecutively takes C.O. measurements automatically without the
need for pressing the Start button between two measurements. A new thermodilution measurement
is possible as soon as the message Inject now! is displayed on the screen. The monitor automatically
detects further thermodilution measurements.
3. Acquire the average value of C.O. and C.I. A maximum of 6 measurements can be stored. If you perform
more than six measurements without rejecting any, the oldest will automatically be deleted when a
seventh curve is stored. Select from the 6 measurement curves and the system will automatically calculate
and display the averaged C.O. and C.I. values. Then select the Accept Average button to accept and store
the averaged values.
When injecting, the stopcock to the thermodilution catheter is open and the stopcock to the injectate solution is
closed. After completing the measurement, turn off the stopcock to the thermodilution catheter and turn on the
stopcock to the injectate solution, and then draw the injectate solution into the injectate syringe.
15 - 4
The button area also provides you with the following functions:
■ Select Stop to stop the current measurement. Select Setup to enter the C.O. dialog.
■ Select Hemo Calcs to enter the Calculations dialog.
NOTE
• Starting a measurement without blood temperature being stable may cause measurement failure.
• The TB alarms are inactivated during a C.O. measurement, and will be reactivated automatically
after the completion of C.O. measurement.
• Please see the Instructions for Use of thermodilution catheter to determine the Comp Const and the
volume of injectate solution.
15.7 Changing C.O. Settings
15.7.1 Setting C.O. Alarm Properties

To set the C.O. alarm properties, follow this procedure:
2. Select Setup to enter the C.O. dialog.
4. Enter the password if required. For more information, refer to 25.13.3Selecting Password for User
Authentication.
15.8 C.O. Troubleshooting

accessories, the table below may help with troubleshooting before requesting a service personnel visit. If the
problem persists, contact your service personnel.
NOTE
• For the physiological and technical alarm messages, see Appendix DAlarm Messages.
Problem Solution
Do not see C.O. numeric area on the main 1. Check that the C.O. is set to display in the Screen Setup dialog. For
screen more information, see 3.9.2Displaying Parameter Numerics and
Waveforms.
2. Check that if the C.O. parameter switch is enabled. If not, enable the
C.O. measurement. For more information, see 3.9.1Switching On or Off a
Parameter.
3.Check that the patient type is adult.
4. Check the connection of C.O. cable, thermodilution catheter and TI
sensor.
C.O. value is inaccurate 1. Check that the thermodilution catheter is positioned properly.
2. Check that the computational constant is proper for current injectate
temperature, injectate volume and injectate probe type.
3. Inject solution rapidly and smoothly.
4. Finish injection within four to five seconds.
5. Inject more volume, or inject colder solution.
6. Check that the height and weight of patient is properly configured.
7. If Auto TI is switched off, check that the entered temperature is
correct.
15 - 5
Problem Solution
C.O. measurement fails 1. Inject more volume, or inject colder solution. Make sure that the
injectate temperature is at least 10°C colder than the patient blood
temperature.
2. Finish injection within four to five seconds.
3. Check the connection of C.O. cable, thermodilution catheter and TI
sensor.
15 - 6
16 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
16.1 CO2 Introduction

CO2 monitoring is a continuous, non-invasive technique for determining the concentration of CO2 in the
patient’s airway by measuring the absorption of infrared (IR) light of specific wavelengths. CO2 has its own
absorption characteristic and the amount of light passing the gas probe depends on the concentration of the
measured CO2. When a specific band of IR light passes through respiratory gas samples, some of IR light will be
absorbed by the CO2 molecules. The amount of IR light transmitted after it has been passed through the
respiratory gas sample is measured with a photodetector. From the amount of IR light measured, the
concentration of CO2 is calculated.
CO2 measurement is used to monitor the patient’s respiratory status. The following two methods are used for
measuring CO2:
■ Mainstream CO2 measurement
Directly insert a CO2 sensor into the patient's breathing system.
■ Sidestream/Microstream CO2 measurement
Take a sample of the respiratory gas with a constant sample flow from the patient's airway and analyzes it
with a remote CO2 sensor built into the Sidestream or Microstream CO2 module.
The sidestream CO2 module can be configured with a paramagnetic oxygen sensor to measure O2. The
paramagnetic oxygen sensor measures oxygen based on its paramagnetic properties.
The mainstream CO2 measurement can be used, with specified accessories, with intubated adult, pediatric and
neonatal patients. The sidestream and microstream CO2 measurement can be used, with specified accessories,
with intubated and non-intubated adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients. With intubated patients, a sample of
the respiratory gas is drawn from the patient's breathing circuit through an airway adapter and a gas sampling
line. With non-intubated patients, the gas sample is drawn through a nasal cannula.
CO2 monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.
16.2 Identifying CO2 Modules

For ePM 12M/ePM 15M, you can monitor CO2 using the built-in CO2module or the external CO2 module. For ePM
10M, you can monitor CO2 using the external CO2 module only.
The following external modules are sidestream CO2 module, microstream CO2 module and mainstream CO2
module from left to right.
(1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(4)
(1) CO2 menu hard key (2) CO2 Measure/standby hard key
(3) CO2 watertrap seat (4) Gas outlet
(5) Sample line connector (6) CO2 sensor connector
16 - 1
To measure CO2 using the AG module, see 17 Monitoring Anesthetic Gas (AG).
16.3 CO2 Safety Information
WARNING
• Route all tubing away from the patient’s throat to avoid strangulation.
CAUTION
• Shaking the CO2 module during O2 measurement may lead to a distorted O2 waveform or inaccurate
O2 measurement
• Remove the airway sample line from the patient’s airway while nebulized medications are being
delivered. Measuring CO2 during nebulization may lead to inaccurate CO2 readings.
• EtCO2 values measured from the CO2 module may differ from those from the blood gas analysis.
• Avoid mechanical shock to the sidestream CO2 module.
NOTE
• The CO2 module automatically suppresses physiological alarms until breathing waves have been
detected. Ensure that the patient is properly connected when using the CO2 module.
16.4 CO2 Measurement Limitations

The following factors may influence the measurement accuracy:
■ Leaks or internal venting of sampled gas
■ Mechanical shock
■ Cyclic pressure up to 10 kPa (100 cmH2O)
■ Other sources of interference, if any
For more information, refer to A.13.9 CO2 Specifications.
CAUTION
• Measurement accuracy of the sidestream CO2 module may be affected by the breath rate and
inspiration/expiration (I/E) ratio.
• Measurement accuracy of the microstream CO2 module may be affected by the breath rate.
16.5 CO2 Display

The CO2 numeric and waveform areas provide FiCO2 measurement, EtCO2 measurement, awRR measurement,
and a CO2 waveform.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) CO2 waveform (2) Fraction of inspired CO2 (FiCO2)
(3) End tidal CO2 value (EtCO2) (4) Airway respiration rate (awRR)
16 - 2
If the sidestream CO2 module is configured with the oxygen sensor, O2 waveform and parameters can be
displayed in an O2 numeric and waveform area as follows:
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) O2 waveform (2) FiO2 measurement (3) EtO2 measurement
16.6 Measuring CO2 Using the Sidestream/Microstream CO2 Module
16.6.1 Preparing to Measure CO2 Using the Sidestream CO2 Module

To prepare the CO2 module for measurement, follow this procedure:
1. Select the appropriate gas sample line and watertrap according to the patient category.
2. Connect the watertrap to the CO2 module, and connect the gas sample line to the watertrap.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Watertrap receptacle (2) DRYLINE II watertrap (3) Gas sample line
3. Connect the other end of the gas sample line to the patient.
◆ For intubated patients requiring an airway adapter, install the airway adapter between the patient
circuit and the ventilator Y-piece.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Sample line (2) Connection to the ventilator
(3) Airway adapter (4) Connection to the patient
16 - 3
◆ For non-intubated patients, place the nasal cannula onto the patient.
4. Connect the gas outlet to the scavenging system using an exhaust tube.
After the CO2 module is connected, it enters measure mode by default and the monitor displays CO2 Starting.
CO2 can be measured after the start-up sequence is complete.
WARNING
• Do not use the adult or pediatric watertrap with a neonate patient. Otherwise, patient injury could
result.
• Connect the gas outlet to the scavenging system when measuring CO2 using the sidestream CO2
module.
CAUTION
• Leakage in the breathing or sampling system may cause the displayed EtCO2 values to be
significantly low. Always make sure that all components are securely connected.
• Inspect the airway adapter for a tight connection and proper operation before attaching it to the
patient.
• Squeezing or bending the sample line during sidestream or microstream CO2 measurement may
cause inaccurate CO2 readings or no reading.
• To avoid blocking the airway, empty the DRYLINE II watertrap container whenever half full.
Replacing the DRYLINE II watertrap once a month is recommended.
• The DRYLINE II watertrap has a filter preventing bacterium, water and secretions from entering the
module. Extended use could destroy the filter in watertrap and fail to stop the bacterium, water and
secretions entering the module, result in damaging the gas module and having infection risk.
NOTE
• To extend the lifetime of the watertrap and module, disconnect the watertrap from the module and
set the operating mode to Standby mode when CO2 monitoring is not required.
• The sample rates are different when different types of watertraps are used.
• The emptying interval of the DRYLINE II adult/pediatric watertrap is 26 hours @ 120 ml/min, 37 °C,
and 100% RH.
• The emptying interval of the DRYLINE II neonatal watertrap is 35 hours @ 90 ml/min, 37 °C, and
100% RH.
16 - 4
16.6.2 Preparing to Measure CO2 Using the Microstream CO2 Module
1. Connect one end of the sample line to the microstream CO2 module.
(1)
(2)
(1) Sample line connector (2) Sample line
2. Connect the other end of the sample line to the patient.

◆ For intubated patient requiring an airway adapter, install the airway adapter between the patient
circuit and the ventilator Y-piece.
◆ For non-intubated patient, place the nasal cannula onto the patient.
◆ For patient prone to mouth breathing, place the oral-nasal cannula onto the patient.
3. Connect the gas outlet to the a scavenging system using an exhaust tube.
After the CO2 module is connected to the SMR, it enters measure mode by default and the monitor displays CO2
Sensor Warmup. CO2 can be measured after the start-up sequence is complete.
WARNING
• Connect the gas outlet to the scavenging system when measuring CO2 using the microstream CO2
module.
NOTE
• Disconnect the sample line from the module when CO2 monitoring is not required.
16.6.3 Zeroing the Sidestream/Microstream CO2 Module

The sidestream or microstream CO2 module performs zero calibration automatically when needed.
NOTE
• The CO2 module temporally stops measuring during zeroing.
16 - 5
16.7 Measuring CO2 Using Mainstream CO2 Module
16.7.1 Preparing to Measure CO2 Using Mainstream CO2 Module

1. Connect the airway adapter to the sensor head.
(2)
(1)
(3)
(1) Sensor (2) Connect to module (3) Airway adapter
2. Attach the sensor connector to the CO2 connector on the mainstream CO2 module.
3. Zero the sensor after the warm-up is finished. For details, see 16.7.2 Zeroing the Mainstream CO2 sensor.
4. After the zero calibration is finished, connect the airway as shown below.
(5)
(4)
(4) Connect to patient (5) Connect to ventilator
5. Make sure that no leakages are in the airway and then start a measurement.
NOTE
• Be sure to set the barometric pressure properly before using the mainstream CO2 module. Improper
settings will result in erroneous CO2 reading.
• Always position the sensor with the adapter in an upright position to avoid collection of fluids in the
windows of the adapter. Large concentrations of fluids at this point will obstruct gas analysis.
• To avoid dead space, place the sensor as close to the patient as possible.
16 - 6
16.7.2 Zeroing the Mainstream CO2 sensor
For mainstream CO2 modules, the sensor should be zeroed in the following conditions:
■ Before each measurement.
■ A new adapter is used.
■ Reconnect the sensor to the module.
■ The message CO2 Zero Required displays. In this case, check the airway adapter for any blockage, e.g.
mucus, etc. If a blockage is detected, clear or replace the adapter.
To zero the sensor, follow this procedure:

1. Connect the sensor to the module.
2. In the CO2 menu, select Setup tab.
3. Set the Operating Mode to Measure. The message CO2 Sensor Warmup is displayed.
4. After warm-up is finished, connect the sensor to a clean, dry airway adapter. The adapter should be vented
to the air and isolated from CO2 sources, such as ventilator, the patient’s breathing, your own breathing, etc.
5. Select Zero in the CO2 menu. The message Zeroing is displayed.
It takes about 15 to 20 seconds. The message disappears when the zero calibration is completed.
WARNING
• When perform a zero calibration during the measurement, disconnect the sensor from the patient’s
airway first.
• Please do not rely on the readings during zeroing.
16.8 Changing Settings for All CO2 Modules
16.8.1 Changing CO2 Alarm Settings

To change the CO2 alarm settings, follow this procedure:
1. Select the CO2 numeric area or waveform area to enter the CO2 dialog.
Authentication.
16.8.2 Setting the CO2 Waveform

To set the CO2 waveform, follow this procedure:
3. Set Waveform Type, Speed and Scale or CO2 Scale of the CO2 waveform.

To set the respiration rate (RR) source, follow this procedure:
3. Set RR Source.
16 - 7
When you select Auto, the system automatically selects the RR source according to the priority. The priority of
RR source is first CO2, and then ECG. When the current RR source does not have valid measurement, the system
automatically switches the RR Source to Auto.
16.8.4 Entering the Standby Mode

Set the CO2 module to one of the following modes according to the module status:
■ Select Measure mode when using the CO2 module for monitoring.
■ Select Standby mode to prolong the CO2 module service life when not using the CO2 module.
The default operating mode is Measure. Whennot using the CO2 module, proceed as follows to enter the
Standby mode:
3. Set Operating Mode to Standby.

When performing intubation during general anesthesia, enter the intubation mode to reduce unnecessary
alarms. To enter the intubation mode, follow this procedure:
2. Select Intubation Mode.
For the details of the intubation mode, see 7.13 Intubation Mode.
NOTE
• When the configured intubation period is over, the monitor automatically exits the intubation mode
and gives two alert sounds.
16.8.6 Setting the Auto Standby

The monitor enters standby mode automatically if no breath is detected after the configured period of time. To
set the auto standby, follow this procedure:
3. Set Auto Standby.
16.8.7 Setting Humidity Compensation

Sidestream and microstream CO2 modules are configured to compensate CO2 readings for either Body
Temperature and Pressure, Saturated Gas (BTPS), to account for humidity in the patient’s breath, or Ambient
Temperature and Pressure, Dry Gas (ATPD).
■ ATPD: PCO2(mmHg)=CO2(vol%) x Pamb/100
■ BTPS (sidestream): PCO2(mmHg)=CO2(vol%) x (Pamb- 47)/100
■ BTPS (microstream): PCO2(mmHg)=CO2(vol%) x (1- 0.03)x Pamb/100
Where, PCO2(mmHg)= partial pressure, vol%=CO2 concentration, Pamb=ambient pressure, and unit is mmHg.
For the sidestream and microstream CO2 module, set the humidity compensation on or off according to the
actual condition.
To set the humidity compensation, follow this procedure:
3. Set BTPS Compensation.
◆ Switch on for BTPS.
16 - 8
◆ Switch off for ATPD.
16.9 Changing Settings for Sidestream and Microstream CO2 Module
16.9.1 Setting the Auto Standby

The monitor enters standby mode automatically after the configured period of time if no breath is detected
since the last detected breath. To set the auto standby, follow this procedure:
1. Select the CO2 numeric area or waveform area to enter the CO2 menu.
16.9.2 Setting Humidity Compensation

Sidestream and microstream CO2 modules are configured to compensate CO2 readings for either Body
Temperature and Pressure, Saturated Gas (BTPS), to account for humidity in the patient’s breath, or Ambient
Temperature and Pressure, Dry Gas (ATPD).
■ ATPD: PCO2(mmHg)=CO2(vol%) x Pamb/100
■ BTPS (sidestream): PCO2(mmHg)=CO2(vol%) x (Pamb- 47)/100
■ BTPS (microstream): PCO2(mmHg)=CO2(vol%) x (1- 0.03)x Pamb/100
Where, PCO2(mmHg)= partial pressure, vol%=CO2 concentration, Pamb=ambient pressure, and unit is mmHg.
For the sidestream and microstream CO2 module, you can set the humidity compensation on or off according to
the actual condition.
To set the humidity compensation, follow this procedure:
1. Select the CO2 numeric area or waveform area to enter the CO2 menu.
3. Set BTPS Compensation.
◆ Switch on for BTPS.

◆ Switch off for ATPD.
16.9.3 Setting Flow Rate (For Sidestream CO2 Module Without O2)
When you are using the sidestream CO2 module without the O2 monitoring function to monitor a neonatal
patient, you can select flow rate. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the System column select Maintenance → input the required
password → select .
2. Select the Module tab → Other tab.
3. Set CO2 Flow Rate For Neo.
16.10 Changing O2 Settings (For Sidestream CO2 Module Integrating O2)
16.10.1 Changing O2 Alarm Settings

To change the O2 alarm settings, follow this procedure:
Authentication.
16 - 9
16.10.2 Setting the O2 Waveform
To set the O2 waveform, follow this procedure:
3. Set Speed and O2 Scale of the O2 waveform.
16.11 Setting the Gas Compensation

The presence of interfering gas affects the CO2 measurement. To get the best possible measurement result, it is
recommended to set the gas compensation. The configured concentration of the interfering gas should be in
accordance with its actual proportion.
For the microstream CO2 module, gas compensations are not required.
CAUTION
• Make sure to use the appropriate compensations. Inappropriate compensations may cause
inaccurate measurement values and result in misdiagnosis.
For the sidestream CO2 module, follow this procedure to set the gas compensation:
3. Set the compensation according to the actual condition.
16.12 Choosing a Time Interval for Peak-Picking

For microstream CO2 modules, select a time interval for picking the highest CO2 as the EtCO2 and the lowest as
the FiCO2.
To set the time interval, follow this procedure:
3. Set Maximum Hold.
4. Toggle between Single Breath, 10 s, 20 s and 30 s.
◆ Single Breath: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated for every breath.
◆ 10 s, 20 s, or 30 s: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated using 10, 20, or 30 seconds of data.
16.13 Performing the Leakage Test

When measuring CO2 using the internal CO2 module or the sidestream CO2 module. The leakage test is required
every time before the CO2 measurement. To perform the CO2 leakage test, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the measuring accessories as per section 16.6.1 Preparing to Measure CO2 Using the Sidestream CO2
Module.
2. Wait until the startup finishes. Completely block the gas inlet on the sidestream CO2 module or on the N1.
The alarm message “CO2 Airway Occluded” will appear on the screen.
3. Continue to block the gas inlet for another one minute.
5. Select the Module tab → CO2 tab.
6. Check that the current flow rate is less than 10ml/min, and the alarm message “CO2 Airway Occluded”
does not disappear.
16 - 10
This indicates that the module does not leak. If the alarm message disappears, or the flow rate is equal to
10ml/min or greater, it indicates that the module leaks. Perform the leakage test again. If the problem
remains, contact your service personnel for help.
16.14 CO2 Calibration

For sidestream and microstream CO2 modules, a calibration is needed every year or when the measured values
have a great deviation.
To calibrate the CO2 module, contact your service personnel.
CAUTION
• Connect the gas outlet to the scavenging system when calibrating the CO2 module.
16.15 CO2 Troubleshooting

personnel.
NOTE
16.15.1 Troubleshooting the Sidestream/Microstream CO2 Module
Problem Solution
EtCO2 measurements too low 1. Check the patient status.

2. Check the sample line and connectors for leakage.
3. Ventilate the room if the environmental CO2 concentration is too
high.
16.15.2 Troubleshooting the Mainstream CO2 Module
Problem Solution
Elevated baseline 1. Check the patient status.

2. Check the sensor.
16.16 Oridion Information
Oridion Patents
This posting serves as notice under 35 U.S.C.§287(a) for Covidien patents: http://www.covidien.com/patents.
No Implied License
unauthorized CO2 sampling consumables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the
scope of one or more of the patents relating to this device and/or CO2 sampling consumable.
16 - 11
17 Monitoring Anesthetic Gas (AG)
17.1 AG Introduction
The anesthetic gas (AG) module measures the patient’s anesthetic and respiratory gases by connecting to the
airway of intubated patients or collecting the gases with specified accessories. It also incorporates the features
of the O2 module.
The AG module determines the concentration of certain gases using the infrared (IR) light absorption
measurement. The gases that can be measured by the AG module absorbing IR light. Each gas has its own
absorption characteristic. The gas is transported into a sample cell, and an optical IR filter selects a specific band
of IR light to pass through the gas. For multiple gas measurements, there are multiple IR filters. The higher the
concentration of gas in a given volume, the more IR light is absorbed. This means that higher concentration of IR
absorbing gas causes a lower transmission of IR light. The amount of IR light transmitted after it has been passed
through an IR absorbing gas is measured. From the amount of IR light measured, the concentration of gas
present can be calculated.
Oxygen does not absorb IR light as other breathing gases and is therefore measured relying on its paramagnetic
properties. Inside the O2 sensor are two nitrogen-filled glass spheres mounted on a strong rare metal taut-band
suspension. This assembly is suspended in a symmetrical non-uniform magnetic field. In the presence of
paramagnetic oxygen, the glass spheres are pushed further away from the strongest part of the magnetic field.
The strength of the torque acting on the suspension is proportional to the oxygen concentration. From the
strength of the torque, the concentration of oxygen is calculated.
AG monitoring is intended for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.
You can monitor AG using the external AG module.
The following picture shows the external AG module.
(1) (3)
(2)
(4)
(1) AG dialog hard key (2) Gas outlet
(3) AG Measure/standby hard key (4) Watertrap seat
NOTE
• The AG module is configured with automatic barometric pressure compensation function.
17 - 1
17.2 AG Safety Information
WARNING
• To avoid explosion hazard, do not use flammable anesthetic agent such as ether and cyclopropane
for this equipment.
• Using high-frequency electrosurgical units may increase the risk of skin burn. In this case, do not use
antistatic or conductive respiratory tubing.
• Route all tubing away from the patient’s throat to avoid strangulation.
CAUTION
• Perform the measurement in a well-ventilated environment.
• EtCO2 values measured from the AG module may differ from that of from the blood gas analysis.
NOTE
• The AG module automatically suppresses physiological alarms until breathing waves have been
detected. Make sure that a patient is properly connected when monitoring with the AG module.
17.3 AG Measurement Limitations

The following factors may influence the measurement accuracy:
■ Leaks or internal venting of sampled gas
■ Mechanical shock
■ Cyclic pressure up to 10 kPa (100 cmH2O)
■ Other sources of interference, if any
17.4 AG Display
The AG module can send waves and numerics for all measured anesthetic gases for display on the monitor,
including:
■ CO2, O2, N2O and AA waves
■ awRR: airway respiratory rate
■ MAC: minimum alveolar concentration
■ End tidal (Et) and fraction of inspired (Fi) numerics for CO2, O2, N2O and AA
AA represents one of the following agents: Des (desflurane), Iso (isoflurane), Enf (enflurane), Sev (sevoflurane), or
Hal (halothane).
17 - 2
If only one anesthetic agent is used, the AA waveform area displays the waveform of this anesthetic agent. If
several anesthetic agents are used, the AA waveform area displays the waveform of the primary anesthetic
agent.
17.5 AG Equipment to Patient Connection
(4)
()
(5)
(1) AG module (2) Gas outlet
(3) Watertrap (4) Gas sample line
(5) Airway adapter (connected to patient) (6) Y-piece (connected to the anesthesia machine)
17.6 Preparing for AG Monitoring

To prepare to monitor AG, follow this procedure:
1. Select the appropriate gas sample line and watertrap according to the patient category.
2. Connect the watertrap to the AG module, and connect the gas sample line to the watertrap.
3. Connect the other end of the gas sample line to the patient via the airway adapter.
4. Connect the gas outlet to a scavenging system or the patient respiration circuit using an exhaust tube.
5. Check that the connections are tight.
After the AG module is connected to the SMR, the AG module enters the measurement mode by default and the
monitor prompts AG Starting. AG measurement is available after the start-up is completed.
WARNING
• When using the AG module, connect the gas outlet to the scavenging system or the patient
respiration circuit when in use with the Mindray A7 anesthesia machine.
• Make sure that the connections are tight. Any leak in the system can result in erroneous readings
due to ambient air mixing with patient gases.
• Always inspect the airway adapter for a tight connection and proper operation before attaching it to
the patient.
• Squeezing or bending the gas sample line during AG measurement may cause erroneous readings
or no readings.
CAUTION
• Position the airway adapter so that the part connecting to the gas sample line is pointing upwards.
This prevents condensed water from passing into the gas sample line and causing an occlusion.
17 - 3
• The watertrap collects water drops condensed in the sample line and therefore prevents them from
entering the module. To avoid blocking the airway, empty the watertrap container whenever half
full.
• The watertrap has a filter preventing bacterium, water and secretions from entering the module.
After long-term use, dust or other substances may compromise the performance of the filter or even
block the airway. In this case, replace the watertrap. Replacing the watertrap once a month is
recommended.
NOTE
• Do not apply adult watertrap to the neonatal patient. Otherwise, patient injury could result.
• To extend the lifetime of the watertrap and module, disconnect the watertrap from the module and
set the operating mode to Standby when AG monitoring is not required.
17.7 MAC Values

Minimum alveolar concentration (MAC) is the minimum concentration of the agent in the alveoli. It is a basic
index to indicate the depth of anesthesia. The standard ISO 80601-2-55 defines MAC as this: alveolar
concentration of an inhaled anesthetic agent that, in the absence of other anesthetic agents and at equilibrium,
prevents 50% of patients from moving in response to a standard surgical stimulus.
MAC values are listed below:
Agent Des Iso Enf Sev Hal N2O
1 MAC 6% 1.15% 1.7% 2.1% 0.77% 105%*
* indicates 1 MAC nitrous oxide can only be reached in hyperbaric chamber.
NOTE
• The MAC values shown in the table above are those published by the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration for a healthy 40-year-old adult male patient.
• In actual applications, the MAC value may be affected by age, weight and other factors.
The formula to calculate the MAC value is as follows:

N–1
EtAgent
MAC =  -------------------------------------
AgentVol age i
i=0
Where N is the number of all agents (including N2O) that the AG module can measure, EtAgenti is the
concentration of each agent, and AgentVolagei is the concentration of each agent at 1 MAC with age correction.
The formula for calculating age correction of 1 MAC is:
( – 0.00269 × ( age – 40 ) )
MAC age = MAC 40 × 10
For example, the Des concentration at 1 MAC of a 60-year old patient is.
( – 0.00269 × ( 60 – 40 ) )
6% × 10 = 6% × 0.88
The AG module measures 4% of Des, 0.5% of Hal and 50% of N2O in the patient’s end-tidal gas:
MAC = ----------------------- 0.5% - + -----------------------------
4.0% - + -------------------------------- 50% - = 2.04
6% × 0.88 0.77% × 0.88 105% × 0.88
NOTE
• The formula above is only suitable for patients who are older than one year. If the patient is less than
one year, the system uses one year old to do age correction.
17 - 4
17.8 Changing AG Settings
17.8.1 Changing AG Alarm Settings

To change the AG alarm settings, follow this procedure:
1. Select the AG numeric area or waveform area to enter the Gas dialog.
2. Select the desired gas tab.
Authentication.
17.8.2 Setting the O2 Compensation

If the AG module does not incorporate the O2 module, you need to set the amount of O2 in the ventilation gas
mixture. To set the O2 compensation, follow this procedure:
3. Set O2 Compensation:
◆ Select Off when the amount of O2 is less than 30%.
◆ Select the other options in accordance with the O2 concentration in the gas mixture.
If the AG module incorporates the O2 module, the system directly uses the O2 concentration detected by the O2
module to make compensation. In this case, O2 Compensation is fixed to Off.
17.8.3 Entering the Standby Mode

Set the AG module to one of the following modes according to the module status:
■ Select Measure mode when using the AG module for monitoring.
■ Select Standby mode when not using the AG module.
The default operating mode is Measure. If not using the AG module, follow this procedure to enter the Standby
mode:
4. Set Operating Mode to Standby.
17.8.4 Setting Auto Standby

The monitor enters the standby mode automatically after the configured period of time if no breath is detected
since the last detected breath. To set the auto standby, follow this procedure:
17.8.5 Setting the Gas Waveform

To set the gas waveform, follow this procedure:
17 - 5
4. Set the speed and scale of gas waveforms. For CO2, set Waveform Type.

To set the RR (respiration rate) source, follow this procedure:
4. Set RR Source.
When the current RR source does not have valid measurement, the system will automatically switch RR Source
to Auto.

When performing intubation during general anesthesia, enter the intubation mode to reduce unnecessary
alarms. To enter the intubation mode, follow this procedure:
2. Select Intubation Mode from the bottom of the dialog.
For the details of the intubation mode, see 7.13 Intubation Mode.
17.8.8 Enabling or Disabling MAC Display

Set whether MAC value is displayed in the AG numeric area by following this procedure:
2. Select the desired anesthetic agent tab.
3. Switch on or off MAC.
17.9 Changing the Anesthetic Agent

When the anesthetic agent used on the patient is changed, the AG module detects the mixed anesthetic gas
during the transition of two anesthetic agents. The time required for completing the replacement of anesthetic
agent depends on anesthesia type (low flow or high flow) and the characteristics of anesthetic agents
(pharmacokinetics). During the transition of two anesthetic agents, the monitor gives no prompt messages and
the MAC value displayed may be inaccurate.
The AG module can identify two anesthetic agents automatically. When the proportion of primary and
secondary anesthetic agents in the mixture changes, the AG module can distinguish between them according to
their contributions to the MAC value. Then primary and secondary anesthetic agents will be exchanged for
display.
17.10 Performing AG Leakage Test

The AG leakage test is required every time before the AG measurement. To perform the AG leakage test, follow
this procedure:
1. Plug the AG module into the module rack.
2. Wait for about one minute until the AG module warms up. Completely block the gas inlet of the AG
module. Then the alarm message “AG Airway Occluded” will appear on the screen.
3. Block the gas inlet for another one minute.
5. Select the Module tab → AG tab.
6. Check that the current flow rate is less than 10 ml/min, and the alarm message “AG Airway Occluded” does
not disappear.
17 - 6
This indicates that the module does not leak. If the alarm message disappears, or the flow rate is equal to
10ml/min or greater, it indicates that the module leaks. Perform the leakage test again. If the problem
remains, contact your service personnel for help.
17.11 Calibrating the AG Module

Calibrate the AG module every year or when the measured value is outside the specification. To calibrate the AG
module, contact the service personnel.
CAUTION
• Connect the gas outlet to the scavenging system when calibrating the AG module.
17.12 AG Troubleshooting
If the AG airway is occluded, the message AG Airway Occluded appears. In this case, check for the follows until
the message disappears:
1. Check the airway adapter for occlusion and replace if necessary.
2. Check the sample line for occlusion or kinking and replace if necessary.
3. Check the watertrap for water or occlusion. Empty the watertrap, or replace the watertrap if necessary.
4. Check the gas outlet and the exhaust tube for any occlusion.
If the message does not disappear, it is probably the module fault. Contact the service personnel in this case.
NOTE
17 - 7
18 Review
18.1 Review Overview

Trends are patient data collected over time and displayed in graphic, tabular, or other forms to give you a picture
of how the patient's condition is developing. You can review the trend data in the Review dialog, minitrends
screen, or OxyCRG screen. The Review dialog also enables access to review the events, 12-lead ECG analysis
results and waveforms, full disclosure waveforms, and so on.
18.2 Review Dialog

The Review dialog contains tabs to display trend data in tabular, graphic, or other forms.
18.2.1 Accessing the Review Dialog

Choose one of the following methods to enter the review dialog:
■ Select the Review quick key.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select the desired option.
18.2.2 Example Review Dialog

The review pages have a common structure. The graphic trends review page is taken as an example:
(1) (5)
(2)
(6)
(3) (7)
(4) (8)
(9)
(1) Event type indicator: different color blocks match different types of events:
■ Red: high priority alarm event
■ Yellow: medium priority alarm event
■ Cyan: low priority alarm event
■ Green: manual event
■ White: operation-related event
(2) Current screen time line: indicates the time length of the current screen.
(3) Waveform area: displays trend curves. The color of trend curves is consistent with the color of parameter labels.
18 - 1
(4) Time line: indicates the entire time length.
■ : indicates the time length of trend data. can be moved within this time length.
■ : indicates the time length of no trend data. cannot be moved within this time length.
■ Different color blocks along the time line indicate events of different types. See the color definition for the
event type indicator.
(5) Event area: displays the event of the cursor time. Selecting the event access the event list. If there is no event at
the cursor time, the cursor time is displayed.
(6) Cursor: this is adjusted by touching different locations. Adjusting this can adjust the Event area and Numeric
area.
(7) Numeric area: displays numeric values at the cursor indicated time. The background color of numeric values
matches the alarm priority.
(8) Slider: indicates the position of current screen time in the entire time length. Dragging this button left or right
enables you to locate the trend data at a specific time and also refreshes trend data in current screen
accordingly.
(9) Button area.
18.2.3 Symbols on Review Pages

The following table lists the symbols on review pages.
Symbol Description
Slider: indicates the position of current screen time in the entire time length. Dragging
the slider left or right enables you to locate the trend data at a specific time and also
refreshes data in current screen accordingly.
or Goes to the previous or next event.
Event list: displays events in a chronological order. The most recent event is displayed
at the top.The number of asterisk symbols before an event indicates alarm priority.
Record button: select it to output patient information and data through the recorder.
Print button: select it to output patient information and data through the printer.
+ Indicates that the followed parameter is from an external device connected to the
monitor via the BeneLink module.
18.2.4 Common Operations

This section describes common operations for all review pages.
18.2.4.1 Browsing Trend Data

Browse trend data in one of the following ways:
■ Move the cursor.
■ Move the slider .
■ Slide your finger on the screen.
18.2.4.2 Viewing Events

You can view the following types of events:
■ Manually triggered events
■ Parameter-related operation events and alarm-related events, such as starting C.O. measurement
■ Operation events not related to parameters, such as system time change
View events in either of the following ways:
■ Select and select the desired event.
■ Select or to jump to the previous event or next event.
18 - 2
Events are displayed in a chronological order. The most recent event is displayed at the top. The number of
asterisk symbols before an event indicates alarm priority as follows:
■ ***: high priority alarm
■ **: medium priority alarm
■ *: low priority alarm
18.2.5 Tabular Trends Review Page

The tabular trends review page displays trend data in a tabular form.
18.2.5.1 Entering the Tabular Trends Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the tabular trends review page:
■ Select the Review quick key → select the Tabular Trends tab.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select Tabular Trends.
18.2.5.2 Changing the Tabular Trend Group

To change the tabular trend group, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the tabular trends review page.
2. Set Trend Group.
18.2.5.3 Editing the Tabular Trend Group

The setting of the Trend Group defines the contents of displayed printed trends. It is possible to edit any trend
group except for the All and Standard trend groups. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the tabular trends review page:
2. Select Group Setup → select the desired tab.
◆ Rename the trend group (optional): select the symbol at the upper left corner and input the
desired name.
◆ Add parameters: select desired parameters from the Choices column, and then select Add. Selecting
Add All adds all parameters (up to the maximum of 83).
◆ Delete parameters: select desired parameters from the Selected column, and then select Delete.
Selecting Delete All deletes all parameters except for HR.
◆ Move the position of parameters displayed on the trend page: select desired parameters from the
Selected column, and then select Move up, Move Down, Move to Top, or Move to Bottom.
◆ Display two parameters side by side: select two parameters from the Selected column, and then
select Overlap. Then, the symbol appears at the right of the overlapped parameters. The
overlapped parameters will be displayed side by side in one numerics area and waveform area.
◆ Unoverlap two parameters: select the overlapped parameters from the Selected column, and then
select Unoverlap.
Selecting Default will restore the trend group settings to factory defaults.
NOTE
• Trend groups labeled All or Standard cannot be edited.
• The HR parameter and waveform are always displayed in the first row on the trend page. It cannot be
deleted or moved.
18.2.5.4 Changing the Resolution of Tabular Trend Data

The interval of tabular trends defines the interval of displaying trend data. A short interval is especially suited for
neonatal applications, where the clinical situation may change very quickly. In adult monitoring, where the
patient's status typically changes more gradually, a longer interval may be more informative.
To change the interval of trend data, follow this procedure:
18 - 3
2. Select Interval.
◆ 5 sec or 30 sec: select to view up to 4 hours of tabular trends at an interval of 5 seconds or 30 seconds.
◆ 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hrs, or 3 hrs: select to view up to 120 hours of tabular
trends at selected interval.
◆ Select parameters, such as NIBP, or C.O., to view the tabular trends when these parameter
measurements are acquired.
NOTE
• Changing between intervals does not typically change the position of the slider or cursor except to
round it to the nearest interval, however changing intervals to be 30 seconds or less will move any
cursor position more than 4 hours ago to the oldest data less than 4 hours ago.
18.2.5.5 Printing a Tabular Trends Report

To print a tabular trends report, follow this procedure:
2. Select to enter the Print Setup dialog.
3. Set the tabular trends report as described in 22.6.4 Configuring Graphic Trends Reports.
4. Select Print or Print (All).
◆ Print: the trend data before the above set Time, for the above set Period, and at the above set
Interval will be printed.
◆ Print (All): all the stored trend data will be printed at the review interval..
18.2.5.6 Recording Tabular Trends

To print tabular trends with the recorder, follow this procedure:
2. Select to enter the Record Setup dialog.
3. Respectively set Start Time and End Time of the tabular trends data.
4. Select Record or Record (All).
◆ Record: the trend data between the Start Time and End Time will be recorded.
◆ Record (All): all the stored trend data at the review interval will be recorded.
18.2.6 Graphics Trends Review Page

The graphic trends review page displays trend data in a visual format.
18.2.6.1 Entering the Graphic Trends Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the graphic trends review page:
■ Select the Review quick key → select the Graphic Trends tab.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select Graphic Trends.
18.2.6.2 Changing the Graphic Trend Group

To change the graphic trend group, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the graphic trends review page.
2. Set Trend Group.
18 - 4
18.2.6.3 Editing the Graphic Trend Group
2. Select Group Setup.
For more information, see 18.2.5.3 Editing the Tabular Trend Group for detail on how to edit the group.
18.2.6.4 Changing the Resolution of Trend Data

To change the length of trend data displayed on the current screen, follow this procedure:
2. Select Zoom.
◆ 8 min: the screen displays eight minutes of trend data. You can view the most recent one hour of
data.
◆ 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hrs, 4 hrs: the screen displays 30 minutes, one hour, two hours, or four hours of trend
data. You can view the most recent four hours of data.
◆ 8 hrs, 12 hrs, 24 hrs, 48 hrs: the screen displays 8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, or 48 hours of trend data.
You can view the most recent 120 hours of data.
18.2.6.5 Changing the Number of Waveforms

To change the number of waveforms displayed on the trend review page, follow this procedure:
2. Select Trends.
18.2.6.6 Printing a Graphic Trends Report

To print a graphic trends report, follow this procedure:
3. Set the graphic trends report as described in 22.6.4 Configuring Graphic Trends Reports.
4. Select Print to print the graphic trend data before the above set Time and for the above set Period.
18.2.7 Events Review Page

The monitor stores events in real time, including technical alarm events, physiological alarm events, manual
events, and operational events. When an event occurs, all the measurement numerics and three event-related
waveforms 16 seconds before and after the event are stored.
NOTE
• Alarms are saved as events and will be maintained if the equipment is powered down. The time of
equipment power down is not recorded as an event and cannot be reviewed.
• Earlier events will be overwritten by later ones if the storage capacity is reached.
• A total loss of power does not affect the events already stored.
18.2.7.1 Entering the Events Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the events review page:
■ Select the Review quick key → select the Events tab.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select Events.
The Event page displays the event list. Events are displayed in descending chronological order, with the most
recent displayed at the top. The number of asterisk symbols before an event indicate alarm priority as described
in 7.3.3 Alarm Indicators.
Different color blocks are displayed on the left of each event to indicate different event types.
18 - 5
■ Red: high priority alarm event
■ Yellow: medium priority alarm event
■ Cyan: low priority alarm event
■ Green: manual event
■ White: operation-related event, such as accepting a C.O. average.
The number of currently selected events and the total number of events are displayed at the top right corner of
the event list. For example, 2/4 indicates that the selected event is the second event in the filtered events and the
total number of filtered events is 4. Total indicates the total number of events. For example: Total: 28 means that
there are a total of 28 events.
18.2.7.2 Configuring the Filter

You can filter events by time, alarm priority, alarm category, or parameter group. To configure the filter, follow
this procedure:
1. Enter the Events page.
Select Filter Setup and set the desired filter criterion. Closing the Filter Setup dialog will automatically turn on
the Filter, as can be seen in the Event's tab. Events allowed by the filter will be displayed in the event list.
18.2.7.3 Editing Events

To edit events, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Events page and tick off the desired events.
2. Select to edit the selected events.
◆ Lock: manually lock the event. Locked events cannot be deleted.
◆ Note: enter comments for the event.
◆ Rename: allow renaming an event name. Only manual events and arrhythmia events can be renamed
if enabled by the hospital’s settings.
18.2.7.4 Viewing Event Details

To view waveforms and parameter values at the event time, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Events page.
2. Select Detail.
To display beat labels on the first ECG waveform, switch on Beat Anno. The white beat labels indicate heart
beats classification and may explain suspected, missed, or false arrhythmia calls. Heart beats are classified as
follows:
■ N = Normal
■ V = Ventricular ectopic
■ S = Supraventricular premature
■ P = Paced
■ L = Learning
■ ? = Insufficient information to classify beat
■ I = Inoperative (for example, Lead Off )
■ M = Missed beat
If you switch on Beat Anno on the Events page, beat labels will also be displayed on the Full Disclosure page,
and vise versa. Beat labels can be printed out.
18.2.7.5 Printing Event Reports

To print event reports via a printer, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the events review page.
18 - 6
3. Select the desired options.
◆ Print All Event List: print the entire event list.
◆ Print List of Selected Events: print the list of selected events.
◆ Print Detail of Selected Events: print the details of selected events.
◆ Print Displayed Event Detail: print the waveforms and parameters of the currently displayed event.
4. Select Print.
18.2.7.6 Recording Event Details

To print events details via a recorder, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the events review page.
2. Select the Detail button.
3. Select to print the details of the event.
18.2.8 Full Disclosure Review Page

You can review up to 48-hours of waveform data on the full disclosure review page. You can view both the
compressed waveforms, full waveforms and numeric values.
18.2.8.1 Entering the Full Disclosure Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the full disclosure review page:
■ Select the Review quick key → select the Full Disclosure tab.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select Full Disclosure.
18.2.8.2 Selecting Waveforms

You can select the waveforms to be displayed and stored. Up to 48 hours of waveforms for all parameters can be
stored. When closing the Select Waveform dialog, a prompt will inform you of the duration of waveforms that
can be saved if the amount is less than 48 hours. To save and display the desired waveforms, follow this
procedure:
1. Enter the full disclosure review page.
2. Select Setup to enter the Select Waveform page.
3. Select the Storage tab and set the desired waveforms to be stored in the monitor. Select the Display
(Maximum: 3) tab and set the desired waveforms to be displayed on the Full Disclosure page.
NOTE
• Storing more waveforms may shorten the storage time to less than 48 hours. Please adjust the
waveforms stored with this consideration.
In case of alarms, the background of the compressed waveform is highlighted with a colored block during the
alarm time:
■ Red: high alarm priority
■ Yellow: medium alarm priority
■ Cyan: low alarm priority
18.2.8.3 Setting Scale and Duration

To set the length and size of displayed compressed waveforms, follow this procedure:
2. Set the waveforms scale in either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Scale button. If you do not see Scale, then select the button to show it.
◆ Select waveform label.
18 - 7
3. Select Duration to set the length of displayed waveforms.
4. Select the parameter label beside the waveforms to set scale for each parameter.
18.2.8.4 Viewing Details of Compressed Waveforms

To view the full waveforms and numeric values, follow this procedure:
2. Select Detail.
You can perform the following operations on the this page:
■ Switch on Beat Anno. For more information, see 18.2.7.4 Viewing Event Details.
■ Select Speed, ECG Gain, or Save As Event. If you do not see an option, then select the button to
show it.
■ Select Overview to switch to the compressed waveform view.
18.2.8.5 Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform Report

To print a compressed waveform report, follow this procedure:
3. Select waveform type you want to print:

◆ Print Waveform Overview: compressed waveform of selected period will be printed. This option is
only available when printing from the Overview or compressed waveform view.
◆ Print Displayed Waveform Detail: parameter values and all stored waveforms around the cursor
time will be printed. This option is only available when printing from the Detail view.
4. Select Print.
18.2.8.6 Recording the Details of the Compressed Waveform

To record a Full Disclosure Detail Record Report, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the Full Disclosure page.
2. Select Detail.
3. Select .
18.2.9 Arrhy Statistics Review Page

The Arrhy Statistics review page shows arrhythmia events happened over the lastest 24 hours. This page is only
available with the ECG 24h Summary option.
To enter the Arrhy Statistics review page, choose one of the following methods:
■ Select the Review quick key → select the Arrhy Statistics tab.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select Arrhy Statistics.
Selecting each type of arrhythmia statistics bar shows compressed waveforms, the time and duration of each
arrhythmia event. Selecting the compression waveform shows the event details.
18.2.10 OxyCRG Review Page

You can review up to 48 hours of trend curves on the OxyCRG review page. The OxyCRG review functionality is
available for neonatal monitoring only.
NOTE
• OxyCRG Review Page is available only when Patient Category is set to Neo.
18 - 8
18.2.10.1 Entering the OxyCRG Review Page
Choose one of the following methods to enter the OxyCRG review page:
■ From the OxyCRG screen, select the ABD events list area.
■ Select the Review quick key → select the OxyCRG tab.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select OxyCRG.
18.2.10.2 The Display of the OxyCRG Review Page

The following figure shows the OxyCRG screen:
(1)
(2) (2)
(4)
(3)
(1) Event title area: displays information of the selected event, such as the event type and time.
(2) Event detail area: displays parameter trends, compressed waveform, and parameter values of
selected event.
(3) Event summary area: displays ABD events within the Zoom period. The selected event is enclosed in
a white frame.
(4) Event statistics area: displays the total number of ABD events and the numbers of each event within
the Zoom period.
18.2.10.3 Changing the Resolution of Trend Curves

To set the resolution of trend curves, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the OxyCRG review page.
2. Set Zoom.
NOTE
• If the Zoom is set for a large duration (for example, 8 hrs), the screen may show "No Patient Data" for
the first several minutes of data collection (for example, 6 minutes), but data will be shown after
enough data has been collected.
18.2.10.4 Printing an OxyCRG Review Report

To print an OxyCRG review report, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the OxyCRG review page.
3. Select Print. The report duration corresponds to the duration of data shown on the screen.
18 - 9
18.2.11 12-Lead ECG Review Page
When 12-lead ECG analysis is performed, you can review the most recent 20 events of 12-lead analysis. For more
information, see 9 Resting 12-Lead ECG Analysis.
18.2.11.1 Entering the 12-Lead Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the 12-lead ECG review page:
■ Upon completion of 12-lead ECG analysis, select Review from the 12-Lead Interpretation page. For more
information, see 9 Resting 12-Lead ECG Analysis.
■ Select the Review quick key → select 12-Lead ECG.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select 12-Lead ECG.
18.2.11.2 Switching to Median Complex (for Glasgow Algorithm Only)

The median complex template displays 12-lead ECG waveforms on one page in 4 columns, with 3 lines in each
column, and one rhythm lead waveform at the bottom. Additionally, a short vertical bar appears above each
waveform, marking the start and end position of the P-wave and the QRS-wave and the end position of T-wave.
To view Median Complex, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the 12-lead review page.
2. Select Median Complex.
Selecting Waveform can return to the 12-lead ECG waveform page.
18.2.11.3 Setting 12-Lead ECG Waveforms

To set the 12-lead ECG waveforms on the review page, follow this procedure:
2. Set Speed, Gain, and Layout.
18.2.11.4 Printing the 12-Lead ECG Report

To print the 12-Lead ECG report, follow this procedure:
2. Select .
3. Configure the 12-lead ECG report.

4. Select Print.
18.2.11.5 Recording the 12-Lead ECG Report

To print the 12-Lead ECG report via the recorder, follow this procedure:
2. Select .
18.2.12 ST Review Page

When ST analysis is enabled, the monitor saves ST segments and values at an interval of one minute. You can
review the latest 120 hours of ST data.
18.2.12.1 Entering the ST Review Page

Choose either of the following methods to enter the ST review page:
■ Select the Review quick key → select the ST tab.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Review column select ST.
18 - 10
18.2.12.2 Setting the ST Reference
You can set the currently displayed ST as reference. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the ST review page.
2. Select Set Reference.
NOTE
• The ST baseline is used as ST reference by default.
18.2.12.3 Displaying/Hiding the ST Reference

To display or hide ST reference, follow this procedure:
2. Select Display Reference or Hide Reference.
18.2.12.4 Displaying/Hiding Markers

To display or hide markers, follow this procedure:
2. Select Display Marker or Hide Marker.
18.2.12.5 Printing ST Data

To print ST data, follow this procedure:
2. Select .
18.3 Reviewing Discharged Patients

For discharged patients, you can review the trend data in the review page. You can also review the events and
12-lead ECG analysis results.
18.3.1 Checking the Data of a Discharged Patient

Patients.
2. From the patient list select the desired patient.
3. Select Detail.
18.3.2 Checking the Information of a Discharged Patient

1. Access the data of the discharged patient as described in 18.3.1 Checking the Data of a Discharged Patient.
2. Select the icon to enter the Patient Management dialog box.
3. Select OK to exit the Patient Management dialog box.
18 - 11
19 Clinical Assistive Applications (CAA)
The Clinical Assistive Applications (CAA) function integrates some commonly used clinical guidelines and tools
into the monitor. It puts the currently monitoring parameter measurements together and provides
comprehensive analysis results.
CAA can improve the clinician’s working efficiency. However, it is not directly used for diagnosis and cannot not
replace the clinician’s judgement.
19.1 Early Warning Score (EWS)

The Early Warning Scores (EWS) can help you recognize the early sign of deterioration in patients based on vital
signs and clinical observations. Depending on the score calculated, appropriate recommendations are
displayed.
The monitor supports the following scores:
■ MEWS (Modified Early Warning Score)
■ NEWS (National Early Warning Score)
■ NEWS2 (National Early Warning Score 2)
■ Custom Score
A subscore is given for each parameter based on the measured or entered value. When all the required
parameters are entered or measured, the subscores are added together to calculate the total early warning
score. Each subscore has a color coding to indicate associated level of risk, When the total score is outside of the
thresholds, actions are recommended. MEWS, NEWS and NEWS2 can give total scores.
Custom Score is based on user-defined parameters.
MEWS, NEWS and NEWS2 are intended for adult patients only. The patient category applied to the Custom Score
is defined by Mindray Clinical Score Configuration Tool. For more information, see Mindray Clinical Scoring Config
Tool Instruction for Use (P/N: 046-012986-00).
WARNING
• The EWS scores and recommended actions are for reference only and cannot be directly used for
diagnostic interpretation.
• EWS cannot be used as an prognosis index. It is not a clinical judgement tool. Clinicians must use
their clinical judgement in conjunction with the EWS tool at all times.
• MEWS and NEWS are intended for adult patients only. NEWS is not applicable to pregnant woman
and COPD (Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease) patients.
NOTE
• The EWS scores does not trigger any alarms and cannot used for continuous monitoring.
19 - 1
19.1.1 Displaying the EWS Numerics Area
To display the EWS numerics area, follow this procedure:
2. Select the parameter area where you want to display the EWS score, and then from the popup list select
EWS.
(8) (7)
(1) (6)
(2)
(3)
(4) (5)
(1) EWS protocol label
(2) Total score. The color of the circle indicates the level of risk. For IPS, no score is displayed. Only level
of risk is shown: white means normal and red indicates alert.
(3) Single parameter whose score reaches 3
(4) Latest history total score
(5) Risk level indicator. The level of risk increases from top down. The current level is enclosed by a
white square frame. For IPS, this indicator does not display.
(6) Scoring interval
(7) The current scoring time
(8) Scoring countdown: time to the next scoring.
19.1.2 Accessing the EWS Screen

Access the EWS window in any of the following ways:
■ Select the EWS parameter area
■ Select the EWS quick key.
■ Select the Screen Setup quick key → select the Choose Screen tab → select EWS.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the CAA column select EWS.
Take NEWS2 as an example, the EWS screen is shown as follows. Your screen may be slightly different due to the
configuration.
19 - 2
(10) (9) (8) (7)
(1) (6)
(2) (5)
(3)
(4)
(1) Total score. The color of the circle indicates the level of risk.
(2) Risk level indicator. The level of risk increases from top down. The current level is enclosed by a white frame.
(3) Parameter area: display the subscore and parameter value of each parameter. The keyboard symbol indicates that
the parameter value is manually entered.
(4) History total scores
(5) Operator ID (displays only when the operator ID is selected)
(6) Selecting this button to see the clinical response to the current score
(8) EWS protocol label
(9) Scoring countdown: time to the next scoring.
(10) The scoring time
19.1.3 Performing EWS Scoring

To perform scoring, follow this procedure:
1. Select Reset to clear the previous score and update values of currently monitored parameters and relevant
subscores.
2. For NEWS2, set the SpO2 Scale.
◆ Scale 1: for patient without hypercapnic respiratory failure.
◆ Scale 2: for patients with a prescribed oxygen saturation requirement of 88–92% (for example, in
patients with hypercapnic respiratory failure).
3. Measure or manually enter other required parameters and observations.
4. If enabled, select the operator ID .
5. Select Calculate to get the total score.
6. If Score Confirmation is enabled, select Confirm to save current scoring, or select Cancel to give up
current scoring. Refer to section 19.1.4.2 Setting the Scoring Confirmation Switch for more information.
19 - 3
CAUTION
• The decision to use Scale 2 of the SpO2 Scale should be made by a competent clinical decision maker
and should be recorded in the patient’s clinical notes.
NOTE
• Before calculating the score, select Reset to clear the previous score.
• The keyboard symbol at the right of the parameter value indicates that the value is manually
entered.
• You can get the score only when all required parameters have been measured or entered.
19.1.4 Changing EWS Settings
19.1.4.1 Changing the Scoring Protocol

The monitor is configured with a default scoring protocol. To change the scoring protocol, follow this procedure:
1. From the EWS page select Setup.
2. Set Score.
19.1.4.2 Setting the Scoring Confirmation Switch

To select if confirmation is required before saving score, follow this procedure:
2. Set Scoring Confirmation switch.
◆ Off: the monitor automatically saves the scoring result after the scoring is completed.
◆ On: you need to confirm that whether the scoring result is saved or not after the scoring is completed.
19.1.4.3 Setting the Manual Data Timeout

The manually input parameter data become invalid after a preset time. To set the timeout period for the input
data, follow this procedure:
1. From the EWS screen select Setup.
2. From the Manual Data Timeout area, select a desired parameter and set its timeout period.
NOTE
• If the data is expired and not updated, the monitor displays the corresponding parameter score in
outline font, and gives a timeout alarm.
19.1.4.4 Setting Auto Scoring

The monitor automatically starts scoring at the preset interval. To set auto scoring, follow this procedure:
2. Set Auto Scoring:
◆ Interval: the monitor automatically starts scoring at the preset interval.
◆ NIBP: the monitor automatically starts scoring at the completion of each NIBP measurement.
◆ Alarm: the monitor automatically starts scoring when an alarm occurs to the parameter for scoring.
◆ If no option is selected, the monitor does not initiate auto scoring.
19 - 4
19.1.4.5 Setting Auto Scoring Interval
2. Set Interval:
◆ By Score: the monitor automatically starts scoring as per the interval selected for corresponding total
score.
◆ 5 min - 24 h: If Auto Scoring is set to Interval, the monitor automatically starts scoring as per the
selected interval. If Auto Scoring is not set to Interval, the countdown timer of manual scoring is
selected.
19.1.4.6 Managing Operator ID

To manage the Operator ID, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Manage Operator ID button at the bottom left corner to add or delete the operator IDs.
NOTE
• Manage Operator ID button is available when it is enabled in the Maintenance menu. For more
information, see section 25.4.1.1 Displaying and Managing the Operator ID.
19.2 Glasgow Coma Scale (GCS)

The Glasgow Coma Scale (GCS) function is based on Teasdale’s Assessment of Coma and Impaired Consciousness-A
Practical Scale (Lancet, 1974). Three aspects of behavior are independently measured: eye opening, verbal
response, and motor response. The scores are added together to indicate that patient’s level of consciousness.
GCS is intended for adults and pediatric patients.
CAUTION
• GCS is for reference only. Consult other clinical observations for diagnosis.
• Please refer to hospital policy regarding acceptable use of GCS.
19.2.1 Displaying the GCS Parameter Area

To display the GCS parameter area, follow this procedure:
2. Select the parameter area where you want to display the GCS score, and then from the popup list select
GCS.
The following figure shows the GCS parameter area. The display may be configured to look slightly different.
(4)
(1) (5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
19 - 5
(1) GCS label
(2) Total score and level of consciousness. The color of the circle indicates the level of risk.
(3) Scoring time
(4) Scoring countdown: time to the next scoring
(6) Subscores
◆ E: eye opening
◆ V: verbal response
◆ M: motor response
19.2.2 Accessing the GCS Dialog

Enter the GCS dialog in any of the following ways:
■ Select the GCS parameter area
■ Select the GCS quick key.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the CAA column select GCS.
(1)
(2)
(1) Subscore (2) Total score
19.2.3 Performing GCS Scoring

To perform scoring, follow this procedure:
1. From the Eye Opening area, Verbal Response area, and Motor Response area, respectively select an item
that represents the patient’s status.
2. Select OK to accept the total score.
The following table lists the default score range and color of relevant consciousness level.
Level Range Color
Mild damage 13-15 White
Moderate damage 9 - 12 Yellow
Severe damage 3-8 Red
19 - 6
NOTE
• The GCS score range is adjustable. Refer to 25.4.2 Setting GCS Threshold for Each Consciousness Level
for the method of changing the high limit and low limit of each consciousness level.
19.2.4 Setting GCS Scoring Interval

From the GCS dialog, select Interval to set GCS scoring interval. When the scoring interval is reached and you do
not perform another scoring, the score will be invalidated and displayed as outline fonts.
19.2.5 Reviewing GCS Trend Data

From the GCS dialog, select Review to enter the Review dialog and view the GCS trend data from the Tabular
Trends.
19.3 ECG 24h Summary (Optional)

The ECG 24h Summary provides ECG statistics of the current patient over the latest 24 hours. You can view the
following information through the ECG 24h Summary:
■ Heart rate statistics
■ Arrhythmia event statistics
■ QT/QTc measurement statistics
■ Maximum and minimum ST statistics of each lead
■ Pacer statistics
■ Typical ECG strips
NOTE
• The ECG 24h Summary is intended for the current patient. It is not intended for discharged patients.
• Pacer statistics is intended for paced patients.
• Patient data is saved, collected and displayed together in the ECG 24h Summary. Data displayed in
the ECG 24h Summary is not recalculated.
• A license is required for the ECG 24h Summary function.
19.3.1 Viewing the ECG 24h Summary

To view the ECG 24h Summary, choose either of the following ways:
■ Select the ECG 24h Sum quick key.
■ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the CAA column select ECG 24h Summary.
19.3.2 Selecting Typical ECG Strips

The Typical Strips area displays ECG strips of the following situations:
■ Maximum heart rate
■ Minimum heart rate
■ Four arrhythmia events
You can select a typical ECG strip of each situation. For example, to select the typical ECG strip of asystole, follow
this procedure:
1. Select the currently displayed asystole strip.
2. From the popup strips, select the desired strip as the typical strip of asystole.
19 - 7
19.3.3 Reviewing ECG Summary
From the ECG 24h Summary dialog, you can review corresponding trends and events.
■ Select the Heart Rate area to review HR graphic trends.
■ Select the Max ST/Min ST area to review the current ST reference and ST graphic trends.
■ Select the Pace area to review historic pace events.
■ Select the QT area to review QT/QTc graphic trends.
■ Select the Arrhythmia area to review arrhythmia statistics. For more information, refer to 18.2.9 Arrhy
Statistics Review Page.
■ Select Full Disclosure to review ECG full disclosure waveforms. For more information, refer to 18.2.8 Full
Disclosure Review Page.
19 - 8
20 Calculation
20.1 Calculation Overview

The monitor provides calculation functions. The calculated values, which are not directly measured, are
computed based on the values you provide. The calculation function is independent of other monitoring
functions and can therefore be used for patients being monitored by other monitors. Any operation in a
calculation dialog does not affect the patient monitored by the current monitor.
You can perform the following calculations:
■ Drug calculations
■ Hemodynamic calculations
■ Oxygenation calculations
■ Ventilation calculations
■ Renal calculations
20.2 Calculation Safety Information
WARNING
• Decisions on the choice and dosage of drugs administered to patients must always be made by the
physician in charge. The drug calculations are based on the values input; it does not check the
plausibility of the calculation performed.
• Check that the entered values are correct and the calculated values are appropriate. Mindray
assumes no responsibility for any consequences caused by wrong entries and improper operations.
20.3 Drug Calculations
20.3.1 Performing Drug Calculations

To perform drug calculations, follow this procedure:
1. Access the drug calculator by either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Calculations quick key → select the Drug tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Calculations column select Drug.
2. Set Drug Name and Patient Category. If the dose of drug is weight dependent, you must input the
patient’s weight. The dose calculation program has a library of commonly used drugs, while Drug A
through Drug E are user defined.
3. Enter the known values, for example Drug Amount and Solution Volume.
4. Select Calculate. The calculated values are indicated by red arrows.
NOTE
• If available, the patient category and weight from the Patient Demographics dialog are
automatically entered when you first access drug calculation. You can change the patient category
and weight. This will not change the patient category and weight stored in the patient demographic
information.
20 - 1
20.3.2 Checking the Titration Table
The titration table shows information on the currently used drugs. Use the titration table to see what dose of a
drug your patient will receive at different infusion rates. To access the titration table, follow this procedure:
1. Access drug calculator by either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Calculations quick key.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Calculations column select Drug.
2. Select the Titration Table tab.
3. Select Dose Type to set the type of dose unit in the titration table.
4. Select Interval to set the interval between two adjacent titration table items.
You can select how to display the titration table:
■ Dose: the titration table is listed in the sequence of increased drug dose.
■ Infusion Rate: the titration table is listed in the sequence of increased infusion rate. By default the
resolution of the infusion rate is one (1). By selecting Exact Rate the resolution of the infusion rate can
reach 0.01 so that you can display the infusion rate more accurately.
20.3.3 Drug Calculation Formula
Description Unit Formula
Dose Dose/hr Dose = Infusion Rate × Concentration

Dose/min
Dose (weight based) Dose/kg/hr Dose (weight based) = Infusion Rate × Concentration/
Dose/kg/min Weight
Drug Amount g series: mcg, mg, g Drug Amount =Dose × Duration

unit series: Unit, KU, MU
mEq series: mEq
Drug Amount (weight based) g series: mcg, mg, g Drug Amount (weight based) = Dose × Duration ×
unit series: Unit, KU, MU Weight
mEq series: mEq
Duration hr Duration = Amount/Dose
Duration (weight based) hr Duration (weight based) = Amount/(Dose × Weight)
Concentration mcg/ml, mg/ml, g/ml, Unit/ml, Concentration = Drug Amount/Solution Volume

KU/ml, MU/ml, mEq/ml
Solution volume ml Volume = Infusion Rate × Duration
Infusion rate ml/hr Infusion Rate = Dose/Concentration
Infusion rate (weight based) g•ml/hr Infusion Rate = Dose × Weigh/Concentration
20.3.4 Titration Table Calculation Formula
Description Unit Formula
Infusion Rate ml/hr Infusion Rate = Dose/Concentration
Infusion Rate (weight based) ml/hr Infusion Rate = Weight × Dose/Concentration
Dose Dose/hr Dose = Infusion Rate × Concentration

Dose/min
Dose (weight based) Dose/kg/hr Dose (weight based) = INF Rate × Concentration/
Dose/kg/min Weight
20 - 2
20.4 Hemodynamic Calculations
The monitor provides the hemodynamic calculation function and can save the results of up to 10 calculations,
which are displayed in groups.
20.4.1 Performing Hemodynamic Calculations

To perform hemodynamic calculation, follow this procedure:
1. Access hemodynamic calculation by either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Calculations quick key → Hemodynamics tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Calculations column select Hemodynamics.
2. Enter the known values. For a patient who is being monitored, the currently measured values are
automatically entered.
3. Select Calculate.
A calculated value greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up arrow “↑”. A calculated value
lower than the normal lower limit is indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
You can select Range to show the normal range of each parameter.
20.4.2 Input Parameters for Hemodynamic Calculations
Input Parameter Label Unit
cardiac output C.O. L/min
heart rate HR bpm
pulmonary artery wedge pressure PAWP mmHg
artery mean pressure PMAP mmHg
pulmonary artery mean pressure PA Mean mmHg
central venous pressure CVP mmHg
end-diastolic volume EDV ml
height Height cm
weight Weight kg
NOTE
• If you enable Use PA-D as PAWP, PA-D value will be used to replace PAWP value for hemodynamic
calculation. For more information, refer to 14.6.8 Setting the Use PA-D as PAWP Switch.
20.4.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas for Hemodynamic Calculations
Calculated Parameters Label Unit Formula
cardiac index C.I. L/min/m2 C.I. (L/min/m2) = C.O. (L/min)/BSA (m2)
body surface area BSA m2 BSA (m2) = Wt0.425 (kg) × Ht 0.725 (cm) × 0.007184
stroke volume SV ml SV (ml) = 1000× C.O. (L/min)/HR (bpm)
stroke index SVI ml/m2 SVI (ml/m2) = SV (ml)/BSA (m2)
systemic vascular SVR DS/cm5 SVR (DS/cm5) = 79.96 × [APMAP (mmHg) - CVP
resistance (mmHg)]/C.O. (L/min)
systemic vascular SVRI DS•m2/cm5 SVRI (DS•m2/cm5) = SVR (DS/cm5) × BSA (m2)
resistance index
20 - 3
pulmonary vascular PVR DS/cm5 P VR (DS/cm5) = 79.96 × [PAMAP (mmHg) - PAWP

resistance (mmHg)]/C.O. (L/min)
pulmonary vascular PVRI DS•m2/cm5 PVRI (DS•m2/cm5) = PVR (DS/cm5)× BSA (m2)
resistance index
left cardiac work LCW kg•m LCW (kg•m) = 0.0136 × APMAP (mmHg) × C.O. (L/
min)
left cardiac work index LCWI kg•m/m2 LCWI (kg•m/m2) = LCW (kg•m)/BSA (m2)
left ventricular stroke LVSW g•m LVSW (g•m) = 0.0136 × APMAP (mmHg) × SV (ml)
work
left ventricular stroke LVSWI g•m/m2 LVSWI (g•m/m2) = LVSW (g.m)/BSA (m2)
work index
right cardiac work RCW kg•m R CW (kg•m) = 0.0136 × PAMAP (mmHg) × C.O. (L/
min)
right cardiac work index RCWI kg•m/m2 R CWI (kg•m/m2) = RCW (kg.m)/BSA (m2)
right ventricular stroke RVSW g•m R VSW (g•m) = 0.0136 × PAMAP (mmHg) × SV (ml)
work
right ventricular stroke RVSWI g•m/m2 R VSWI (g•m/m2) = RVSW (g•m)/BSA (m2)
work index
ejection fraction EF % EF (%) = 100 × SV (ml)/EDV (ml)
End-diastolic volume EDVI ml/m2 EDVI (ml/m2) = EDV (ml)/BSA (m2)

index
End-systolic Volume ESV ml ESV (ml) = EDV (ml) –SV (ml)
End-systolic Volume index ESVI ml/m2 ESVI (ml/m2) = ESV (ml)/BSA (m2)
20.5 Oxygenation Calculations

The monitor provides the oxygenation calculation function and can save the results of up to 10 calculations,
which are displayed in groups.
20.5.1 Performing Oxygenation Calculations

To perform oxygenation calculations, follow this procedure:
1. Access oxygenation calculation by either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Calculations quick key → Oxygenation tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Calculations column select Oxygenation.
automatically entered.
A calculated value greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up arrow “↑”. A calculated value
lower than the normal lower limit is indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
In the Oxygenation page, you can also perform the following operations:
■ Select Oxycont Unit, Hb Unit, and Pressure Unit. Then corresponding parameter values will be
automatically converted and updated accordingly.
■ Select Range to show the normal range of each parameter.
20 - 4
20.5.2 Input Parameters for Oxygenation Calculations
cardiac output C.O. L/min
percentage fraction of inspired oxygen FiO2 %
partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries PaO2 mmHg, kPa
partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries PaCO2 mmHg, kPa
arterial oxygen saturation SaO2 %
partial pressure of oxygen in venous blood PvO2 mmHg, kPa
venous oxygen saturation SvO2 %
hemoglobin Hb g/L, g/dl, mmol/L
respiratory quotient RQ None
atmospheric pressure ATMP mmHg, kPa
height Height cm, inch
weight Weight kg, lb
20.5.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas for Oxygenation Calculations
body surface area BSA m2 BSA (m2) = Wt0.425 (kg) × Ht 0.725 (cm) × 0.007184
oxygen consumption VO2 ml/min VO2 (ml/min) = C(a-v)O2 (ml/L)× C.O. (L/min))
arterial oxygen content CaO2 ml/L, ml/dL CaO2 (ml/L) = 10× (0.0134 × Hb (g/dl) × SaO2 (%))
+0.031× PaO2 (mmHg)
venous oxygen content CvO2 ml/L, ml/dL CvO2 (ml/L) = 10× (0.0134 × Hb (g/dl) × SvO2 (%))
+0.031 × PvO2 (mmHg)
arteriovenous oxygen C(a-v)O2 ml/L, ml/dl C(a-v)O2 (ml/L) = CaO2 (ml/L) - CvO2 (ml/L)
content difference
oxygen extraction ratio O2ER % O2ER (%) = 100×C(a-v)O2 (ml/L)/CaO2 (ml/L)
oxygen transport DO2 ml/min DO2(ml/min) = C.O. (L/min) × CaO2(ml/L)
partial pressure of oxygen PAO2 mmHg, kPa PAO2 (mmHg) = [ATMP (mmHg) - 47 mmHg] ×
in the alveoli FiO2 (%)/100 - PaCO2 (mmHg) × [FiO2 (%)/100 +
(1 - FiO2 (%)/100)/RQ]
alveolar-arterial oxygen AaDO2 mmHg, kPa AaDO2 (mmHg) = PAO2 (mmHg) - PaO2 (mmHg)
difference
capillary oxygen content CcO2 ml/L, ml/dl CcO2 (ml/L) = Hb (g/L) × 1.34 + 0.031 × PAO2
(mmHg)
venous admixture QS/QT % QS/QT (%) = 100× [1.34 × Hb (g/L) × (1 - SaO2 (%)/100) +
0.031 × (PAO2 (mmHg) - PaO2 (mmHg))]/[1.34 × Hb (g/L) × (1
- SvO2 (%)/100) + 0.031× (PAO2 (mmHg) - PvO2 (mmHg))]
oxygen transport index DO2I ml/min/m2 DO2I (ml/min/m2) = CaO2 (ml/L) × (C.O. (L/min)/
BSA (m2))
oxygen consumption VO2I ml/min/m2 VO2I (ml/min/m2) = C (a-v) O2 (ml/L) ×(C.O. (L/
min)/BSA (m2))
20 - 5
20.6 Ventilation Calculations
The monitor provides the ventilation calculation function and can save the results of up to 10 calculations, which
are displayed in groups.
20.6.1 Performing Ventilation Calculations

To perform ventilation calculations, follow this procedure:
1. Access ventilation calculation by either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Calculations quick key → Ventilation tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Calculations column select Ventilation.
automatically taken. If the anesthesia machine or ventilator is connected, measured values for ventilation
calculation are also automatically entered.
A calculated value greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up arrow “↑”. A calculated value lower
than the normal lower limit is indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
On the Ventilation page, you can also perform the following operations:
■ Select Pressure Unit. Then corresponding parameter values will be automatically converted and updated
accordingly.
■ Select Range to show the normal range of each parameter.
20.6.2 Input Parameters for Ventilation Calculations
percentage fraction of inspired oxygen FiO2 %
respiration rate RR rpm
partial pressure of mixed expiratory CO2 PeCO2 mmHg, kPa
partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries PaCO2 mmHg, kPa
partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries PaO2 mmHg, kPa
tidal volume TV ml
respiratory quotient RQ None
atmospheric pressure ATMP mmHg, kPa
20.6.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas for Ventilation Calculations
partial pressure of oxygen PAO2 mmHg, kPa PAO2 (mmHg) = [ATMP (mmHg) - 47 mmHg] ×
in the alveoli FiO2 (%)/100 - PaCO2 (mmHg) × [FiO2(%)/100 + (1
- FiO2 (%)/100)/RQ]
alveolar-arterial oxygen AaDO2 mmHg, kPa AaDO2 (mmHg) = PAO2 (mmHg) - PaO2 (mmHg)
difference
oxygenation ratio Pa/FiO2 mmHg, kPa Pa/FiO2(mmHg) = 100 × PaO2 (mmHg)/FiO2 (%)
arterial to alveolar oxygen a/AO2 % a/AO2 (%) = 100 × PaO2 (mmHg)/PAO2 (mmHg)
ratio
minute volume MV L/min MV (L/min) = [TV (ml) × RR (rpm)]/1000
20 - 6
volume of physiological Vd ml Vd (ml) = TV (ml) × [1 - PeCO (mmHg)/PaCO (mmHg)]

2 2
dead space
physiologic dead space in Vd/Vt % Vd/Vt (%) = 100 × Vd (ml)/TV (ml)

percent of tidal volume
alveolar volume VA L/min VA (L/min) =[TV (ml) - Vd (ml)] × RR (rpm)/1000
20.7 Renal Calculations

The monitor provides the renal calculation function and can save the results of up to 10 calculations, which are
displayed in groups.
20.7.1 Performing Renal Calculations

To perform renal calculations, follow this procedure:
1. Access renal calculation by either of the following ways:
◆ Select the Calculations quick key → select the Renal tab.
◆ Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Calculations column select Renal.
2. Enter the known values.
A calculated value greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up arrow “↑”. A calculated value lower
than the normal lower limit is indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
You can select Range to show the normal range of each parameter.
20.7.2 Calculated Parameters and Formulas for Renal Calculations
urine pstassium URK mmol/L
urinary sodium URNa mmol/L
urine Urine ml/24 hrs
plasm osmolality Posm mOsm/kgH2O
urine osmolality Uosm mOsm/kgH2O
serum sodium SerNa mmol/L
creatinine Cr μmol/L
urine creatinine UCr μmol/L
blood urea nitrogen BUN mmol/L
height Height cm
weight Weight kg
20 - 7
20.7.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas for Renal Calculations
urine sodium excretion URNaEx mmol/24 hrs URNaEx (mmol/24 hrs) = Urine (ml/24 hrs) ×
URNa (mmol/L)/1000
urine potassium excretion URKEx mmol/24 hrs URKEx (mmol/24 hrs) = Urine (ml/24 hrs) × URK
(mmol/L)/1000
sodium potassium ratio Na/K % Na/K (%) = 100 × URNa (mmol/L)/URK (mmol/L)
clearance of sodium CNa ml/24 hrs CNa (ml/24 hrs) = URNa (mmol/L) × Urine (ml/24
hrs)/SerNa (mmol/L)
creatinine clearance rate Clcr ml/min Clcr (ml/min) = Ucr (μmol/L) × Urine (ml/24 hrs)/
[Cr (μmol/L) × (BSA (m2)/1.73) × 1440]
fractional excretion of FENa % FENa (%) = 100 × URNa (mmol/L) × Cr (μmol/L)/

sodium [SerNa (mmol/L) × Ucr (μmol/L)]
osmolar clearance Cosm ml/min Cosm (ml/min) = Uosm (mOsm/kgH2O) × Urine

(ml/24 hrs)/(Posm (mOsm/kgH2O) × 1440)
free water clearance CH2O ml/hr CH2O (ml/hr) = Urine (ml/24 hrs) × [1 - Uosm
(mOsm/kgH2O)/Posm (mOsm/kgH2O)]/24
urine to plasma U/P osm None U/P osm = Uosm (mOsm/kgH2O)/Posm (mOsm/
osmolality ratio kgH2O)
blood urea nitrogen BUN/Cr* Mmol/L BUN/Cr = 1000 × BUN (mmol/L)/Cr (μmol/L)
creatinine ratio
urine-serum creatinine U/Cr None U/Cr (mmol/L) = Ucr (μmol/L)/Cr (μmol/L)

ratio
*: BUN/Cr is a ratio under the unit of mol.
20 - 8
21 Recording
21.1 Recorder
The thermal recorder records patient information, measurement data, and up to three waveforms.
The monitor is configured with a built-in recorder.
(1) (2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1) Start/Stop key: press to start a recording or stop the current recording.
(2) Module status indicator
◆ On: when the recorder works correctly.

◆ Off: when the monitor is switched off.
◆ Flashes: if an error occurred to the recorder.
(3) Paper outlet
(4) Recorder door
(5) Latch: pull it backward to open the recorder door.
21.2 Starting Recordings

Recordings can be started manually or automatically.
21.2.1 Manually Starting Recordings

To manually start a recording, you can either:
■ Press the hardkey on the front of the recorder to start a Realtime Segment Waveform Recording.
■ Select on the current dialog to start a recording corresponding to that dialog or page.
21.2.2 Automatic Recordings

In the following conditions, you can set the recorder to automatically start recording:
■ At a preset interval. For more information, see 21.5 Setting up the Recorder.
■ When a parameter alarm is triggered. For more information, see 25.3.9.3 Enabling Automatic Recordings on
an Alarm.
21 - 1
21.3 Stopping Recordings
Recordings can be stopped manually or automatically.
21.3.1 Stopping Recordings Manually

To manually stop a recording, press the hardkey while the recorder is creating a strip.
21.3.2 Stopping Recordings Automatically

Recordings stop automatically in the following conditions:
■ The recording is completed.
■ The recorder runs out of paper.
■ The recorder has an alarm condition.
■ The recorder module is removed from the monitor.
■ The monitor is turned off.
21.4 Recording Related Flags

You can find the following flags on the recording reports:
■ For automatically stopped recordings, there are two columns of asterisks “*” at the end of the report.
■ For manually or abnormally stopped recordings, there is one column of asterisks “*” at the end of the
report.
■ If the parameter data is from external devices connected to the monitor via the BeneLink module, the
parameter label is prefixed with the plus sign “+”.
21.5 Setting up the Recorder

To configure the recorder for waveforms and printing intervals, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Report column select Record Setup.
2. In the Record Setup dialog, select the desired waveform for Waveform 1, Waveform 2 and Waveform 3 in
turn. The recorder can record up to 3 waveforms at a time.
3. Switch on or off IBP Overlap to enable or disable IBP recordings in the overlapping format.
◆ When the IBP Overlap is enabled: If two or more waveforms in the selected waveforms for recording
are IBP waveforms, the IBP waveforms will be recorded in the overlapping format.
◆ When the IBP Overlap is disabled: IBP waveforms will be recorded without overlap.
4. Select Length to set the duration of real-time recording.
5. Select Interval to set the time interval for automatic recording.
6. Select Paper Speed to set the speed for recording waveforms.
21.6 Clearing Recording Tasks

To clear recording tasks, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Report column select Record Setup.
2. In the Record Setup dialog, select Clear All Tasks. This clears all queued recording tasks and stops the
current recording.
21 - 2
21.7 Loading Paper
To load paper, follow this procedure:
1. Use the latch at the upper right of the recorder door to pull the door open.
2. Insert a new roll into the compartment as shown below. Feed the paper through and pull some paper out
from the top of the roller.
3. Close the recorder door.
CAUTION
• Use only specified thermal paper. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the recorder’s printhead, the
recorder may be unable to print, or poor print quality may result.
• Never pull the recorder paper with force when a recording is in process. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the recorder.
• Do not leave the recorder door open unless you are reloading paper or cleaning a paper jam.
21.8 Removing Paper Jam

If the recorder works incorrectly or produces unusual sounds, check if there is a paper jam. If a paper jam is
detected, follow this procedure to remove it:
1. Open the recorder door.
2. Take out the paper and tear off the draped part.
3. Reload the paper and close the recorder door.
21.9 List of Recording Reports

The recorder can output the following reports:
■ Realtime reports
◆ Realtime Segment Waveform Recording
◆ Realtime Continuous Waveform Recording
◆ Auto Realtime Record
◆ ST Record
◆ QT Record
◆ 12-Lead Interpretation Record
◆ Record on Alarm Report
◆ 12-Lead Waveform Record
■ History reports
◆ Event Detail
◆ Full Disclosure Detail Record
◆ 12 Lead Review Record
21 - 3
22 Printing
22.1 Supported Printer

The monitor can output patient reports via a connected network printer. The monitor supports the following
printers:
■ HP LaserJet Pro M202dw
■ HP LaserJet Enterprise M605
■ HP LaserJet P4015n
■ HP LaserJet Pro 400 M401n
■ HP LaserJet 600 M602
■ HP LaserJet Enterprise M608
NOTE
• For more details about the printer, refer to the document accompanying the printer. With product
upgrades, the monitor may support additional printers without prior notice. If you have any doubts
about the compatibility of the printer used with this monitor, contact Mindray.
22.2 End Case Reports
22.2.1 Printing the End Case Report

To print the end case report, choose one of the following ways:
■ Select Print from the End Case Report menu.
■ Select Print End Case Report when you discharge a patient.
■ Select the End Case Report quick key.
22.2.2 Setting a Report as An End Case Report

The following reports can be set as end case reports:
■ Tabular Trends Report
■ Graphic Trends Report
■ Event Report
■ 12-lead Interpretation
■ Alarm Limits Report
■ Realtime Report
■ ECG Report
To set a report as an end case report, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Report column select End Case Report.
2. From the Select Reports page, select the desired report tab, for example ECG Report.
22 - 1
22.2.3 Configuring End Case Reports
To configure end case reports, follow this procedure:
2. From the Report Setup page, set the following end case reports:
◆ Select the Tabular Trends Report, Graphic Trends Report, Realtime Report, and ECG Report tab,
and set these end case report by referring to section 22.7 Viewing Printer Status.
◆ Select the Event Report tab, and select the event that needs to be printed.
◆ Select the 12-Lead Interpretation tab, and set the switch of Median Complex, Measurements,
Interpretation, or Interpretation Summary. For other settings, refer to section 22.7 Viewing Printer
Status.
22.2.4 Setting the End Case Report Period

To set the end case report print period, follow this procedure:
2. From the Select Reports page, set the Period.
NOTE
• End case report print period is calculated from the patient discharged time to the configured period.
• Period setting is applicable to all of the end case reports.
22.3 Manually Starting a Printing Task

This section describes different methods for manually printing a report.
22.3.1 Printing from the Screen

The button will be shown at the top of dialogs that have associated reports. If the button is gray, then there
is not enough information to begin the report, or the printer has not been set up.
When the icon is white, pressing it opens a Print Setup dialog or starts printing a report. If the Print Setup
dialog is entered, configure the report and press Print to start printing.
22.3.2 Printing Realtime Reports

Select the Print quick key to print a realtime report. You can also print a realtime report from the Report Setup
dialog. For more information, see 22.3.3 Printing Most Common Reports.
22.3.3 Printing Most Common Reports

The following most common reports can be printed:
■ ECG Report
■ Realtime Report
■ Tabular Trends Report
■ Graphic Trend Report.
To print these reports, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Report column select Report Setup.
2. Select the desired report tab.
3. Check the settings.
4. Select Print.
22 - 2
22.4 Automatically Printing Reports
When a parameter alarm switch is set to on and an alarm is triggered for this parameter, you can set the monitor
to automatically print a Print on Alarm Report.
To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Access alarm related tabs such as the Alarm tab for a parameter in one of the following ways:
◆ Select the Alarm Setup quick key at the bottom of the screen.
◆ Select the parameter or waveform area of the desired parameter → select the Alarm tab.
◆ Select the Parameters Setup quick key at the bottom of the screen → select the desired parameter
→ select the Alarm tab.
2. Switch on Alarm outputs for desired parameters.
22.5 Stopping a Printing Task

To stop a printing task, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key →from the Report column select Print Queue.
2. Select desired printing tasks and then select Delete. Alternately, select Delete All to stop all the printing
tasks.
22.6 Configuring Reports

This section focuses on how to configure ECG reports, realtime reports, tabular trends reports, and graphic
trends reports.
22.6.1 Configuring ECG Reports

To configure ECG reports, follow this procedure:
2. Select the ECG Report tab.
3. Set the desired options. The following table explains some of the less familiar options.
Menu item Function Description
Speed Set the print speed of 25 mm/sec: prints 25 mm of ECG waveform per second.
ECG waveforms 50 mm/sec: prints 50 mm of ECG waveform per second.
Auto Interval Defines the spacing On: automatically adjusts the space between waveforms to avoid
between the ECG overlapping.
waveforms on a Off: each waveform area has the same size on a printout.
printout
Note: This setting is only relevant when 12×1 is selected for 12-Lead Format.
12-Lead Format Select the format of 12- 12×1: displays 12-lead ECG waveforms on one page in one column.
lead ECG waveforms 6×2: displays 12-lead ECG waveforms on one page in two columns,
on a printout. with 6 lines in each column.
6×2+1: displays 12-lead ECG waveforms on one page in two
columns, with 6 lines in each column, and one rhythm lead
waveform at the bottom.
3×4+1: displays 12-lead ECG waveforms on one page in 4 columns,
with 3 lines in each column, and one rhythm lead waveform at the
bottom.
3×4+3: displays 12-lead ECG waveforms on one page in 4 columns,
with 3 lines in each column, and three rhythm lead waveforms at
the bottom.
22 - 3
Rhythm Lead 1 Select the lead that will I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Rhythm Lead 2 be used as Rhythm
Lead 1, 2, or 3.
Rhythm Lead 3
Note: This setting is only relevant when 6×2+1,3×4+1, or 3×4+3 is selected for 12-Lead
Format.
Format sequence Select the recording Sequential: 12-lead ECG data are recorded sequentially and
method of ECG report displayed in 3 lines and 4 columns with 2.5 seconds of ECG data for
generated by auto each column.
measurement Simultaneous: Record simultaneous 12-lead ECG data.
NOTE
• When ECG Lead Set is set to 3-Lead, then ECG report cannot be printed.
22.6.2 Configuring Realtime Reports

To configure tabular realtime reports, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Realtime Report tab.
2. Set the desired options. The following table explains some of the options.
Select Waveform Select the desired Current Waveforms: prints the realtime report for the currently
waveform to print displayed waveforms and all the currently measured parameter
values.
Selected Waveforms: prints the realtime report for the waveforms
configured in the Select Waveform dialog, accessed by clicking the
Select Waveform button.
22.6.3 Configuring Tabular Trends Reports

To configure tabular trends reports, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Tabular Trends Report tab.
3. Set the desired options.
The following table explains some of the options.
Menu Item Function Description
Time Select the time before which a tabular /

trends report will be printed
Period Select the period during which a Auto: one page of a tabular trends before the current time
tabular trends report will be printed. will be printed at the selected Interval.
All: all stored tabular trends will be printed at the selected
Interval.
30 min to 96 hrs: 30 min to 96 hrs of tabular trends before
the selected Time will be printed at the selected Interval.
22 - 4
Interval Select the resolution of the tabular NIBP, EWS, GCS, C.O.: at an interval of acquiring the values
trends printed on a report. of selected parameter.
Auto: using the Interval setting of the Tabular Trends
review page.
5 sec to 3 hrs: the tabular trends will be printed at the
interval of 5 sec to 3 hrs.
Report Format Select the printing principle. Parameter Oriented: print one page span of report with
parameters listed by row and time listed by column when
Interval is set to Auto.
Time Oriented: print one page span of report with time
listed by row and parameter listed by column when Interval
is set to Auto.
Note that Interval on Auto only limits the number of rows or
columns for Time. The report may have multiple pages to
accommodate the number of parameters. To limit the
parameters, change the Trend Group.
22.6.4 Configuring Graphic Trends Reports

To set graphic trends reports, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key →from the Report column select Report Setup.
2. Select the Graphic Trends Report tab.
3. Set the desired options.
Period Select the period Auto: one page of a graphic trends before the current time will be
during which a graphic printed.
trends report will be All: all stored graphic rends will be printed..
printed.
30 min to 96 hrs: 30 min to 96 hrs of graphic trends before the
selected Time will be printed.
22.7 Viewing Printer Status

You can view the status of the most recent ten printing tasks in the Print Queue dialog. To view the status of
printing tasks, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Report column select Print Queue.
2. View the status of printing tasks in the Print Queue dialog.
Each printing task includes the following information:
■ Print time
■ Report title
■ Printer name (when using the printer server) or IP address (when using the network printer)
■ Printing status, for example, printing, failed, retrying, and waiting.
22.8 Printer Out of Paper

When the printer runs out of paper, the print request will remain incomplete. If there are too many print jobs that
remain incomplete, then a printer error may occur. To resolve the error, install paper. Some print requests may be
lost if the incomplete tasks overflow the printer buffer. Missing or lost reports must be recreated and printed.
To reduce risks of printer errors, maintain enough paper in the printer.
22 - 5
22.9 List of Reports
The printer can output the following reports:
■ Realtime reports
◆ Realtime Report
◆ Freeze Report
◆ ECG Report (5-lead, 6-lead, 12-lead)
◆ 12-Lead Interpretation Report (realtime)
◆ Print on Alarm Report
◆ Alarm Limits Report
◆ Titration Table Report
◆ Hemodynamic Calculation Report
◆ Oxygenation Calculation Report
◆ Ventilation Calculation Report
◆ Renal Calculation Report
◆ ST Report (Realtime)
◆ QT Report (Realtime)
◆ OxyCRG Report
◆ C.O. Measure Report
◆ PAWP Report
◆ ECG 24h Summary & Typical Strips
◆ Device Integration - Loops Report (BeneLink)
◆ History reports
◆ Tabular Trends Report
◆ Graphic Trends Report
◆ Event List Report
◆ Event Detail Report
◆ Full Disclosure Overview Report
◆ Full Disclosure Detail Report
◆ 12-Lead Review Interpretation Report (review)
◆ ST Report (review)
◆ OxyCRG Report (review)
◆ End Case Report
◆ End Case Report - Realtime Report
◆ End Case Report -ECG Report
◆ End Case Report - Tabular Trends Report
◆ End Case Report - Graphic Trends Report
22 - 6
23 Using the On-Screen Timers
The monitor has a Timer function to notify you when a preset time period is expired or how much time has
elapsed. You can simultaneously display up to four timers.
23.1 Displaying Timers

To display a timer, follow this procedure:
2. Click the numeric tile area where the timer is to be displayed, and then select a timer from the popup list.
23.2 Controlling the Timer

The timer provides the following controls, depending on the state and settings of the timer:
■ Start: starts the timer.
■ Pause: pauses the timer.
■ Resume: resumes the timer.
■ Reset: clears the timer.
23.3 Setting the Timer

You can set each timer independently. To set the timer, follow this procedure:
1. Select the timer area to enter the Timer Setup dialog.
2. Set Timer Type:
◆ Normal: The timer has a single and defined run time, and stops with a notification beep when the run
time is reached.
◆ Advanced: The timer has a single and defined run time. When the run time is reached, the timer
makes a notification beep and continuously displays the time beyond the end of run time.
◆ Cycled: The timer has a single and defined run time. When the run time is reached, the timer makes a
notification beep and restarts automatically. The number of elapsed cycles is also displayed on the
left of the Timer tile.
◆ Unlimited: The timer displays the time elapsed since the timer was started.
◆ Clock: The timer displays the system time.
3. Set Direction.
◆ Up: the timer counts up, from zero to Run Time.
◆ Down: the timer counts done, from Run Time to zero.
4. Set Run Time.
5. Set Reminder Volume.
A progress bar is shown with the run time. When the remaining time is 10 seconds, the monitor issues a
reminder tone and the timer flashes in red, prompting you that the run time is about to expire.
NOTE
• You cannot change timer settings, other than Reminder Volume when a timer is running.
• You can set Direction, Run Time, and Reminder Volume only for normal, advanced, and cycled
timers.
23 - 1
24 Managing Configurations
24.1 Configuration Introduction

When performing continuous monitoring on a patient, the clinical professional often needs to adjust the
monitor’s settings according to the patient’s condition. The collection of all these settings is called a
configuration. The system configuration items can be classified as: parameter configuration items, conventional
configuration items, and user maintenance items. Allowing you to configure the monitor more efficiently, the
monitor provides different sets of configurations to accommodate the varying patient categories and
departments.You can change some settings from a certain set of configuration and then save the changed
configuration as a user configuration.
The default configurations provided for your monitor are department-oriented. You can choose either from:
■ General
■ OR
■ ICU
■ Neonatology
■ CCU
Each department has three different sets of configurations tailored for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients
respectively.
WARNING
• The configuration management function is password protected. The configuration management
tasks must be performed by clinical professionals.
24.2 Changing the Department

If the current department configuration is not the one you want to view, you can change the department by
following this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Configuration column select Manage → input the required
2. Select Change Department.
3. Select a department.
4. Select OK.
CAUTION
• Changing the department will delete all current user configurations.
24.3 Setting Default Patient Category

To set the default patient category when admitting a new patient, follow this procedure:
2. Set Default Patient Category.
24 - 1
24.4 Setting Default Configuration
The monitor will load the pre-set default configuration in the following cases:
■ A patient is admitted.
■ A patient is discharged.
■ Patient category is changed.
To set the default configuration, follow this procedure:

password → Select .
2. Select Select Default Config.
3. Select Load the Latest Config or Load Specified Config.
◆ When you select Load Specified Config, the restored configuration is subject to the patient category
(adult, pediatric or neonate). This configuration can be either factory configuration or a saved user
configuration. As an example, select Default Adult Config and then select Factory Default or user
configuration(s).
◆ When you select Load the Latest Config, the latest configuration is loaded when the monitor is
started or a patient is admitted.
24.5 Saving Current Settings

Current settings can be saved as a user configuration. Up to 10 user configurations can be saved.
To save current settings, follow this procedure:
2. Select Save Current Settings.
3. Input the configuration name.
4. Select OK to save current settings as a user configuration.
24.6 Deleting a Configuration

To delete a configuration, follow this procedure:
2. Select Delete Configuration.
3. Select the configuration you want to delete:
◆ In the Delete Configuration dialog, selecting Local tab shows the existing user configurations on the
monitor.
◆ In the Delete Configuration dialog, selecting USB Drive tab shows the existing user configurations
on the USB drive.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select OK.
24 - 2
24.7 Transferring a Configuration
When installing several monitors with identical user configurations, it is not necessary to set each unit
separately. Use a USB drive to transfer the configuration from monitor to monitor.
24.7.1 Exporting a Configuration

To export the current monitor’s configuration, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.
3. Select Export Configuration.
4. Select the configurations and User Maintenance Settings to export.
5. Select Export.
24.7.2 Importing a Configuration

To import the configuration from the USB drive to the monitor, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.
3. Select Import Configuration.
4. Select the configurations and User Maintenance Settings to import.
5. Select Import.
24.7.3 Loading a Configuration

You may make changes to some settings during operation. However, these changes or the pre-selected
configuration may not be appropriate for the newly admitted patient. Therefore, the monitor allows you to load
a desired configuration to ensure that all the settings are appropriate for your patient.
To load a configuration, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key → from the Configuration column select Load.
2. Select the desired configuration.
◆ Select the configuration on this monitor in the Local page.
◆ Select the configuration on the USB drive in the USB Drive page.
3. Select Load.
NOTE
• The monitor may configure some settings by default when you load a configuration of different
software version with the current configuration.
24.8 Printing Configurations

To print both factory configurations and user configurations, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key →from the Configuration column select Manage → input the required
2. Select Print Configuration.
3. Select desired configurations.
4. Select Print.
24 - 3
24.9 Modifying Configuration Password
To modify the configuration password, follow this procedure:
2. Select Modify Password.
3. Respectively input the old password and new password.
4. Select OK.
24 - 4
25 Password-protected User Settings
This chapter describes the password-protected functions accessed in the Maintenance dialog.
25.1 Setting the Device Location
25.1.1 Setting Monitor Information

To set monitor information, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Device Location tab.
3. Input monitor name, facility name and department name.
25.1.2 Setting Monitor Location

If your monitor is installed at a fixed position, or you do not need clinicians to change the room number and bed
number, you can set Monitor Location to Fixed. To set the monitor location, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Device Location tab.
3. Set Location.
◆ Fixed: the Patient Management dialog displays Bed No. and Room No., but you cannot change
them.
◆ Unfixed: you can change Bed No. and Room No. from the Patient Management dialog.
4. Input the room number and bed number.
NOTE
• If Location is set to Unfixed, Bed No. and Room No. are cleared from the Device Location tab each
time you discharge a patient.
25.2 Changing Patient Management Settings
25.2.1 Selecting Displayed Patient Information

You can define which items can be displayed and edited from the Patient Management tab. To do so, follow
this procedure:
2. Select the Patient Management tab.
3. Select the fields you want to display in the Patient Management dialog.
4. If necessary, select the customized fields and input names for these fields.
NOTE
• If the monitor is connected with the CMS, the patient information items and customized fields are
loaded from the CMS.
25 - 1
25.2.2 Auto Discharging a Patient after Monitor Power Off
You can let the monitor automatically discharge after the monitor has been switched off for a period of time.
To set the time period of discharging a patient, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Patient Management tab→ select the Discharge tab.
3. Select a time for Auto Discharge When Power Off. The monitor will automatically discharge the patient
when it is turned off for the designated period of time. The default is Never. That is to say the monitor will
not automatically discharge a patient, regardless of how long the monitor has been switched off.
25.2.3 Selecting Query Criteria for Searching Patients in ADT Server

You can define which criteria can be used to search patients in the ADT server. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Patient Management tab → ADT Query tab.
3. Select the query criteria as desired.
25.2.4 Setting Patient Location Options for the Discharge Screen

To set options for patient location, follow this procedure:
3. Select the Location tab.
4. Input or edit patient location options.
25.2.5 Hiding Patient Name

To hide patient name on specific screens, follow this procedure:
3. Select the Display tab.
4. Set the following switches as desired:
◆ Switch off Primary Screen Display Full Name: does not display patient name in the patient
information area on the primary display.
◆ Switch off Remote View Display Full Name: does not display patient name in the patient
information area on the remote monitors when this monitor is viewed by other monitors.
◆ Switch off Remote View Bedlist Display Full Name: does not display patient name in bed list on the
remote monitors when this monitor is viewed by other monitors.
25.2.6 Select Whether a Prompt is Required When Auto Deleting Discharged Patients
The monitor automatically delete earlier discharged patients when the memory is limited. You can select
whether an alarm is issued when discharged patients are automatically deleted and the monitor memory is very
low.
2. Set the Review tab → Discharged Patients tab.
3. Configure the alarms as needed:
25 - 2
◆ Prompt on patient auto deleted: an alarm is issued when the monitor automatically deletes earlier
discharged patients.
◆ Alarm on storage is nearly full: selects whether an alarm is issued when the monitor memory is very
low and the priority of this alarm.
25.3 Changing the Alarm Settings
25.3.1 Setting Alarm Tone Properties
25.3.1.1 Setting the Minimum Alarm Volume

To set the minimum alarm volume, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → Audio tab.

3. Set Minimum Alarm Volume.
25.3.1.2 Setting the Audible Alarm Tone Pattern

You can distinguishes the heart beat tone, pulse tone, and keystroke tone by frequency. You can choose any of
the three tone patterns: ISO, Mode 1, and Mode 2. For more information, see 7.3.3 Alarm Indicators.
To set the alarm tone pattern, follow this procedure:

3. Set Alarm Sound to ISO, Mode 1or Mode 2.
25.3.1.3 Setting the Interval between Alarm Sounds

If you choose the ISO pattern, you can change the interval between alarm tones. To change the interval between
alarm tones, follow this procedure:

3. Set High Alarm Interval, Med Alarm Interval, and Low Alarm Interval.
25.3.1.4 Setting Alarm Volume Escalation

The monitor provides the function of automatically escalating the alarm tone volume. When this function is
enabled, if an alarm is not reset within the designated delay time after the alarm occurs, the volume of the alarm
tone increases automatically.
To set the alarm volume escalation, follow this procedure:

3. Set Auto Increase Volume.
◆ 2 Steps: if an alarm is not reset within the designated delay time after the alarm occurs, the alarm
volume automatically increases by two levels.
◆ 1 Step: if an alarm is not reset within the designated delay time after the alarm occurs, the alarm
volume automatically increases by one level.
25 - 3
◆ Off: if an alarm is not reset within the designated delay time after the alarm occurs, the volume of the
alarm tone does not change.
4. Select Increase Volume Delay to set the delay time of alarm volume escalation.
NOTE
• The alarm volume escalation function is not applied to the latched alarms.
25.3.2 Setting Alarm Pausing and Resetting Properties
25.3.3 Defining the Pause Function

You can either pause alarms or pause alarm tones. This depends on the pause setting. To set the pause function,
2. Select the Alarm tab → Pause/Reset tab.

3. Set Pause to Alarm Pause or Audio Pause. The default setting is Alarm Pause.
25.3.3.1 Setting the Alarm Pause Time/Alarm Tone Pause Time

The alarm pause time or alarm tone pause time can be set to 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, or Permanent. The default
audio pause time is two minutes.
To set the alarm tone pause time, follow this procedure:

3. Set Pause Time.
25.3.3.2 Setting the Priority of Audio Paused Alarms

To select alarm of what priority can be paused or alarm sound of what priority can be paused, follow this
procedure:

3. Set Pause Priority.
◆ All: pressing the Alarm Pause quick key pauses all alarms.
◆ Med & Low: pressing the Alarm Pause quick key pauses alarms of medium and low priority. The high
priority alarms will not be paused.
◆ Disable: the Alarm Pause quick key is disabled.
25.3.3.3 Disabling the Options of Prolonging Alarm Pause Time/Alarm Tone Pause Time
To disable specific options for the clinician when prolonging alarm pause time or the alarm tone pause time,

3. Switch off Pause 5 min, Pause 10 min, or Pause 15 min.
25 - 4
25.3.3.4 Setting Alarm Light Status on Alarm Reset
When the alarm system is reset, the monitor presents the alarm light by default , but you can switch off the alarm
light. To change the alarm light setting, follow this procedure:

3. Set Alarm Light.
◆ On When Reset: when the alarm system is reset, the alarm tones of the current alarms are switched
off, but the alarm lamp remains flashing.
◆ Off When Reset: when the alarm system is reset, both the alarm tone and alarm lamp of the current
alarms are switched off.
25.3.3.5 Setting the Reminder Tones

When the alarm volume is set to zero, or the alarm is reset or switched off, the monitor issues a periodical
reminder tone. The reminder tone is enabled by default.
To set the reminder tone, follow this procedure:

3. Set Alarm Reset Reminder and Alarm Off Reminder.
◆ On: the monitor issues reminder tones at a designated interval.
◆ Re-alarm: if the alarm condition persists the acknowledged alarms marked with “√” will be re-
generated after the designated reminder tone interval .
◆ Off: the monitor does not issue reminder tones at a designated interval. The acknowledged alarms
marked with “√” will be silenced.
4. Set Reminder Interval to 10 min, 5 min, 3 min, 2 min, or 1 min.
25.3.4 Latching Physiological Alarms

To latch physiological alarms, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → Latching tab.

3. Select how you want to latch the alarms.
Alarm latching rules are as follows:
■ You can separately latch visible alarm signals and audible alarm signals.
■ Latching audible alarm signals simultaneously latches the corresponding visible signals.
■ Selecting alarms of lower priority simultaneously latches higher priority alarms.
■ Switching V-Tach Latching Lock off allows you to switch on or off V-Tach Latching.
■ When V-Tach Latching Lock is switched on, V-Tach latching follows the setting of Lethal alarm latching
and you cannot control V-Tach Latching.
25 - 5
25.3.5 Changing Remote Alarm Settings
25.3.5.1 Resetting Alarms for Remote Devices

You can reset the alarms occurring on the remote devices that are viewed on the Remote View screen of the
monitor. To enable this function, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → Remote View tab.
3. Switch on Reset Remote Bed Alarms. Then the Alarm Reset button appears on the bottom left of the
Remote View screen.
To reset any remote device alarms, the clinician may now select the Alarm Reset button at the bottom of the
Remote View screen.
NOTE
• You can reset remote device alarms only if the Alarm Reset By Other Bed switch is on at the remote
devices and alarms are occurring on the remote device.
25.3.5.2 Authorizing the Alarm Reset to Other Devices

Alarms on your monitor can be reset by remote devices if you enable this function. To do so, follow this
procedure:
3. Switch on Alarm Reset By Other Bed.
25.3.5.3 Selecting the Alarm Reminder for Remote Devices

You can configure what alarm indicators are necessary for the remote devices. To do so, follow this procedure:
3. Select Alarm Reminder:
◆ Visible + Audible: the monitor provides visual alarm indication, and continuous audible alarm
indication if the alarm persists at the remote device.
◆ Visible + Single Tone: the monitor provides visual alarm indication, and a single tone when the alarm
occurs at the remote device.
◆ Visible Only: the monitor only provides visual alarm indication.
25.3.5.4 Presenting Alarm Sound for Remote Devices as per Alarm Priority
You can configure what priority of remote device alarms are presented for audible notification. To do so, follow
this procedure:
3. Select Alarm Priority:
◆ All: the monitor sounds if an alarm occurs.
◆ High & Med: the monitor sounds if a high or medium priority alarm occurs.
◆ High Only: the monitor sounds only if a high priority alarm occurs.
25 - 6
25.3.5.5 Setting the Tone Pattern for Alarms from Remote Devices
The monitor provides the same alarm tone pattern for the remote device alarms as those for your monitor
alarms. For more information on alarm tone pattern, see 7.3.3 Alarm Indicators.
To set the alarm tone pattern for the remote device alarms, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → select the Remote View tab.
3. Set Alarm Sound to ISO, Mode 1 or Mode 2.
25.3.5.6 Switching Off the Remote Device Disconnection Alarm

The monitor can provide an alarm if remote devices, for example, a bedside monitor or a telemetry, are
disconnected. By default, the function is enabled. To disable the alarm, follow this procedure:
Switch off Remote Disconnected Alarm.
25.3.6 Setting Nurse Call Properties
25.3.6.1 Selecting Alarms to be Sent to the Nurse Call System

To set the type and priority of alarms that are sent to the nurse call system, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → Nurse Call tab.

3. Select Signal Type
◆ Pulse: the nurse call signal is a pulse signal and each pulse lasts one second. When multiple alarms
simultaneously occur, only one pulse signal is outputted. If an alarm occurs but the previous one is
not cleared, a new pulse signal will also be outputted.
◆ Continuous: the nurse call signal lasts until the alarm ends. That is to say the duration of a nurse call
signal is equal to that of the alarm condition.
4. Select Contact Type to set the work mode of the nurse call relay.
5. Select Alarm Priority to set the priority of alarms sent to the nurse call system.
6. Select Alarm Type to set the type of alarms sent to the nurse call system.
25.3.6.2 Disabling the Receiving Call Help Function

If a monitor in the same department calls for help, you can receive the calling signal. This function is enabled by
default. To disable this function, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key →from the System column select Maintenance → input the required
2. Select the Alarm tab → Nurse Call tab.

3. Switch off Receive Call Help.
25 - 7
25.3.7 Changing Alarm Priority Settings
25.3.7.1 Setting the Priority of the ECG Lead Off Alarm

To set the priority of the ECG lead off alarm, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab→ select the Other tab.
3. Set the priority of ECG Lead Off.
25.3.7.2 Setting the Priority of the SpO2 Sensor Off Alarm

To set the priority of the SpO2 sensor off alarm, follow this procedure:
3. Set the priority of SpO2 Sensor Off.
25.3.7.3 Setting the Priority of the IBP No Sensor Alarm

To set the priority of the IBP no sensor alarm, follow this procedure:
3. Set the priority of IBP No Sensor.
25.3.7.4 Setting the Switch of the CMS and eGateway Disconnection Alarm
You can choose whether to issue an alarm when the monitor is not connected or disconnected from the CMS/
eGateway. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → Other tab.

3. In the Other block, switch on or off CMS/eGW Disconnected Alarm. If CMS/eGW Disconnected Alarm is
switched off, the “Offline” alarm is not presented when the monitor is not connected or disconnected from
the CMS/eGateway.
25.3.7.5 Setting the Priority of the CMS and eGateway Disconnection Alarm
To set the priority of the CMS and eGateway disconnection alarm, follow this procedure:

3. Set CMS/eGW Disconnected.
25.3.7.6 Setting the Switch of the SpO2 Desat Alarm Off

You can choose whether switching off the SpO2 Desat alarm is permissible or not. To do so, follow this
procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → select the Other tab.
25 - 8
3. Set SpO2 Desat Alarm Off.
◆ Disable: the SpO2 Desat alarm is always on. You cannot switch it off.
◆ Enable: you can switch off the SpO2 Desat alarm. For more information, see 11.6.1 Changing the SpO2
Alarm Settings.
WARNING
• If a clinician switches off the SpO2 Desat alarm, the monitor will not alarm when the patient’s SpO2 is
extremely low. This may result in a hazard to the patient.
25.3.7.7 Setting the Switch of the Apnea Alarm Off

You can choose whether switching off the apnea alarm is permissible or not. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → select the Other tab.

3. Set Apnea Alarm Off.
◆ Disable: the zero RR alarm is always on. The clinician cannot switch it off.
◆ Enable: the clinician can switch off the zero RR alarm. For more information, see 10.5.1 Setting the Resp
Alarm Properties.
WARNING
• If a clinician switches off the zero respiration rate alarm, the monitor will not issue the zero
respiration rate alarm when that situation occurs. This may result in a hazard to the patient. Keep the
patient under close surveillance.
25.3.8 Changing Alarm Delay Settings
25.3.8.1 Setting the Alarm Delay Time

For continuously measured parameters, you can set the alarm delay time. If the alarm condition is resolved
within the delay time, the monitor does not present the alarm.
To set the alarm delay time, follow this procedure:

3. Set Alarm Delay.
The setting of Alarm Delay is not applied to the zero respiration rate alarms and the ST alarms. You can set Zero
RR Delay and ST Alarm Delay separately.
25.3.8.2 Setting the ST Alarm Delay Time


3. Set ST Alarm Delay.
25 - 9
25.3.9 Changing Other Alarm Settings
25.3.9.1 Setting the Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms Switch

To allow a clinician to disable the lethal arrhythmia alarms, follow this procedure:
3. From the Other block, set Lethal Arrh Alarms Off as follows.
◆ Lethal Arrh Alarms Off is set to Disable by default. In this case, a clinician cannot switch off lethal
arrhythmia alarms.
◆ If you set Lethal Arrh Alarms Off to enable, a clinician can switch off lethal arrhythmia alarms from
the ECG dialog. For more information, see 8.6.4.1 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings.
WARNING
• If any of lethal arrhythmia alarms are switched off, the ECG waveform area displays a message to
indicate that corresponding alarms are off.
• If a clinician switches off all arrhythmia alarms, the monitor will not present arrhythmia alarms.
Always keep the patient under close surveillance.
25.3.9.2 Setting the Intubation Time

The default intubation time is 2 minutes. To change the intubation time, following this procedure:

3. Set the Intubation Mode Period.
25.3.9.3 Enabling Automatic Recordings on an Alarm

Print on Alarm is set to Printer by default. To enable automatic recording via recorder when a parameter alarm
is triggered, set Print on Alarm to Recorder. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Alarm tab → select Other.
3. Set Print on Alarm to Recorder.
25.3.9.4 Setting Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Period

The arrhythmia algorithm can disable alarm light and alarm tone for designated period of time when certain
arrhythmia alarms are detected.
To set the arrhythmia alarm timeout period, follow this procedure:
3. From the Other block, set Arrhy Shield Time.
NOTE
• For the following alarms, alarm light and alarm tone cannot be disabled: HR high, HR low,
Tachycardia, Bradycardia, Afib End, Irr Rhythm End.
25 - 10
• The arrhythmia alarm timeout period is only applied to the medium priority chains and atrial
fibrillation chain. For the alarms in the high priority chain, alarm tone and alarm light are presented
as soon as the alarm condition is detected. Refer to 8.6.5.1 Arrhythmia Alarm Chains for more
information on the arrhythmia alarm chain.
• Alarm indication rules for alarms in the atrial fibrillation chain are the same with those for the
medium priority chains.
25.4 Changing CAA Settings
25.4.1 Changing EWS Settings
25.4.1.1 Displaying and Managing the Operator ID

To display the operator ID on the EWS screen, follow this procedure:
2. Select the CAA tab → select the EWS tab.
3. Switch on Operator ID.
4. Select Operator ID Timeout to set how long the operator ID will remain valid.
NOTE
• The EWS tab is only available if a license for EWS is installed in the monitor.
25.4.1.2 Selecting the Default Scoring Tool

To set the default scoring tool for different patient catalog, follow this procedure:
2. Select the CAA tab → select EWS tab.
3. From the Select Default Score area, set Default Adult Score, Default Ped Score, and Default Neo Score.
25.4.1.3 Managing the Scoring Tools

To manage the scoring tool, follow this procedure:
1. Select the Main Menu quick key →from the System column select Maintenance → input the required
2. Select the CAA tab → select EWS tab.
3. Select the Manage Score button.
◆ Delete local scoring tools: from the Local page, delete any unnecessary scoring tools.
◆ Import the desired scoring tools to the monitor: from the USB drive page, select the scoring tools on
the USB drive, and then select Import.
NOTE
• The monitor provide MEWS and NEWS by default. You cannot delete them.
25.4.2 Setting GCS Threshold for Each Consciousness Level

You can configure the threshold and color of each consciousness level. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the CAA tab → select the GCS tab.
3. Set high limit, low limit for each level.
25 - 11
25.4.3 Defining the Hours of Nighttime for the ECG 24h Summary
To define the nighttime for heart rate statistics, follow this procedure:
2. Select the CAA tab → ECG 24h Summary tab.

3. Select From and To to define the beginning and end of Nighttime.
25.5 Changing Module Settings
25.5.1 Selecting the ECG Standard

Select the ECG standard according to the leadwires you are using. To select the ECG standard, follow this
procedure:
2. Select the Module tab → ECG tab.
3. Set ECG Standard to AHA or IEC.
25.5.2 Changing the QTc Formula

The monitor uses the Hodges correction formula by default to correct the QT interval for heart rate. To select the
QTc formula, follow this procedure:
3. Set QTc Formula.
◆ Hodges: QTc = QT + 1.75 × ( HeartRate – 60 )

1---
HeartRate 2
◆ Bazett: QTc = QT ×  -----------------------------
60
1
---
HeartRate 3
◆ Fridericia: QTc = QT ×  -----------------------------
 60 
◆ 60
Framingham: QTc = QT + 154 ×  1 – -----------------------------
 HeartRate
25.5.3 Setting the 12-Lead Order Switch

To set whether to send the order number of 12-lead interpretation report to the hospital information system
while saving the report, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Module tab.
3. Select the ECG tab.
4. Set 12-Lead Order.
25.5.4 Calibrating ECG

The ECG signal may be inaccurate due to hardware or software problems. As a result, the ECG waveform
amplitude becomes greater or smaller. In that case, you need to calibrate the ECG module. To do so, follow this
procedure:
25 - 12
3. From the bottom left corner of the dialog select Calibrate.
25.5.5 Setting Parameter Measurement Timeout

NIBP measurements become outline fonts after a preset time. This feature prevents older values being
misinterpreted as current measurements. To adjust the timeout period for PAWP, C.O., and NIBP, follow this
procedure:
2. Select the Module tab → select Other.

3. Set the timeout period for PAWP, C.O., and NIBP.
25.5.6 Setting Flow Rate (For Sidestream CO2 Module Without O2)
When you are using the sidestream CO2 module without the O2 monitoring function to monitor a neonatal
patient, you can select flow rate. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Ensure that the sidestream module without O2 is inserted in the monitor.
3. Select the Module tab → Other tab.
4. Set CO2 Flow Rate For Neo.
25.6 Hiding Undesired Review Tabs

If you do not need to review some items, you can hide them. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Review tab.
3. From the Tabs page, Event page or Arrh Mark page deselect those not need to beavailable to clinicians
during review.
25.7 Setting the Printer
25.7.1 Setting the Printer Properties

To set a network printer, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Print tab.
3. In the Printer tab, select Connection Type to choose whether you want to output patient reports via the
print server or a network printer.
4. If you set Connection Type to Print Server, perform the following settings:
◆ Print Server Address: select to input the Print Server name or IP address.
◆ Port: selects to input the Print Server port. If the CMS is used as the Print Server, set Port to 6603.
◆ Printer: select the default printer.
◆ Resolution: select the resolution of the default printer.
5. If you set Connection Type to Printer, perform the following settings:
◆ Select Printer IP Address. Select to input the IP address of the desired network printer.
25 - 13
◆ Select Paper Size.
◆ Select Resolution.
After finishing configurations, you can select the Print Test Page button to verify that the printer works properly.
25.7.2 Setting Patient Information on General (Non-12-lead) Reports

To set the patient information you want to display on general reports, follow this procedure:

3. Select the Report Layout tab.
4. Select the desired items under Report Name. N/A indicates that this item is not displayed on a report.
25.7.3 Setting Patient Information on 12-lead ECG Reports

To set the patient information you want to display on 12-lead ECG reports, follow this procedure:

3. select the ECG Report tab.
4. On the right of the ECG Report page, select the desired patient information items. Patient ID, Patient
Name, Age, and Gender are displayed on an ECG report by default.
NOTE
• You can only set the patient information to display on the ECG report from the ECG Report page.
Patient information configured in the Report Layout page is not applied to ECG reports.
25.7.4 Configuring the Name of PDF Files

If you use the Print Server to output patient reports, you can use the PDF printer to output PDF format reports. To
configure the name of PDF files, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Print tab → PDF File Name tab.
3. Select the desired items and their sequence under PDF File Name. N/A refers to no information.
25.7.5 Showing the Second Mark

To set whether you want to show second marks on the report output by the printer, follow this procedure.
2. Select the Print tab → Other tab.
3. Enable or disable Second Mark (Printer).
25.7.6 Setting the Arrhythmia Information to Output by the Recorder

To set whether you want to include arrhythmia thresholds and QRS thresholds in the report output by the
recorder, follow this procedure.
2. Select the Print tab → Other tab.
25 - 14
3. Enable or disable Arrhy Settings (Recorder).
25.7.7 Setting Parameter Unit

To set parameter unit, follow this procedure:
2. Set the Unit tab.
3. Set unit for each parameter.
25.8 Enabling Auto Daylight Savings Time

By default, daylight savings time is disabled. You need to manually enable the daylight savings time. To auto
start the daylight savings time, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Time tab.
3. Switch on Auto Daylight Savings Time.
4. Adjust daylight savings time settings as necessary.
NOTE
• If you enable Auto Daylight Savings Time you cannot manually switch it on or off from the System
Time dialog. For more information, see 3.8.1 Setting the Date and Time.
25.9 Viewing Version Information

To view the system software version, module hardware and software version, and firmware version , follow this
procedure:
2. Select the Version tab.
You can also view the system software version by selecting the Main Menu quick key → from the System
column select Version.
25.10 Checking Battery Information

To check the battery information, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Battery Information tab.
25.11 Changing Scanner Settings

For the 2D barcode reader, you can change the scanner settings.
25.11.1 Establish the Relationship between Patient Demographics and 2D Barcode

Fields (for the Mindray Custom 2D Barcode Reader)
To configure 2D barcode reader, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Scanner tab → 2D Barcode tab.
25 - 15
3. Establish the relationship between the monitor data and hospital’s barcode data for selectable patient
demographics. For example, the monitor has an option of Ped for patient category. In your hospital
barcode, the text may read as Pediatric. So input Pediatric for the field Ped to establish their relationship.
25.11.2 Setting the Barcode Reader Information

To set the barcode reader information, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Scanner tab → Scanner Info. tab.
3. Set Scanner Type:
◆ 1D Scanner: select this option when using a 1D scanner or a 2D scanner other than the Mindray
custom 2D scanner.
◆ 2D Scanner: select this option when using the Mindray custom scanner.
NOTE
• When you set Scanner Type to 2D Scanner, default settings are applied to Data Encoding Type and
DataParseMode. You do not need to change these setting.
25.11.3 Identifying the Barcode Reader (for the non-Mindray Custom 2D Barcode
Reader)
When you are using barcode readers other than the JADAK Flexpoint HS-1R or HS-1M, you should select the
barcode reader from the USB device list, so that the monitor can identify the barcode reader. To do so, follow this
procedure:
2. Select the Scanner tab → Identifying Scanner tab.
3. From the USB device list, select the barcode reader you are using.
25.11.4 Selecting Patient Information Read by the Barcode Reader (for the 2D Barcode
Reader)
To select desired patient information that will be read by the barcode reader, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Scanner tab → Field tab.
3. Select the patient information. The selected information can be read by the barcode reader.
NOTE
• The patient information read by the barcode reader is dependent on the patient information
encoded in the hospital's barcodes.
25 - 16
25.12 Configuring the Network
You can connect the monitor to the central monitoring system (CMS), eGateway, and other monitors through
wired LAN or wireless LAN.
25.12.1 Network Safety Information

CAUTION
• Wireless network designing, deploying, debugging, and maintenance should be executed by
Mindray service personnel or authorized technicians.
• Always set the wireless network according to local wireless regulations.
• Keep network authentication information, for example passwords, safe, to protect the network from
being accessed by unauthorized users.
• Do not connect non-medical devices to the monitor network.
• If wireless network signal is poor, there may be a risk of CMS-destined data loss.
• RF interference may result in wireless network disconnection.
• Disconnecting from the network may result in CMS-destined data loss and function failure. Check
the patient in case of network disconnection and solve the network problem as soon as possible.
• Ensure that the monitor IP address setting is correct. Changing the network settings may result in
network disconnection. Contact your service personnel if there are any problems with the IP
address.
25.12.2 Selecting a Network Type

To select network type, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Type tab.
3. Set Monitor to Auto, LAN1 IP, or WLAN according to your network type. The default is Auto, which means
the monitor will automatically use LAN1 IP when detected and the available WLAN when LAN1 IP is not
detected..
25.12.3 Setting the Wired Network

To set the wired network, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab→LAN1 IP tab.
3. Select how to get the IP address.
◆ Obtain IP Address Automatically: the monitor automatically gets the IP address.
◆ Use the following Address: you need to input the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway.
4. Select how to get the DNS address:
◆ Obtain DNS Address Automatically: the monitor automatically gets the DNS address.
◆ Use the following DNS Address: you need to input the IP address of Preferred DNS server and
Alternate DNS server.
25.12.4 Setting the Wireless Network

To set the wireless network, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab → WLAN.
25 - 17
3. Input SSID, Security, and Password.
4. Select the WLAN IP tab and select how to get the IP address.
◆ Obtain IP Address Automatically: the monitor automatically gets the IP address.
◆ Use the Following Address: you need to input the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway.
5. Select how to get the DNS address:
◆ Obtain DNS Address Automatically: the monitor automatically gets the DNS address.
◆ Use the following DNS Address: you need to input the IP address of Preferred DNS server and
Alternate DNS server.
The monitor supports the following security methods: WPA2 PSK, WPA2 AES, CCKM AES, WPA PSK AES, WPA AES.
Select the security method as desired. You may need to set more parameters for some security methods.
After configuring the wireless network, select WLAN→ Network Test to verify that the wireless network can be
properly connected.
25.12.5 Selecting WLAN Band and Channels

The monitor supports 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz WLAN. To select WLAN band rate and channels, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab → WLAN tab.
3. Select the WLAN Setup button from the bottom left corner of the dialog.
4. Set WLAN Band to Auto, 5G, or 2.4G according to the band you are using. The default is Auto, which
means the monitor can automatically identify the WLAN band.
5. Select Auth Server Type to set the type of authentication server.
6. Set BGN Channel.
7. Set AN Channel.
25.12.6 Managing Certifications

You can delete certifications from the monitor, or import certifications from the USB memory device. To do so,
2. Select the Network Setup tab → WLAN tab.
3. Select the Certificate Management button from the bottom left corner of the dialog.
◆ From the Local tab, select certifications you want to delete from the monitor, and then select Delete.
◆ From the USB Drive tab, select certifications you want to import from the USB memory device, and
then select Import.
25.12.7 Enabling Selecting a CMS

To enable selecting a CMS, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab → Central Station Setup tab.
3. Switch on Select CMS.
25.12.8 Adding CMSs

You can add up to 30 central monitoring systems (CMS) for your monitor. To add CMSs, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab → Central Station Setup tab.
25 - 18
3. Select Add Central Station, and then input the CMS name and IP address of this department.
25.12.9 Setting Multicast Parameters

Multicast helps device discovery between monitors and other devices on the network. Devices in the same
multicast group can be mutually discovered.
To set multicast parameters, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab→Device Discover tab.
3. Set Multicast TTL.
4. Set Multicast Address.
25.12.10 Setting the CMS IP or Gateway Address

To set CMS address and the DNS name, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab→ Device Discover tab.
3. Set Central Station Address to input the DNS name or IP address.
◆ The Center Station Address is 0.0.0.0 by default. That is to say that the monitor can be admitted by
any CMS.
◆ If Center Station Address is not 0.0.0.0, the monitor can only be admitted by the specified CMS. The
monitor will send unicast presence message to that CMS. If the CMS cannot discover the monitor via
multicast, it can discover the monitor via unicast.
If the monitor is connected to the CMS, the displayed IP of Connected Central Station is the IP of this CMS.
NOTE
• If there is no central station for use with this monitor, then it can connect directly to the eGateway by
entering the eGateway Address in the Central Station Address Field.
25.12.11 Setting the Network Service Quality Level

To set the quality of service (QoS), follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab→QoS tab.
3. Select QoS Level For Realtime Monitoring to set the service quality of network connection for realtime
monitoring, for example parameter measurements and waveforms, alarms, etc.
4. Select QoS Level For Others to set the service quality of network connection for non-realtime monitoring,
for example history data, printing, etc.
25.12.12 Using the ADT Gateway

The ADT (admit-discharge-transfer) gateway is normally deployed in the eGateway. You can obtain patient
information from the hospital ADT server through the ADT gateway.
To configure the ADT gateway, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab → ADT tab.
3. Select Server Address to input the host name or IP address of the ADT gateway.
4. Select Port to input the port of the ADT gateway.
25 - 19
ADT Query is switched off by default. You can load patient information to the monitor from the ADT server
only when this function is enabled.
After configuring the ADT gateway, select Network Test to verify that the ADT server is properly connected.
25.12.13 Sending Realtime Data, Waveforms and Alarms via HL7 Protocol
You can send the realtime data, waveforms, and alarms from the monitor to the hospital servers via HL7
protocol. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab → HL7 Configuration tab.
3. From the Data + Waveforms area, select Server Address to input the name or IP address for the server
receiving the realtime data and waveform. Set Port.
4. Switch on Send Data and Send Waveform, as needed.Set Data Interval.
5. From the Alarms area, select Server Address to input the name or IP address for the server receiving the
alarm data. Set Port.
6. Switch on Send Alarms as needed.
This page also display the server connection status.
25.12.14 Selecting Data Encryption Type

To set data encryption type, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab → Information Security tab.
3. Select Encryption Connection Type to set data encryption type when connecting devices:
◆ Only Private Encryption: Mindray private encryption is used to encrypt the transmitted data. You
cannot connect devices supporting SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption.
◆ SSL Encryption Priority: for devices supporting SSL encryption, SSL encryption is used when
connecting the devices. For devices not supporting SSL encryption, private encryption is used when
connecting the devices.
25.12.15 Disabling the Broadcasting Patient Demographics Function

When viewing other patients, device location and patient information of remote devices are displayed in the
remote device list by default. To protect patient privacy, you can disable the broadcasting patient demographics
function to protect the monitor from sending patient information via broadcast. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select Network Setup tab → Information Security tab.
3. Switch off Broadcast Patient Demographics.
Thus, patient information will not display in the remote device list.
25.13 MLDAP
MLDAP refers to Mindray LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). It is an independent process which can
be installed on the eGateway or other application server (Windows). MLDAP provides user identity and
authentication.
The MLDAP server is connected with the hospital LDAP server. All monitoring devices are connected to the
MLDAP server to implement identity and authentication for the following operations:
■ Changing alarm settings
■ Changing arrhythmia settings
■ Accessing the Maintenance dialog
25 - 20
25.13.1 Setting MLDAP
To access the MLDAP server, you should set your monitor as follows:
2. Select the Network Setup tab→ MLDAP tab.
3. Set Server address and port of the MLDAP server.
25.13.2 Testing MLDAP Server Connection

To test whether the monitor is properly connected with the MLDAP server, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Network Setup tab→ MLDAP tab.
3. Select Network Test.
25.13.3 Selecting Password for User Authentication

You can select what password is used when changing alarm settings, arrhythmia settings, and accessing the
Maintenance dialog. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Authorization Setup tab.

3. From the Maintenance area, set User Maintenance to select the password for accessing the monitor’s
Maintenance dialog.
◆ Local Password: the monitor’s password for accessing the Maintenance dialog is required.
◆ User Password: the user name and password saved in the MLDAP server are required.
4. From the Others area, set Alarm Setup: select the password for changing alarm settings.
◆ No Password: changing alarm settings is not password protected.
◆ Local Password: changing alarm switch, alarm limit, and alarm priority is password protected. The
monitor’s password for changing alarm settings is required.
◆ User Password: changing alarm switch, alarm limit, and alarm priority is password protected. The
user name and password saved in the MLDAP server are required.
5. Set Arrhythmia: select the password for changing arrhythmia settings.
◆ No Password: changing arrhythmia settings is not password protected.
◆ Local Password: changing arrhythmia switch, alarm priority, and arrhythmia threshold is password
protected. The monitor’s password for changing arrhythmia settings is required.
◆ User Password: changing arrhythmia switch, alarm priority, and arrhythmia threshold is password
protected. The user name and password saved in the MLDAP server are required.
From the Maintenance area, selecting Modify Local Password can change the monitor’s password for
accessing the Maintenance dialog.
From the Others area, selecting Modify Local Password can change the monitor’s password for accessing alarm
settings and arrhythmia settings.
25.13.4 Setting the Password Timeout Period

If you use the password saved in the MLDAP server to access the Maintenance dialog, alarm settings and
arrhythmia settings, you can set the password timeout period. Once the timeout period is reached, you will need
to re-enter the password. To do so, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Authorization Setup tab.
3. Set Retention Time.
25 - 21
25.14 Defining Other Functions
25.14.1 Setting Notch Filter Frequency

Set notch filter frequency according to the power line frequency of your country. To set notch filter frequency,
2. Select the Other tab.
3. Set Notch Frequency to 50 Hz or 60 Hz according to the power line frequency.
25.14.2 Setting Mouse Sensitivity

The mouse sensitivity is adjustable. To do so, follow this procedure:
3. Set Mouse Sensitivity.
25.14.3 Setting the SpO2 Tone Mode

The monitor adjusts the QRS tone (pitch tone) according to the SpO2 values. To set the SpO2 tone mode, follow
this procedure:

3. Set SpO2 Tone to Mode 1 or Mode 2. The pitch changes more rapidly in Mode 2 than in Mode 1, as
saturation levels change.
The SpO2 tone mode chart for SpO2 between 40% to 100% is as follows:
NOTE
• It is highly recommended to use the same SpO2 tone mode for the same monitors in a single area to
prevent issues arising from inconsistent operation.
25 - 22
25.14.4 Selecting the Language
To set the user interface (UI) language, follow this procedure:
2. Select the Other tab
3. Set Language.
25.14.5 Switching On or Off a Parameter

If there is no Parameters On/Off tab in the Screen Setup dialog then setting parameter switches is password
protected. Follow this procedure to set parameter switches:
3. Select Parameters On/Off.
4. Enable or disable desired parameters.
When a parameter is switched off, the monitor stops data acquisition and alarming for this measurement.
NOTE
• When a parameter is manually switched off and the corresponding parameter module is plugged in,
you cannot monitor this parameter.
25.14.6 Setting If Setting Parameter Switches is Protected

You can set whether setting parameter switches is password protected. To do so, follow this procedure:
3. Switch on or off Parameters On/Off Protected.
25.14.7 Setting If Parameter Switch is Influenced by Configuration

You can set if the settings of parameter switches are influenced by loading a configuration. To do so, follow this
procedure:
3. Switch on or off Parameters On/Off Config Influenced.
25 - 23
26 Battery
26.1 Battery Introduction

This monitor is designed to operate on battery power when the mains power is not available. The monitor uses
mains power as primary power source. In case of mains power failure, the monitor automatically runs on the
battery power.
NOTE
• If the mains power fails and the monitor runs on battery power, the display brightness automatically
lowers to the value of Brightness on Battery (set in Screen Setup → Display). You can manually
adjust the display brightness as required.
26.2 Battery Safety Information
WARNING
• Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
• Use only Mindray specified batteries. Use of a different battery may present a risk of fire or
explosion.
• Keep the batteries in their original package until you are ready to use them.
• Do not expose batteries to liquid.
• Do not crush, drop or puncture the battery. Mechanical abuse can lead to internal damage and
internal short circuits. If a battery has been dropped or banged against a hard surface, whether
damage is externally visible or not, remove the battery from use and dispose of it properly.
• If the battery shows signs of damage or signs of leakage, replace it immediately.
• Batteries should be charged only in this monitor.
• Extremely high ambient temperature may cause battery overheat protection, resulting in monitor
shutdown.
• The lithium-ion battery has a service life of three years. Replace the battery when it reaches the end
of its service life. Failure to replace the battery may cause serious damage to the equipment from
battery overheating.
• Do not open batteries, heat batteries above 60 °C, incinerate batteries, or short battery terminals.
They may ignite, explode, leak or heat up, causing personal injury.
CAUTION
• Remove the battery before shipping the monitor or when it will not be used for an extended period
of time.
26.3 Battery Preparation

The monitor can be configured with the non-smart and smart batteries based on your needs. Before installing
the battery, you should get familiar with battery specifications. For more information, see A.4.2 Battery
Specifications.
26 - 1
WARNING
• Lithium batteries replaced by inadequately trained personnel could result in a hazard (such as
excessive temperatures, fire or explosion).
• Only the smart rechargeable lithium-Ion battery can be installed in the external battery
compartment.
• Ensure that compatible batteries are used for your monitor. For more information, see
26.3.1 Identifying the Battery Type. Otherwise, the monitor may be damaged or cannot work
properly.
26.3.1 Identifying the Battery Type

The smart battery label is used to distinguish the battery type. The smart battery has this label, while
the non-smart battery does not have it.
Not all the battery types are applicable for your monitor. You can only use a smart battery if the smart battery
label is available on the back of the battery compartment and a non-smart battery if the smart battery label is
not available.
The following figure shows the smart battery label on the back of the battery compartment
26.3.2 Installing the Battery in a Built-in Battery Compartment

No battery is installed when the monitor leaves the factory. The battery must only be installed by service
personnel trained and authorized by Mindray. To install the battery, contact your service personnel.
To install the battery, follow this procedure:
1. Turn off the monitor. Disconnect the power cable and other cables.
2. Open the battery door as indicated below.
3. Turn the latch aside.
26 - 2
4. Insert the battery into the battery compartment with the battery terminal inwards. For ePM 15M, you can
insert a second battery into the other battery compartment. You can also insert a second battery into the
other battery compartment.
5. Turn the latch back to the middle position.
6. Close the battery door.
26.3.3 Installing the Battery in a External Battery Compartment

For ePM 12M, besides the built-in battery compartment, you can also use a smart battery by connecting an
external battery compartment.
The external battery compartment must only be installed by service personnel trained and authorized by
Mindray. To install the battery, contact your service personnel.
To install the smart battery into the external battery compartment, follow this procedure:
1. Turn off the monitor. Disconnect the power cable and other cables.
2. Place the monitor on the worktable with monitor face down.
3. Pull up the battery door to open the battery compartment as indicated below.
4. Insert the battery into the battery compartment. Push the battery downwards till the battery terminal is
plugged into the battery connector.
5. Close the battery door.
26.4 Battery Indications

The battery LED, on-screen battery power indicator and related alarm messages indicate the battery status.
26.4.1 Battery LED

The battery LED indications are as follows:
■ Green: the battery is fully charged.
■ Yellow: the battery is being charged.
■ Green and flashing: the monitor is running on battery power.
■ Off: no battery is installed, or the battery malfunctioned, or the AC mains is not connected when the
monitor is powered off.
26.4.2 Battery Power Indicators

The on-screen power indicator indicates the battery status as follows:
■ indicates that the battery is working correctly. The green portion represents the remaining
charge.
■ indicates that the battery power is low and needs to be charged.
■ indicates that the battery is almost depleted and needs to be charged immediately. Otherwise,
the monitor will automatically shut down soon.
■ indicates that the battery is being charged.
26 - 3
■ indicates that no battery is installed or the battery has failed.
26.4.3 Battery-related Alarms

When the battery level is low, the monitor presents the Low Battery alarm, the alarm lamp flashes, and the
monitor produces an alarm sound.
If the battery is almost depleted, the monitor presents the Critically Low Battery alarm. In this case,
immediately connect the AC mains to power the monitor and charge the battery. Otherwise, the monitor will
automatically shut down soon.
For more information on battery-related alarms, see D Alarm Messages.
26.4.4 Checking the Battery Information

To check the battery information, follow this procedure:
password → select Ok.
2. Select the Battery Information tab.
26.5 Charging the Battery

The battery is recharged automatically when the monitor is connected to AC mains power.
26.6 Maintaining the Battery
26.6.1 Conditioning the Battery

The performance of batteries deteriorates over time. You should condition the batteries periodically or when
you notice a degradation in performance.If the battery is not conditioned for a prolonged time, its charge
indication may not be accurate and you may wrongly evaluate the remaining battery runtime.
To condition a battery, follow this procedure:
1. Disconnect the monitor from the patient and stop all monitoring and measuring procedures.
2. Allow the battery to be charged uninterruptedly till it is fully charged.
3. Allow the monitor to run on the battery until the battery is completely depleted and the monitor automat-
ically shuts down.
4. Fully charge the battery again for use or charge it to 40 - 60% for storage.
NOTE
• Do not use the monitor to monitor a patient during battery conditioning.
• Interrupting battery conditioning to use the monitor will prevent completion of the conditioning
cycle and require repeating the conditioning process completely to properly condition the battery.
26.6.2 Checking Battery Performance

The performance of a rechargeable battery deteriorates over time. You should check the battery performance
periodically or if you are concerned that the battery may fail.
See steps 1 to 3 of 26.6.1 Conditioning the Battery to check battery performance. The operating time of the
batteries reflects their performance directly. If the operating time of a battery is noticeably shorter than that
stated in the specifications, the battery may have reached its service life or be malfunctioning. If the battery
performance meets the requirement, fully charge the battery again for use or charge it to 40 - 60% for storage.
NOTE
• Battery operating time depends on equipment configuration and operation. For example, high
display brightness or measuring NIBP repeatedly will shorten the battery operating time.
26 - 4
26.7 Storing Batteries
When storing batteries, make sure that the battery terminals do not come into contact with metallic objects. If
batteries are stored for an extended period of time, place the batteries in a cool place with a partial charge of
40% to 60% capacity.
Condition the stored batteries every three months. For more information, see 26.6.1 Conditioning the Battery.
NOTE
• Remove the battery from equipment if the equipment is not used for a prolonged time (for example,
several weeks). Otherwise the battery may overdischarge.
• Storing batteries at high temperature for an extended period of time will significantly shorten their
life expectancy.
• The battery storage temperature is between -5 °C and 35 °C. Storing batteries in a cool place can
slow the aging process. Ideally the batteries should be stored at 15 °C.
26.8 Recycling Batteries

Discard a battery in the following situations:
■ The battery has visual signs of damage.
■ The battery fails.
■ The battery is aged and its runtime significantly less than the specification.
■ The battery service life is reached.
Properly dispose of batteries according to local regulations.
WARNING
• Do not open batteries, heat batteries above 60 °C, incinerate batteries, or short the battery
terminals. They may ignite, explode, leak or heat up, causing personal injury.
26 - 5
27 Care and Cleaning
27.1 Care and Cleaning Introduction

In this chapter we only describe cleaning and disinfection of the main unit, modules and certain accessories. For
the cleaning and disinfection of other reusable accessories, refer to their instructions for use of the
corresponding accessories.
Keep your equipment and accessories clean. To avoid damage to the equipment, follow these guidelines:
■ Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for each cleaning / disinfecting agent.
■ Do not immerse any part of the equipment or accessories into liquid.
■ Do not pour liquid onto the equipment or accessories.
■ Do not allow liquid to enter the case.
■ Never use abrasive materials (such as steel wool or silver polish), or erosive cleaners (such as acetone or
acetone-based cleaners).
27.2 Care and Cleaning Safety Information
WARNING
• Be sure to turn off the system and disconnect all power cables from the outlets before cleaning the
equipment.
CAUTION
• If you spill liquid on the equipment or accessories, contact Mindray or your service personnel.
• Avoid wetting the pins and metal parts of the equipment, mounting kits or accessories during
cleaning and disinfection.
• Use only Mindray approved cleaners and disinfectants and methods listed in this chapter to clean or
disinfect your equipment. Warranty does not cover damage caused by unapproved substances or
methods.
• We make no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a means for
controlling infection. For the method to control infection, consult your hospital’s Infection Control
Officer or Epidemiologist.
• The responsible hospital or institution shall carry out all cleaning and disinfection procedures
specified in this chapter.
• Refer to the respective instructions for use of the cleaning agents and disinfectants.
• Do not mix disinfecting solutions (such as bleach and ammonia) as hazardous gases may result.
NOTE
• To clean or disinfect reusable accessories, refer to the instructions delivered with the accessories.
27 - 1
27.3 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Equipment and Mounting Kits
Use approved cleaning and disinfecting agents for cleaning or disinfecting the main unit and modules.
27.3.1 Approved Cleaning and Disinfecting Agents

The following table lists approved cleaning and disinfecting agents:
Product Name Product Type Active Ingredients
Sodium hypochlorite bleach Liquid Sodium hypochlorite bleach 0.5%
Hydrogen peroxide Hydrogen peroxide 3%
Isopropanol Isopropanol 70%
1-Propanol 1-Propanol 50%
Metrex CaviCide1™ Diisobutylphenoxyethoxyethyl dimethyl benzyl

ammonium chloride 0.28%,
Isopropanol 17.2%
Virex® II 256 (1:256) Didecyl dimethyl ammonium chloride 8.704%,

n-Alkydimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride
8.190%
Virex® TB n-Alkyl dimethyl benzyl ammonium chlorides

0.105%,
n-Alkyl dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium
chlorides 0.105%
Rely+OnTM Virkon® High Level Surface Powder Used as 1% solution

Disinfectant Biocidal active:
Pentapotassium bis (peroxymonosulphate) bis
(sulphate)(500g/kg),
Contains dipotassium peroxodisulphate.
Alpet® D2 Surface Sanitizing Wipes Wipes Isopropyl Alcohol 58.6000%,

Octyl Decyl Dimethyl Ammonium chloride
0.0075%,
Dioctyl Dimethyl Ammonium Chloride 0.0030%
Clorox Dispatch® Hospital Cleaner Sodium Hypochlorite 0.65%

Disinfectant Towels with Bleach
Clorox Healthcare® Bleach Germicidal Sodium Hypochlorite 0.55%

Wipes
Clorox Healthcare® Hydrogen Peroxide Hydrogen Peroxide 1.4%

Cleaner Disinfectant Wipes
Diversey Oxivir® TB Wipes Hydrogen Peroxide 0.5%
Metrex CaviWipes™ Diisobutylphenoxyethoxyethyl dimethyl benzyl

Isopropanol 17.2%
PDI Sani-Cloth® AF3 Germicidal Disposable n-Alkyl dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium

Wipe chlorides 0.14%,
n-Alkyl dimethyl benzyl ammonium chlorides
0.14%
PDI Sani-Cloth® Bleach Germicidal Sodium Hypochlorite 0.63%,other ingredients

Disposable Wipe 99.37%
PDI Sani-Cloth® HB Germicidal Disposable n-Alkyl dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium

0.07%
27 - 2
PDI Sani-Cloth® Plus Germicidal Disposable Wipes n-Alkyl dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium
Cloth chlorides 0.125%,
n-Alky dimethyl benzyl ammonium chlorides
0.125%
PDI Super Sani-Cloth® Germicidal n-Alkyl dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium

Disposable Wipe chlorides 0.25%,
0.25%,
Isopropyl Alcohol 55.0%
VIRAGUARD Hospital Surface Disinfectant Isopropanol 70%,

Towelettle Other ingredients 30%
NOTE
• For equipment with the symbol , all the listed cleaning and disinfecting agents are available for
use.
27.3.2 Cleaning the Equipment and Mounting Kits

The main unit and modules should be cleaned on a regular basis. Before cleaning the equipment, consult your
hospital’s regulations for cleaning the equipment.
To clean your equipment, follow this procedure:
1. Shut down the monitor and disconnect it from the AC power.
2. Clean the display screen with wipes or a soft cloth moistened with one of the cleaning agents listed in
27.3.1 Approved Cleaning and Disinfecting Agents only.
3. Clean the exterior surface of the equipment or module with wipes or a soft cloth moistened with one of the
cleaning agents listed in 27.3.1 Approved Cleaning and Disinfecting Agents only.
4. Wipe off all the cleaning agent residue with a dry cloth.
5. Dry your equipment in a ventilated, cool place.
27.3.3 Disinfecting the Equipment and Mounting Kits

Disinfect the main unit and modules as required in your hospital’s servicing schedule using the disinfecting
agents listed in the table above. Cleaning equipment before disinfecting is recommended.
CAUTION
• Never use EtO or formaldehyde for disinfection.
27.4 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Accessories

For the NIBP air hose, Masimo SpO2 cable and Nellcor SpO2 cable, you should clean and disinfect them using the
cleaners and disinfectants and methods listed in this section. For other accessories, you should consult the
instructions delivered with the accessories.
CAUTION
• Fluids entering the NIBP air hose can damage the equipment. When cleaning and/or disinfecting the
NIBP air hose, prevent liquid from entering the hose.
• Periodically inspect the NIBP air hose and connector for signs of wear or deterioration. Replace the
NIBP air hose if you detect a leak. Dispose of damaged NIBP air hose according to local laws for
disposal of hospital waste.
• Never immerse or soak the accessories in any liquid.
• Never clean or disinfect the metalic connectors at either end of the accessories.
27 - 3
• Use only Mindray approved cleaners and disinfectants and methods listed in this section to clean or
disinfect the accessories. Warranty does not cover damage caused by unapproved substances or
methods.
• To avoid long term damage, the accessories should be disinfected only when necessary as
determined by your hospital’s policy.
27.4.1 Approved Accessories Cleaning and Disinfecting Agents

The following table lists approved NIBP air hose cleaning and disinfecting agents:
:
Isopropanol Liquid Isopropanol 70%
Metrex CaviCide1™ Diisobutylphenoxyethoxyethyl dimethyl benzyl

Isopropanol 17.2%

0.105%,
chlorides 0.105%

Alpet® D2 Surface Sanitizing Wipes Wipes Isopropyl Alcohol 58.6000%,

Octyl Decyl Dimethyl Ammonium chloride
0.0075%,
Dioctyl Dimethyl Ammonium Chloride 0.0030%
Clorox Dispatch® Hospital Cleaner Sodium Hypochlorite 0.65%

Metrex CaviWipes™ Diisobutylphenoxyethoxyethyl dimethyl benzyl

Isopropanol 17.2%
PDI Sani-Cloth® AF3 Germicidal Disposable n-Alkyl dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium

0.14%
PDI Sani-Cloth® Plus Germicidal Disposable n-Alkyl dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium

Cloth chlorides 0.125%,
n-Alky dimethyl benzyl ammonium chlorides
0.125%

0.25%,

27 - 4
The following table lists approved Masimo SpO2 cable cleaning and disinfecting agents:
:
Isopropanol Liquid Isopropanol 70%
The following table lists approved Nellcor SpO2 cable cleaning and disinfecting agents:
:
Sodium hypochlorite bleach Liquid Sodium hypochlorite bleach 0.5%
Isopropanol Isopropanol 70%

0.105%,
chlorides 0.105%

Clorox Dispatch® Hospital Cleaner Wipes Sodium Hypochlorite 0.65%

Clorox Healthcare® Bleach Germicidal Sodium Hypochlorite 0.55%

Wipes
Clorox Healthcare® Hydrogen Peroxide Hydrogen Peroxide 1.4%

Cleaner Disinfectant Wipes
Diversey Oxivir® TB Wipes Hydrogen Peroxide 0.5%

0.25%,

27.4.2 Cleaning the Accessories

You should clean the accessories (NIBP air hose, Masimo SpO2 cable and Nellcor SpO2 cable) on a regular basis.
Before cleaning the accessories, consult your hospital’s regulations for cleaning the accessories.
To clean the accessories (NIBP air hose, Masimo SpO2 cable and Nellcor SpO2 cable), follow this procedure:
1. Clean the accessories with wipes or a soft cloth moistened with one of the cleaning agents listed in
27.4.1 Approved Accessories Cleaning and Disinfecting Agents only.
2. Wipe off all the cleaning agent residue with a dry cloth.
3. Allow the accessories to air dry.
27.4.3 Disinfecting the Accessories

We recommend that the accessories (NIBP air hose, Masimo SpO2 cable and Nellcor SpO2 cable) should be
disinfected only when necessary as determined by your hospital’s policy, to avoid long term damage to the
accessories. Cleaning the accessories before disinfecting is recommended.
27 - 5
27.5 Sterilization
Sterilization is not recommended for this equipment, related products, accessories, or supplies unless otherwise
indicated in the Instructions for Use that accompany the products, accessories or supplies.
27 - 6
28 Maintenance
28.1 Maintenance Introduction

Regular maintenance is essential to ensure that the equipment continues to function properly. This chapter
contains information on periodic testing and maintenance.
28.2 Maintenance Safety Information
WARNING
• To avoid electric shock, stop using the equipment if you find the housing is damaged, and contact
the service personnel.
• Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution using this equipment to
implement a recommended maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment failure and
possible health hazards.
• No modification of this equipment is allowed.
• This equipment contains no user serviceable parts.
• The safety checks or maintenance involving any disassembly of the equipment should be performed
by professional service personnel. Otherwise, undue equipment failure and possible health hazards
could result.
• Do not open batteries, heat batteries to above 60 °C, incinerate batteries, or short the battery
terminals. Batteries may ignite, explode, leak or heat up, causing personal injury.
• The service personnel must be properly qualified and thoroughly familiar with the operation of the
equipment.
CAUTION
• The equipment and accessories shall not be serviced or maintained while in use on a patient.
• If you discover a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel or Mindray.
• Use and store the equipment within the specified temperature, humidity, and altitude ranges.
• When disposing of the packaging material, be sure to observe the applicable waste control
regulations and keep it out of the reach of children.
• At the end of its service life, the equipment, as well as its accessories, must be disposed of in
compliance with the guidelines regulating the disposal of such products. If you have any questions
concerning disposal of the equipment, please contact Mindray.
28 - 1
28.3 Maintenance and Testing Schedule
Follow the maintenance and testing schedule or local regulations to perform testing and maintenance such as
defined in section 28.5 Testing Methods and Procedures. Follow your hospital policy on cleaning and disinfecting
the equipment before testing and maintenance.
The following table lists the maintenance and testing schedule:
Test/Maintenance Item Recommended Frequency
Performance Tests
Visual inspection Every day, before first use.
Measurement module performance test and 1. If you suspect that the measurement values are incorrect.
calibration 2. Follow any repairs or replacement of relevant module.
3. Once a year for CO2 and AG tests.
4. Once every two years for other parameter module performance
tests.
Analog output test If you suspect that the analog output function does not work
properly.
Defibrillation synchronization test If you suspect that the defibrillation synchronization function does
not work properly.
Nurse call test If you suspect that the nurse call function does not work properly.
Electrical Safety Tests
Electrical safety tests Once every two years.
Other Tests
Power-on test Before use
Recorder check 1. When the recorder is used for the first time.
2.Follow any repair or replacement of the recorder.
Network printer tests 1. When first installed.

2.Followany repair or replacement of the printer.
Device integration check 1. When first installed.

2. Following any repair or replacement of the external device.
Battery check Functionality test 1. When first installed.

2. When battery is replaced.
Performance test Every three months or if the battery runtime is reduced significantly.
28.4 Checking System Software Version

To view system software version information, select the Main Menu quick key → from the System column select
Version.
You can check the detailed system software version, module hardware and software version, and firmware
version only from the Maintenance dialog.
28.5 Testing Methods and Procedures

Except for the following maintenance tasks, all other test and maintenance tasks should be performed by
Mindray-qualified service personnel only.
■ Regular checks, including visual inspection and power-on test
■ Printer and recorder tests
■ Battery check
28 - 2
If your monitor needs a safety test and performance test, contact the service personnel.
28.5.1 Performing Visual Inspection

Visually inspect the equipment before its first use every day. If you find any signs of damage, remove your
monitor from use and contact the service personnel.
Verify that the equipment meets the following requirements:
■ Environment and power supply specifications are met.
■ The monitor housing and display screen are free from cracks or other damage.
■ The power cord is not damaged and the insulation is in good condition.
■ Connectors, plugs, and cables are not damaged or kinked.
■ Power cord and patient cables are securely connected with the equipment and modules.
28.5.2 Performing Power-on Test

The monitor automatically performs a power-on test at startup. Verify the following items for the power-on test:
■ The equipment powers on properly.
■ The alarm system works properly, denoted by alarm sounds and display of all 3 alarm light colors.
■ The monitor displays properly.
28.5.3 Testing the Recorder

To test the recorder, follow this procedure:
1. Start a recording task to print waveforms and reports.
2. Check that the recorder functions correctly.
3. Check that the printout is clear without missing dots.
28.5.4 Testing the Network Printer

To check the printer, follow this procedure:
1. Start a printing task to print waveforms and reports.
2. Check that the printer is properly connected and functions correctly.
3. Check that the printout is clear without missing information.
28.5.5 Checking the Battery

For information on battery check, see 26.6.2 Checking Battery Performance.
28.6 NIBP Maintenance
28.6.1 NIBP Leakage Test

The NIBP leakage test checks the integrity of the system and of the valve. The NIBP leakage test should be
performed once every two years or when you doubt the NIBP measurements. The NIBP leakage test should be
performed by Mindray-qualified service personnel only.
28.6.2 NIBP Accuracy Test

The NIBP accuracy test should be performed once every two years or when you doubt the NIBP measurements.
The NIBP accuracy test should be performed by Mindray-qualified service personnel only.
28 - 3
28.7 Disposing of the Monitor
Dispose of the monitor and its accessories when its service life is reached. Follow local regulations regarding the
disposal of such product.
WARNING
• For disposal of parts and accessories, where not otherwise specified, follow local regulations
regarding disposal of hospital waste.
28 - 4
29 Accessories
The accessories listed in this chapter comply with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2 when in use with the
patient monitor. The accessory material that contacts the patients has undertaken the bio-compatibility test and
is verified to be in compliance with ISO 10993-1. For details about the accessories, refer to the instructions for use
provided with the accessory.
WARNING
• Use accessories specified in this chapter. Using other accessories may cause damage to the patient
monitor or not meet the claimed specifications.
• Single-use accessories are not designed to be reused. Reuse may cause a risk of contamination and
affect the measurement accuracy.
CAUTION
• The accessories may not meet the performance specifications if stored or used outside the specified
temperature and humidity ranges. If accessory performance is degraded due to aging or
environmental conditions, contact your service personnel.
• Check the accessories and their packages for any sign of damage. Do not use them if any damage is
detected.
• Use the accessories before the expiration date if an expiration date is indicated.
• Discard disposable accessories according to hospital regulations.
NOTE
• This manual describes all the accessories that are validated for use. Not all accessories are available
in every market.
29.1 ECG Accessories
29.1.1 ECG Electrodes Available for Purchase
Model Part No. Description Usage Applicable patient
31499224 0010-10-12304 Electrode, Kendall, pkg of 10 Disposable Adult
2245-50 9000-10-07469 ECG electrode, 3M, pkg of 50 Disposable Pediatric
1050NPSMKittycat 0681-00-0098-01 NEO pre-wired electrode radio Disposable Neonate

Opaque, pkg of 100
1051NPSMKittycat 0681-00-0098-02 NEO pre-wired electrode radio Disposable Neonate

Translucent, pkg of 100
H124SG 900E-10-04880 Neonatal ECG electrode (kendall, Disposable Neonate

package of 50)
29 - 1
29.1.2 12-Pin Trunk Cables Available for Purchase
EV6206 009-005266-00 ECG cable, 10' (3.1 m), defibrillation- Reusable Adult/Pediatric
proof, for N/T
EV6207 009-005267-00 ECG cable, 20' (6.2 m), defibrillation- Reusable Adult/Pediatric
proof, for N/T
EV6216 009-005268-00 ECG cable, 10' (3.1 m), ESU-proof, for Reusable Adult/Pediatric
N/T
EV6217 009-005269-00 ECG cable, 20' (6.2 m), ESU-Proof, for Reusable Adult/Pediatric
N/T
EV6208 040-003528-00 ECG cable, 10' (3.1 m), 12-lead, Reusable Adult/Pediatric
defibrillation-proof, for N/T 5-lead
leadwires
Note: 040-003528-00 uses 5-Lead N/T leadwires for the limb leads.
29.1.3 12-Pin Trunk Cables Also Compatible
EV6201 0010-30-42719 12Pin 3/5-Lead ECG trunk cable, Reusable Adult/Pediatric

defibrillation-proof
EV6202 0010-30-42720 12Pin 3-Lead ECG trunk cable, Reusable Pediatric/Neonate

EV6203 0010-30-42721 12Pin 12-Lead trunk cable, Reusable Adult/Pediatric

EV6211 0010-30-42723 12Pin 3/5-Lead ECG trunk cable, ESU- Reusable Adult/Pediatric
proof
EV6212 0010-30-42724 12Pin 3-Lead ECG trunk cable, ESU- Reusable Pediatric/Neonate
proof
EV6222 040-000754-00 12Pin 3-Lead trunk cable, Reusable Pediatric/Neonate

defibrillation-proof, DIN Conn
29.1.4 3-lead ECG Leadwires Available for Purchase
EY6316B 009-004765-00 3-Lead, N/T, AHA, snap, 24’’ Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EY6316A 009-004771-00 3-Lead, N/T, AHA, clip, 24’’ Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EY6305A 009-004772-00 3-Lead, N/T, AHA, clip, 36’’ Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EY6310B 009-004777-00 3-Lead, N/T, AHA, snap, 24’’ Disposable Adult/Pediatric
29.1.5 3-lead ECG Leadwires Also Compatible
EL6305A 0010-30-42896 3-Lead leadset, AHA, clip Reusable Neonate
EL6303A 0010-30-42731 3-Lead leadset, AHA, clip, Long Reusable Adult/Pediatric
29 - 2
EL6301B 0010-30-42734 3-Lead leadset, AHA, snap Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EL6311B 040-000146-00 3-Lead leadset, AHA, snap Disposable Pediatric/Neonate
EL6311A 040-000148-00 3-Lead leadset, AHA, clip Disposable Pediatric/Neonate
EY6511A 009-004786-00 5-Lead, N/T, AHA, pinch, 24’’ Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EY6507B 009-004790-00 5-Lead, N/T, AHA, snap, 24’’ Disposable Adult/Pediatric
EL6503A 0010-30-42729 5-Lead leadset, AHA, clip, Long Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EL6501B 0010-30-42735 5-Lead leadset, AHA, snap Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EL6501A 0010-30-42727 5-Lead leadset, AHA, clip Reusable Adult/Pediatric
29.1.9 12-lead ECG Chest Leadwires Available for Purchase
EL6803A 0010-30-42904 12-Lead leadset, chest, AHA, clip Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EL6803B 0010-30-42908 12-Lead leadset, chest, AHA, snap Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EL6801A 0010-30-42902 12-Lead leadset, limb, AHA, clip Reusable Adult/Pediatric
EL6801B 0010-30-42906 12-Lead leadset, limb, AHA, snap Reusable Adult/Pediatric
29 - 3
29.2 SpO2 Accessories
Wavelength emitted by the sensors is between 600 nm and 1000 nm. The maximum photic output consumption
of the sensor is less than 18 mW.
The information about the wavelength range and maximum photic output consumption can be especially
useful to clinicians, for example, when photodynamic therapy is performed.
29.2.1 Extension Cables and Adapter Cables Available for Purchase
572A 0010-20-42712 8-pin SpO2 extension cable, Nellcor Reusable /
583A 040-003310-00 8-pin, RD SET, Masimo Reusable /
4089 040-003381-00 RD to LNCS adapter cable, Masimo Reusable /
4092 040-003426-00 LNCS to RD adapter, Masimo Reusable /
29.2.2 Extension Cables and Adapter Cables Also Compatible
582A 115-020768-00 8-pin SpO2 extension cable, Masimo Reusable /
562A 0010-20-42710 7pin SpO2 Cable Reusable /
562B 040-001443-00 7Pin Mindray SpO2 cable, 1.2m Reusable /
4080 040-003378-00 RD SET MD 14-05, PC 5 ft Reusable /
4081 040-003379-00 RD SET MD 14-12, Patient Cable 12 ft Reusable /
29.2.3 Masimo SpO2 RD Set Sensors Available for Purchase
4050 040-003376-00 SpO2 sensor, RD SET DCI Reusable Adult (> 30 kg)
4051 040-003377-00 SpO2 sensor, RD SET DCI Reusable Pediatric (10-50 kg)
4053 040-003380-00 SpO2 sensor, RD Set TC-I, tip-clip ear Reusable Adult (> 30 kg)
sensor, 3ft
4000 040-003382-00 SpO2 sensor, RD SET Adt, adhesive, Disposable Adult (> 30 kg)
pkg of 20
4001 040-003383-00 SpO2 sensor, RD SET PDT, adhesive, Disposable Pediatric (10 to 50
pkg of 20 kg)
4002 040-003384-00 SpO2 sensor, RD Set Inf, adhesive, Disposable Infant (3 to 20 kg)
pkg of 20
4003 040-003385-00 SpO2 sensor, RD Set Neo, adhesive, Disposable Neonatal /Adult
pkg of 20 (<3Kg or >40Kg)
4004 040-003386-00 SpO2 sensor, RD Set NeoPt, adhesive, Disposable Neonate (<1 kg)
pkg of 20
4005 040-003387-00 SpO2 sensor, RD Set NeoPt-500, non- Disposable Neonate (<1 kg)
adhesive, pkg of 20
29 - 4
29.2.4 Masimo SpO2 LNCS Sensors Also Compatible
LNCS DCI 0010-10-42600 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Reusable Adult (>30 kg)
LNCS DCIP 0010-10-42634 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Reusable Pediatric (10-50 kg)
LNCS YI 0010-10-43016 SpO2 sensor, multisite Reusable Adult/Pediatric/

Neonate
LNCS NeoPt-L 0010-10-42626 SpO2 sensor Disposable Neonate (<1 kg)
LNCS Neo-L 0010-10-42627 SpO2 sensor Disposable Neonate /Adult

(<3 kg or>40 kg)
LNCS Inf-L 0010-10-42628 SpO2 sensor Disposable Infant (3-20 kg)
LNCS Pdtx 0010-10-42629 SpO2 sensor Disposable Pediatric (10-50 kg)
LNCS Adtx 0010-10-42630 SpO2 sensor Disposable Adult (>30 kg)
LNCS Adtx 0600-00-0121 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip, 20 pcs/box Disposable Adult (>30 kg)
LNCS Pdtx 0600-00-0122 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip, 20 pcs/box Disposable Pediatric (10-50 kg)
LNCS DCI 0600-00-0126 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Reusable Adult (>30 kg)
LNCS DCIP 0600-00-0127 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Reusable Pediatric (10-50 kg)
LNCS NeoPt 0600-00-0156 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Disposable Neonate (<1Kg)
LNCS Neo-L 0600-00-0157 SpO2 sensor, 20 pcs/box Disposable Neonate /Adult

(<3 kg or > 40 kg)
LNCS Inf 0600-00-0158 SpO2 sensor, 20 pcs/box Disposable Infant (3-20 kg)
29.2.5 Nellcor SpO2 Sensors Also Compatible
DS100A 9000-10-05161 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Reusable Adult
D-YS 0010-10-12476 SpO2 sensor, with wraps Reusable /
OXI-P/I 9000-10-07308 SpO2 sensor, finger, band Reusable Pediatric/Infant
OXI-A/N 9000-10-07336 SpO2 sensor, finger/foot, band Reusable Adult/Neonate
MAXAI 0010-10-12202 SpO2 sensor, 24 pcs/box Disposable Adult (>30 kg)
MAXPI 0010-10-12203 SpO2 sensor, 24 pcs/box Disposable Pediatric (10-50 Kg)
MAXII 0010-10-12204 SpO2 sensor, 24 pcs/box Disposable Infant (3-20 kg)
MAXNI 0010-10-12205 SpO2 sensor, 24 pcs/box Disposable Adult/Neonate

(<3 kg or >40 kg)
29.2.6 Mindray SpO2 Sensors
512F 512F-30-28263 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Reusable Adult
512FLH 115-012807-00 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip,7pin Reusable Adult
512H 512H-30-79061 SpO2 sensor, finger-clip Reusable Pediatric
512E 512E-30-90390 SpO2 sensor, finger-tip Reusable Adult
29 - 5
512G 512G-30-90607 SpO2 sensor, finger-tip Reusable Pediatric
518B 518B-30-72107 SpO2 sensor, foot, bandage Reusable Neonate
518C 040-000330-00 SpO2 sensor, foot, bandage Reusable Neonate
520A 009-005087-00 SpO2 sensor, finger, non-adhesive Disposable Adult
520P 009-005088-00 SpO2 sensor, finger, non-adhesive Disposable Pediatric
520I 009-005089-00 SpO2 sensor, toe, non-adhesive Disposable Infant
520N 009-005090-00 SpO2 sensor, foot, non-adhesive Disposable Neonate
/ 115-004895-00 Reusable SpO2 Sensor, Neo, Bandage Disposable Neonate
29.3 Temp Accessories
29.3.1 Temp Cable Available for Purchase
MR420B 040-001235-00 2-pin Temperature adapter cable Reusable /
29.3.2 Temp Probes Available for Purchase
MR401B 0011-30-37392 Temperature probe, endocavity Reusable Adult
MR402B 0011-30-37394 Temperature probe, endocavity Reusable Pediatric/Infant
MR403B 0011-30-37393 Temperature probe, skin surface Reusable Adult
MR404B 0011-30-37395 Temperature probe, skin surface Reusable Pediatric/Infant
MR411 040-003292-00 Temperature probe, esophageal/ Disposable Adult/Pediatric

rectal, 9FR
MR411 040-003294-00 Temperature probe, esophageal/ Disposable Adult/Pediatric

rectal, 9FR, pkg of 20
MR412 040-003293-00 Temp probe, skin surface Disposable All
MR412 040-003295-00 Temp probe, skin surface, pkg of 20 Disposable All
/ 0206-03-0112-02 PROBE,D TEMP,ES400-12 (box of 20) Disposable Adult
/ 0206-03-0118-02 PROBE,D TEMP,ES400-18 (box of 20) Disposable Adult
/ 0206-03-0209-02 PROBE,D TEMP,ER 400-9 (box of 20) Disposable Adult
/ 0206-03-0212-02 PROBE,D TEMP,ER400-12 (box of 20) Disposable Adult
/ 0206-03-0300-02 PROBE,D TEMP,STS-400 (box of 20) Disposable Adult
29 - 6
29.4 NIBP Accessories
29.4.1 NIBP Hoses Available for Purchase
CM1903 6200-30-09688 NIBP hose, inbuilt connector, 3m Reusable Adult/Pediatric
CM1901 6200-30-11560 NIBP hose, inbuilt connector, 3m Reusable Neonate
29.4.2 Cuffs Available for Purchase
CM1200 115-002480-00 Cuff, 7-13 cm Reusable Small Infant
CM1201 0010-30-12157 Cuff, 10-19 cm Reusable Infant
CM1202 0010-30-12158 Cuff, 18-26 cm Reusable Pediatric
CM1203 0010-30-12159 Cuff, 25-35 cm Reusable Adult
CM1204 0010-30-12160 Cuff, 33-47 cm Reusable Adult
CM1205 0010-30-12161 Cuff, 46-66 cm Reusable Adult thigh
CM1301 115-027713-00 Cuff, 10-19 cm, bladderless Reusable Infant
CM1302 115-027714-00 Cuff, 18-26 cm, bladderless Reusable Small Adult
CM1303 115-027715-00 Cuff, 25-35 cm, bladderless Reusable Adult
CM1305 115-027717-00 Cuff, 46-66 cm, bladderless Reusable Adult thigh
CM1501 115-027556-00 Cuff, 10-19 cm, bladderless Disposable Child
CM1502 115-027557-00 Cuff, 18-26 cm, bladderless Disposable Small adult
CM1503 115-027558-00 Cuff, 25-35 cm, bladderless Disposable Adult
CM1504 115-027559-00 Cuff, 33-47 cm, bladderless Disposable Large adult
CM1505 115-027560-00 Cuff, 46-66 cm, bladderless Disposable Adult thigh
CM1506 115-027561-00 Cuff, 25-35 cm, bladderless, long Disposable Adult
CM1507 115-027562-00 Cuff, 33-47 cm, bladderless, long Disposable Large adult
CM1500A 001B-30-70677 Cuff, 3.1-5.7 cm Disposable Neonate
CM1500B 001B-30-70678 Cuff, 4.3-8.0 cm Disposable Neonate
CM1500C 001B-30-70679 Cuff, 5.8-10.9 cm Disposable Neonate
CM1500D 001B-30-70680 Cuff, 7.1-13.1 cm Disposable Neonate
CM1500E 001B-30-70681 Cuff, 5# Disposable Neonate
29 - 7
29.5 IBP Accessories
29.5.1 IBP Accessories Available for Purchase
IM2202 001C-30-70757 12 Pin IBP cable, Argon Reusable /
IM2201 001C-30-70759 12 Pin IBP cable, ICU Medical Reusable /
IM2211 0010-21-12179 12 Pin IBP cable, Edwards Reusable /
IM2204 040-001029-00 IBP extended cable with dual- Reusable /

receptacle
29.5.2 IBP Accessories Also Compatible
DT-4812 6000-10-02107 Disposable transducer kit, Argon Disposable /
682275 0010-10-12156 Mounting background and accessory Reusable /

for IBP transducer, Argon
42584 0010-10-42638 IBP transducer, ICU Medical Disposable /
42602 M90-000133--- Mounting background and accessory Reusable /

for IBP transducer, ICU Medical
42394 M90-000134--- Mounting clamp for IBP transducer Reusable /

(send with the cable), ICU Medical
29.5.3 ICP Accessories Available for Purchase
82-6653 040-002336-00 Codman ICP sensor kit, Johnson & Disposable /

Johnson, pkg of 1
CP12601 009-005460-00 12 Pin ICP Cable Reusable /
CP12603 040-001368-00 Adapter for Camino cable Reusable /
/ 009-004401-00 ICP adapting cable for Camino Reusable /
29.6 C.O. Accessories Available for Purchase
CO7702 0010-30-42743 12Pin C.O. cable, Edwards Reusable /
/ 0012-00-1519 Cable, bath probe adapter Reusable /
SP4042 6000-10-02079 In-line injection temperature sensor, Reusable /

BD
SP5045 6000-10-02080 In-line injection temperature sensor Disposable /

housing, BD, pkg of 25
MX387 6000-10-02081 12cc control syringe w/Rotator Disposable /

(MEDEX MX387), pkg of 20
/ 0012-00-1520 In-line inject temperature probe Reusable /
29 - 8
29.7 CO2 Accessories
29.7.1 Sidestream CO2 Accessories Available for Purchase
4000 M02A-10-25937 CO2 Nasal sample cannula, 7'’ line Disposable Adult
4100 M02A-10-25938 CO2 Nasal sample cannula, 7'’ line Disposable Pediatric
4200 M02B-10-64509 CO2 Nasal sample cannula, 7'’ line Disposable Neonatal
60-15200-00 9200-10-10533 Sampling line, 2.5 m Disposable Adult/Pediatric
60-15300-00 9200-10-10555 Sampling line, 2.5 m Disposable Neonatal
60-14100-00 9000-10-07486 Dryline airway adapter, straight Disposable Adu/Ped
040-001187-00 040-001187-00 Airway Adapter Disposable Neonatal
60-14200-00 9000-10-07487 Dryline airway adapter, elbow Disposable /
100-000080-00 100-000080-00 Watertrap, DRYLINE II, pkg of 10 Reusable Adult/Pediatric
100-000081-00 100-000081-00 Watertrap, DRYLINE II, pkg of 10 Reusable Neonatal
29.7.2 Microstream CO2 Accessories Also Compatible
XS04620 0010-10-42560 FilterLine Set Disposable Adult, pediatric
XS04624 0010-10-42561 FilterLine H Set Disposable Adult, pediatric
006324 0010-10-42562 FilterLine H Set Disposable Neonate
007768 0010-10-42563 FilterLine Set, long Disposable Adult, pediatric
007737 0010-10-42564 FilterLine H Set, long Disposable Adult, pediatric
007738 0010-10-42565 FilterLine H Set, long Disposable Neonate
009818 0010-10-42566 S CapnoLine Plus Disposable Adult
007266 0010-10-42567 Smart CapnoLine Disposable Pediatric
009822 0010-10-42568 S CapnoLine Plus O2 Disposable Adult
007269 0010-10-42569 Smart CapnoLine O2 Disposable Pediatric
009826 0010-10-42570 S CapnoLine Plus O2, long Disposable Adult
007743 0010-10-42571 S CapnoLine O2, long Disposable Pediatric
008177 0010-10-42572 CapnoLine H Disposable Adult
008178 0010-10-42573 CapnoLine H Disposable Pediatric
008179 0010-10-42574 CapnoLine H Disposable Neonate
008180 0010-10-42575 CapnoLine H O2 Disposable Adult
008181 0010-10-42576 CapnoLine H O2 Disposable Pediatric
008174 0010-10-42577 NIV-Line Disposable Adult
008175 0010-10-42578 NIV-Line Disposable Pediatric
29 - 9
29.7.3 Mainstream CO2 Accessories
6063 0010-10-42662 Airway adapter Disposable Adult, pediatric
6421 0010-10-42663 Airway adapter, with mouthpiece Disposable Adult, pediatric
6312 0010-10-42664 Airway adapter Disposable Pediatric, neonate
7007 0010-10-42665 Airway adapter Reusable Adult, pediatric
7053 0010-10-42666 Airway adapter Reusable Neonate
9960LGE 0010-10-42669 CAPNOSTAT CO2 large adult mask Disposable Adult
9960STD 0010-10-42670 CAPNOSTAT CO2 standard adult Disposable Adult

mask
9960PED 0010-10-42671 CAPNOSTAT CO2 pediatric mask Disposable Pediatric
6934 0010-10-42667 Cable management straps (5 pcs) Reusable /
8751 0010-10-42668 Cable holding clips (5 pcs) Reusable /
1036698 6800-30-50760 CAPNOSTAT CO2 sensor Reusable /
29.8 AG Accessories
60-15200-00 9200-10-10533 Sampling line, 2.5 m Disposable Adult/Pediatric
60-15300-00 9200-10-10555 Sampling line, DRYLINE, 2.5m Disposable Neonate
60-14100-00 9000-10-07486 DRYLINE airway adapter, straight Disposable Adult/Pediatric
60-14200-00 9000-10-07487 DRYLINE airway adapter, elbow Disposable Adult/Pediatric
100-000080-00 100-000080-00 DRYLINE II water trap Reusable Adult/Pediatric
100-000081-00 100-000081-00 DRYLINE II water trap Reusable Neonate
60-13100-00 9200-10-10530 DRYLINE water trap Reusable Adult
60-13200-00 9200-10-10574 DRYLINE water trap Reusable Neonate
040-001187-00 040-001187-00 Airway adapter Reusable /
29.9 BeneLink Accessories
Part No. Description
009-001767-00 Serial port adapting cable, type A
009-001768-00 Serial port adapting cable, type B
009-001769-00 Serial port adapting cable, type C
009-002943-00 Serial port adapting cable, type D
009-004613-00 Serial port adapting cable, type E
009-008485-00 Serial port adapting cable, type F
115-011465-00 ID Adapter kit (contains ID Adapter with label and RJ45 cable with label)
115-007277-00 ID Adapter
29 - 10
047-004857-00 ID adapter label
047-004859-00 Network line label
009-001770-00 RJ45 connecting cable
29.10 External Modules
Module Part No. Comments
C.O. module 115-047283-00 Supports C.O. monitoring
IBP module 115-047286-00 Supports IBP monitoring
Microstream CO2 module 6800-30-50820 Supports CO2 monitoring
Sidestream CO2 module 115-049134-00 Supports CO2 monitoring, with adult and pediatric
accessories
Sidestream CO2 module 115-053711-00 Supports CO2 monitoring, with neonatal accessories
Sidestream CO2/O2 115-049136-00 Supports CO2 monitoring, integrates O2 (paramagnetic)

module monitoring, with adult and pediatric accessories
Sidestream CO2/O2 115-053712-00 Supports CO2 monitoring, integrates O2 (paramagnetic)

module monitoring, with neonatal accessories
AG module 115-051561-00 Supports AG monitoring, integrates O2 (paramagnetic)

monitoring
BeneLink module 115-053710-00 Connects external devices
29.11 Mount and Mounting Accessories
045-000915-00 T5 rolling stand
045-000955-00 T5 trolley tray kit
045-003425-00 GCX VHM/M series arm adapter
045-003240-00 GCX M Series 12" arm with transition plate
045-000924-00 iPM/iMEC rolling stand
045-000953-00 iPM/iMEC trolley tray kit
045-000931-00 iPM/iMEC wall mount bracket
045-002877-00 VS600/VS900 new value stand
045-002936-00 No handle basket pack
8000-30-90170 Bedrail clamp
045-003255-00 N12 roll stands (With iPM/iMEC adapter)
8000-30-90169 Bedrail hook
29 - 11
29.12 Miscellaneous Accessories
009-001075-00 Power cord, 250 V, 10 A, 3 m, Brazil
009-001791-00 Power cord, 250 V, 16 A, 3 m, South Africa
009-002636-00 Power cord, 10 A, 1.5 m, Australia standard
009-007190-00 Power cord, 3 m, India
009-007191-00 Power cord, 1.8 m, Switzerland
509B-10-05996 Power cord, 10 A, 250 V, 1.6 m, China
DA8K-10-14452 Power cord, USA
DA8K-10-14453 Power cord, UK
DA8K-10-14454 Power cord, Europe
022-000179-00 Lithium-ion battery, 10.95 V, 2600 mAh, LI13I001A
022-000008-00 Lithium-ion battery, 10.95 V, 4500 mAh, LI23S002A
022-000248-00 Smart Lithium-ion battery, 10.8 V, 5600 mAh, LI23I003A
023-000217-00 USB flash drive, 4 GB, USB2.0
023-000218-00 USB flash drive, 8 GB, USB2.0
023-001523-00 HP LaserJet Printer
115-008393-00 1D Barcode reader
023-001286-00 2D Barcode reader, HS-1M, JADAK
023-001288-00 2D Barcode reader, HS-1R, JADAK
023-001393-00 Remote controller
6800-30-51213 Beneview data output package
115-030320-00 Clinical Scoring Custom CD
009-003116-00 Nurse call cable
009-003117-00 Analog output cable
009-003118-00 Synchronization cable
A30-000001--- Recording paper, 50 mm*20 m
009-003648-00 Cable protecting tube, 20cm&40cm
009-003903-00 Accessories management tape
29 - 12
A Product Specifications
A.1 Monitor Safety Specifications

The monitor is classified, according to IEC 60601-1:
Degree of protection against electrical Type CF defibrillation proof for ECG, Resp, SpO2, NIBP, Temp, IBP, C.O.
shock Type BF defibrillation proof for CO2, AG
Type of protection against electrical shock Class I
Degree of protection against harmful IPX1

ingress of water
Degree of safety of application in the The equipment is not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable
presence of flammable anesthetic mixture anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide
with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide
Mode of operation Continuous
A.2 Physical Specifications
Item Maximum Weight (kg) W × H × D (mm) Comments
ePM 10M main unit 4.5(standard configuration and 269 × 252 × 159 4.0 kg (standard configuration,
recorder, excluding battery, excluding battery, accessories,
accessories and modules) modules and recorder)
IBP module 0.26 136.5 × 40 × 102 /
C.O. module 0.25 136.5 × 40 × 102 /
Microstream CO2 module 0.38 136.5 × 40 × 102 /
Sidestream CO2 module 0.63 136.5 × 40 × 102 With build-in O2 module
AG 1.03 136.5 × 80.5 × 102 With built-in O2 module
A.3 Environmental Specifications
WARNING
• The monitor may not meet the performance specifications if stored or used outside the specified
temperature and humidity ranges. If the performance of the equipment is degraded due to aging or
environmental conditions, contact your service personnel.
• When the monitor and related products have differing environmental specifications, the effective
range for the combined products is that range which is common to the specifications for all
products.
A-1
NOTE
• The environmental specification of unspecified parameter modules are the same as those of the
main unit.
Main Unit
Item Temperature (ºC) Relative humidity Barometric

(noncondensing) (%)
Operating Condition 0 to 40 15 to 95 427.5 to 805.5 mmHg

(0 to 35 configured with (57 to 107.4 kPa)
AG module)
Storage Condition -20 to 60 10 to 95 120 to 805.5 mmHg

(16 to 107.4 kPa)
Microstream CO2 Module

(noncondensing) (%)
Operating Condition 0 to 40 15 to 95 430 to 790 mmHg

(57.3 to 105.3 kPa)
Storage Condition -20 to 60 10 to 95 430 to 790 mmHg

(57.3 to 105.3 kPa)
Sidestream CO2 Module

(noncondensing) (%)

(57.3 to 105.3 kPa)

(57.3 to 105.3 kPa)
Mainstream CO2 Module
Item Temperature (ºC) Relative humidity Barometric (mmHg)

(noncondensing) (%)

(57.3 to 105.3 kPa)

(57.3 to 105.3 kPa)
AG Module

(noncondensing) (%)
Operating Condition 10 to 40 15 to 95 525 to 805.5 mmHg

(70 to 107.4 kPa)
Storage Condition -20 to 60 10 to 95 525 to 805.5 mmHg

(70 to 107.4 kPa)
A-2
A.4 Power Supply Specifications
A.4.1 External Power Supply Specifications
AC Power
Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (±10%)
Input current 2.0 to 0.9 A
Frequency 50/60 Hz (± 3 Hz)
A.4.2 Battery Specifications
Battery LI13I001A Type Rechargeable lithium-Ion battery (non-smart battery)
Voltage 10.95V
Capacity 2600 mAh
Battery LI23S002A Type Rechargeable lithium-Ion battery (non-smart battery)
Voltage 10.95V
Capacity 4500 mAh
Battery LI23I003A Type Smart rechargeable lithium-Ion battery (smart

battery)
Voltage 10.8V
Capacity 5600 mAh
Maximum number of batteries configured ePM 10M: only one battery can be connected.
ePM 12M: at most two batteries can be connected at the same

time, including one battery built inside, the other one
connected from an external battery compartment.
ePM 15M: at most two batteries can be connected at the same

time.
Run time Model ePM 12M/ePM 15M ePM 10M
Battery LI13I001A ≥ 2 hours ≥ 2 hours

(one battery
connected)
Battery LI23S002A ≥ 4 hours ≥ 4 hours

(one battery
connected)
Battery LI23I003A ≥ 4.5 hours ≥ 6 hours

(one battery
connected)
Battery LI23I003A ≥ 9 hours /

(two batteries
connected)
when the monitor is powered by a new fully-charged battery at 25 ºC±5 ºC

with 5-lead ECG and SpO2 cable connected, auto NIBP measurements at an
interval of 15 minutes, and screen brightness set to 1.
Shutdown delay: at least 15 minutes after the low battery alarm first occurs.
A-3
Charge time Battery LI13I001A • No more than 2.5 hours to 90% when the monitor
(one battery is off
connected) • No more than 5 hours to 90% when the monitor is
on
Battery LI23S002A • No more than 5 hours to 90% when the monitor is

(one battery off
connected) • No more than 10 hours to 90% when the monitor
is on
Battery LI23I003A • No more than 5 hours to 90% when the monitor is

(one battery off
is on
Battery LI23I003A • No more than 10 hours to 90% when the monitor

(two batteries is off
is on
A.5 Display Specifications
Screen type Capacitive, multi-point color touchscreen
Screen Size (diagonal) ePM 10M: 10.1 inches
ePM 12M: 12.1 inches
ePM 15M: 15.6 inches
Resolution ePM 10M: 1280 x 800 pixels
ePM 12M: 1280 x 800 pixels
ePM 15M: 1366 x 768 pixels
A.6 Recorder Specifications
Method Thermal dot array
Horizontal resolution 16 dots/mm (25 mm/s paper speed)
Vertical resolution 8 dots/mm
Paper width 50 mm±1mm
Paper length 20 m
Paper speed 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s

Accuracy: ±5%
Number of waveform channels A maximum of 3
A.7 LEDs
Alarm lamp 1 or 2 (three color-coded: red, yellow, and cyan)
Power-on LED 1 (green)
AC power LED 1 (green)
Battery LED 1 (two color-coded: yellow and green)
A-4
A.8 Audio Indicator
Speaker Give alarm tones (45 to 85 dB), reminder tones, key tones, QRS tones;
support PITCH TONE and multi-level tone modulation; alarm tones comply
with IEC 60601-1-8.
A.9 Monitor Interface Specifications
AC power input 1
Network connector 1, standard RJ45 connectors, 100 Base-TX, IEEE 802.3
USB connector 2, USB 2.0
Module rack 1
Multifunctional connector 1
Video output connector 1, 15-pin D-sub
Equipotential grounding terminal 1
A.10 Signal Outputs Specifications
Auxiliary Output
Standard Meets the requirements of IEC 60601-1 for short-circuit protection and
leakage current
ECG Analog Output
Bandwidth Diagnostic mode: 0.05 to 150 Hz

(-3dB; reference frequency: 10Hz) Monitor mode: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Surgical mode: 1 to 20 Hz
ST mode: 0.05 to 40 Hz
Maximum QRS delay 25 ms (in diagnostic mode, and non-paced)
Gain (reference frequency 10Hz) 1V/mV (±5%)
Pace enhancement Signal amplitude: Voh≥2.5V

Pulse width: 10ms±5%
Signal rising and falling time: ≤100μs
IBP Analog Output
Bandwidth (-3dB; reference 0 to 40 Hz

frequency:1Hz)
Maximum transmission delay 30 ms
Gain (reference frequency 1 Hz) 1 V/100 mmHg, ±5%
Nurse Call Signal
Amplitude High level: 3.5 to 5 V, ±5%, providing a minimum of 10 mA output current;

Low level: < 0.5 V, receiving a minimum of 5 mA input current.
Rising and falling time ≤1 ms
Defib Sync Pulse
Output impedance ≤100 ohm
Maximum time delay 35 ms (R-wave peak to leading edge of pulse)
A-5
Amplitude High level: 3.5 to 5 V, ±5%, providing a maximum of 10 mA output current;
Low level: < 0.5 V, receiving a maximum of 5 mA input current.
Pulse width 100 ms ±10%
maximum rising and falling time 1 ms
Alarm Output
Alarm delay time from the monitor to The alarm delay time from the monitor to remote equipment is ≤2 seconds,
remote equipment measured at the monitor signal output connector.
Alarm signal sound pressure level range 45 db(A) to 85 db(A) within a range of one meter
A.11 Data Storage
Trends • Standard-capacity memory card: up to 120 hours’ trend data with the
resolution no less than 1 minute.
• High-capacity memory card: up to 240 hours’ trend data with the
resolution no less than 1 seond, or up to 2400 hours’ trend data with the
resolution no less than 10 minutes.
Events • Standard-capacity memory card: 1000 events, including parameter

alarms, arrhythmia events, technical alarms, and so on.
• High-capacity memory card: 2000 events, including parameter alarms,
arrhythmia events, technical alarms, and so on.
NIBP measurements • Standard-capacity memory card: 1000 sets.

• High-capacity memory card: 3000 sets.
Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG 20 sets

results
Full-disclosure waveforms • Standard-capacity memory card: up to 48 hours for all parameter

waveforms. The specific storage time depends on the waveforms stored
and the number of stored waveforms.
• High-capacity memory card: up to 48 hours for all parameter waveforms.
ST view A maximum of 120 hours’ ST segment waveforms. One group of ST segment

waveforms is stored every minute.
OxyCRG view 400 OxyCRG events.
A.12 Wi-Fi Specifications
A.12.1 Wi-Fi Technical Specifications
Protocol IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
Modulation mode DSSS and OFDM
Operating frequency IEEE 802.11b/g/n (at 2.4G) IEEE 802.11a/n (at 5G)
ETSI: 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz ETSI: 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, 5.47 GHz to
FCC: 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz 5.725 GHz
MIC: 2.4 GHz to 2.495GHz FCC: 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, 5.725 GHz to
5.82 GHz
KC: 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz
MIC: 5.15GHz to 5.35 GHz
KC: 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, 5.47 GHz to 5.725
GHz, 5.725 GHz to 5.82 GHz
Channel spacing IEEE 802.11b/g: 5 MHz

IEEE 802.11n (at 2.4 G): 5 MHz
IEEE802.11a: 20 MHz
IEEE802.11n (at 5 G): 20 MHz
A-6
Wireless baud rate IEEE 802.11b: 1 Mbps to 11 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g: 6 Mbps to 54 Mbps
IEEE 802.11n: 6.5 Mbps to 72.2 Mbps
IEEE 802.11a: 6 Mbps to 54 Mbps
Output power <20dBm (CE requirement, detection mode: RMS)

<30dBm (FCC requirement: detection mode: peak power)
Operating mode Infrastructure
Data security Standards: WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA-Enterprise,WPA2-Enterprise

EAP method: EAP-FAST. EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP-GTC, PEAP- MSCHAPv2,
PEAP-TLS, LEAP
Encryption: TKIP, AES
A.12.2 Wi-Fi Performance Specifications
WARNING
• Do perform all network functions of data communication within an enclosed network.
A.12.2.1 System Capacity and Resistance to Wireless Interference

Meets the following requirements:
■ All the monitors do not encounter communication loss.
■ The total delay of data transmission from the monitor to the CMS: ≤ 2 seconds.
■ The delay for monitor-related settings configured at the CMS to be effective: ≤ 2 seconds.
■ The total delay of data transmission from one monitor to the other: ≤ 2 seconds.
■ The delay for the monitor to reset alarms of another to be effective: ≤ 2 seconds.
Testing conditions are as follows:
■ Number of the monitors supported by a single AP: ≤ 16.
■ Each monitor can communicate with the CMS.
■ Two monitors are used to view other monitors.
■ Only one monitor can transmit history data.
■ The weakest strength of the AP signal where the monitor is located is not less than -65 dBm.
■ The distance between the interfering devices and the monitor is greater than 20 cm. A Wi-Fi interference
(no greater than -85 dBm) in the same channel and a Wi-Fi interference (no greater than -50 dBm) in an
adjacent-channel are presented synchronously. The interfering devices include, but are not limited to, 2.4 G
wireless devices, cellular mobile networks, microwave ovens, interphones, cordless phones, and ESU
equipment. The interfering devices do not include Wi-Fi devices.
A.12.2.2 Wi-Fi Network Stability

The ratio of the communication data loss on the CMS from any monitor does not exceed 0.1% over a 24-hour
period. 12 of the 16 monitors connected to the network roam for 30 times.
Testing conditions are as follows:
■ Number of the monitors supported by a single AP: ≤ 16.
■ Each monitor can communicate with the CMS.
■ Two monitors are used to view other monitors.
■ Only one monitor can transmit history data.
■ The weakest strength of the AP signal where the monitor is located cannot be less than -65 dBm.
A-7
A.12.2.3 Distinct Vision Distance
The distinct vision distance between the monitor and the AP is no less than to 50 meters.
A.13 Measurement Specifications

The adjustable range of alarm limits is the same with the measurement range of signals unless otherwise
specified.
A.13.1 ECG Specifications
ECG
Standards Meet standards of IEC 60601-2-27: 2011 and IEC 60601-2-25: 2011
Lead set 3-lead: I, II, III

5-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
6-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, Va, Vb
12-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6
ECG standard AHA, IEC
Display sensitivity 1.25 mm/mV (×0.125), 2.5 mm/mV (×0.25), 5 mm/mV (×0.5), 10 mm/mV (×1),
20 mm/mV (×2), 40 mm/mV (×4), Auto, less than 5% error
Sweep speed 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s, less than 5% error
Bandwidth (-3dB) Diagnostic mode: 0.05 to 150 Hz

Monitor mode: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Surgical mode: 1 to 20 Hz
ST mode: 0.05 to 40 Hz
High Freq Cut-off (for 350 Hz, 150 Hz, 35 Hz, or 20 Hz, selectable
12-lead ECG analysis)
Common mode rejection ratio Diagnostic mode: >90 dB

Monitor mode: >105 dB (with notch filter on)
Surgical mode: >105 dB (with notch filter on)
ST mode: >105 dB (with notch filter on)
Notch filter 50/60 Hz

Monitor, surgical, and ST mode: notch filter turns on automatically
Diagnostic mode and High Freq Cut-off: notch filter is turned on/off
manually
Differential input impedance ≥5 MΩ
Input signal range ±10 mV (peak-to-peak value)
Accuracy of signal reproduction Use A and D methods based on IEC 60601-2-25 to determine frequency
response.
Electrode offset potential tolerance ±800 mV
Lead-off detection current Measuring electrode: <0.1 μA

Drive electrode: <1 μA
Input offset current ≤0.1 μA, (drive lead≤1μA)
Defibrillation protection Enduring 5000V (360 J) charge without data loss or corruption
Baseline recovery time: <5 s (after defibrillation)
Polarization recovery time: <10 s
Defibrillation energy absorption: ≤10% (100Ω load)
Patient leakage current <10 uA
Calibration signal 1mV (peak-to-peak value) ±5%
A-8
ESU protection Cut mode: 300 W
Coagulate mode: 100 W
Recovery time: ≤10 s
In compliance with the requirements in clause 202.6.2.101 of IEC 60601-2-27
Pace Pulse
Pace pulse markers Pace pulses meeting the following conditions are labelled with a PACE
marker:
Amplitude: ±2 to ±700 mV
Width: 0.1 to 2 ms
Rise time: 10 to 100 μs (no greater than 10% of pulse width)
No overshoot
Pace pulse rejection When tested in accordance with the IEC 60601-2-27: 201.12.1.101.13, the
heart rate meter rejects all pulses meeting the following conditions.
Amplitude: ±2 to ±700 mV
Width: 0.1 to 2 ms
Rise time: 10 to 100 μs (no greater than 10% of pulse width)
No overshoot
HR
Measurement range Neonate: 15 to 350 bpm

Pediatric: 15 to 350 bpm
Adult: 15 to 300 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
Accuracy ±1 bpm or ±1%, whichever is greater.
Sensitivity 200 μV (lead II)
HR averaging method In compliance with the requirements in Clause 201.7.9.2.9.101 b) 3) of IEC

60601-2-27, the following method is used:
If the last 3 consecutive RR intervals are greater than 1200 ms, the 4 most
recent RR intervals are averaged to compute the HR. Otherwise, heart rate is
computed by subtracting the maximum and minimum ones from the most
recent 12 RR intervals and then averaging them.
The HR value displayed on the monitor screen is updated no more than one
second.
Response to irregular rhythm In compliance with the requirements in Clause 201.7.9.2.9.101 b) 4) of IEC
60601-2-27, the heart rate after 20 seconds of stabilization is displayed as
follows:
Ventricular bigeminy (waveform A1): 80±1 bpm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy (waveform A2): 60±1 bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy (waveform A3): 120±1 bpm
Bidirectional systoles (waveform A4): 90±2 bpm
Response time to heart rate change Meets the requirements of IEC 60601-2-27: Clause 201.7.9.2.9.101 b) 5).
From 80 to 120 bpm: less than 11 s

From 80 to 40 bpm: less than 11 s
Time to alarm for tachycardia Meets the requirements in Clause 201.7.9.2.9.101 b) 6) of IEC 60601-2-27.
Waveform
B1h-range: <11 s
B1-range: <11 s
B1d-range: <11 s
B2h-range: <11 s
B2-range: <11 s
B2d-range: <11 s
A-9
Tall T-wave rejection capability When the test is performed based on Clause 201.12.1.101.17 of IEC 60601-2-
27, the heart rate calculation is not affected for QRS of 1 mV amplitude and
100 ms duration, T-wave duration of 180 ms and amplitude lower than 1.2
mV, and QT interval of 350 ms.
Arrhythmia Analysis Classifications Asystole, V-Fib/V-Tac, V-tac, Vent-. Brady, Extreme Tachy, Extreme Brady, Vent
Rhythm, PVCs/min, Pauses/min, Couplet, Bigeminy, Trigeminy, R on T, Run
PVCs, PVC, Tachy, Brady, Missed Beats, Pacer Not Paceing, Pacer Not Capture,
Multiform PVC, Nonsus. V-Tac, Pause, Irr. Rhythm, A-Fib
ST Segment Analysis
Measurement range -2.5 to 2.5 mV RTI
Accuracy -0.8 to 0.8 mV: ±0.02 mV or ±10%, whichever is greater.

Beyond this range: Not specified.
Resolution 0.01mV
QT/QTc Analysis
Measurement range QT: 200 to 800 ms

QTc: 200 to 800 ms
QT-HR: 15 to 150 bpm for adult, 15 to 180 bpm for pediatric and neonate
Accuracy QT: ±30 ms
Resolution QT: 4 ms
QTc: 1 ms
12-lead ECG Interpretation
Sampling rate 1000 samples/s (A/D)

500 samples/s (ECG algorithm)
Amplitude quantisation 24 bits
Alarm limit Range Step
HR High HR≤40bpm: (low limit + 2 bpm) to 40 bpm HR≤40bpm: 1 bpm

HR > 40 bpm: (low limit + 5 bpm) to 295 bpm HR > 40 bpm: 5 bpm
HR Low HR≤40bpm: 16 bpm to (low limit - 2 bpm)

HR > 40 bpm: 40 bpm to (low limit - 5 bpm)
ST High (low limit + 0.2 mV) to 2.0 mV (ST alarm mode: 0.01 mV
Absolute)
0 mV to 2.0 mV (ST alarm mode: Relative)
ST Low -2.0 mV to (high limit - 0.2 mV) (ST alarm mode:

Absolute)
-2.0 mV to 0 mV (ST alarm mode: Relative)
QTc High 200 to 800 ms 10 ms
ΔQTc High 30 to 200 ms
A.13.2 Resp Specifications

Technique Trans-thoracic impedance
Lead Options are lead I, II and Auto.
Respiration excitation waveform <300 μA RMS, 62.8 kHz (±10%)
Minimum respiration impedance 0.3Ω

threshold
Baseline impedance range 200 to 2500Ω (using an ECG cable with 1kΩ resistance)
A - 10
Differential input impedance >2.5 MΩ
Bandwidth 0.2 to 2.5 Hz (-3 dB)
Sweep speed 3mm/s, 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s, less than 10% error
Recovery time <15 s (after defibrillation)
Respiration Rate
Measurement range 0 to 200 rpm
Resolution 1 rpm
Accuracy 0 to 120 rpm: ±1 rpm

121 to 200 rpm: ±2 rpm
Apnea alarm time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
Alarm limit Range (rpm) Step (rpm)
RR High Adult, Pediatric: RR≤20: 1

RR≤20 (low limit + 2) to 20 RR>20: 5
RR>20 (low limit + 5) to 100
Neonate:
RR≤20 (low limit + 2) to 20
RR>20 (low limit + 5) to 150
RR Low RR≤20: 0 to (high limit - 2)

RR>20: 20 to (high limit - 5)
A.13.3 SpO2 Specifications

Refer to Appendix F SpO2 Sensor Accuracy for the clinical study results of SpO2 sensor accuracy.
Alarm limit Range (%) Step (%)
SpO2 High (low limit + 2) to 100 1
SpO2 Low Masimo: (Desat+1) to (high limit - 2)

Nellcor: (Desat+1) or 20 (whichever is greater) to
(high limit - 2)
SpO2 Desat Low 0 to (high limit - 1)
Masimo SpO2 Module
Standards meets the requirements of ISO 80601-2-61: 2011
Measurement range 1 to 100%
Resolution 1%
Response time ≤20 s (normal perfusion, no disturbance, SpO2 value sudden changes from
70% to 100%)
Accuracy1 70 to 100%: ±2% (measured without motion in adult/pediatric mode)

70 to 100%: ±3% (measured without motion in neonate mode)
70 to 100%: ±3% (measured with motion)
1% to 69%: Not specified.
Refresh rate ≤1s
SpO2 averaging time 2-4 s, 4-6 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 16 s
Low perfusion conditions Pulse amplitude: >0.02%

Light penetration: >5%
Low perfusion SpO2 accuracy2 ±2%
A - 11
PI measurement range 0.02 to 20%
1
The Masimo pulse oximeter with sensors have been validated for no motion accuracy in human blood studies on healthy
adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies in the range of 70% to 100% SpO2 against a laboratory co-oximeter and ECG
monitor. This variation equals plus or minus one standard deviation. Plus or minus one standard deviation encompasses
68% of the population. One percent was added to the accuracies for neonatal sensors to account for accuracy variation due
to properties of fetal hemoglobin.
The Masimo pulse oximeter with sensors has been validated for motion accuracy in human blood studies on healthy adult
volunteers in induced hypoxia studies while performing rubbing and tapping motions at 2 to 4 Hz. At an amplitude of 1 to
2 cm and non-repetitive motion between 1 to 5 Hz. At an amplitude of 2 to 3 cm in induced hypoxia studies in the range of
70% to 100% SpO2 against a laboratory co-oximeter and ECG monitor. This variation equals plus or minus one standard
deviation. Plus or minus one standard deviation encompasses 68% of the population.
2
The Masimo pulse oximeter has been validated for low perfusion accuracy in bench top testing against a Biotek Index 2
simulator and Masimo's simulator with signal strengths of greater than 0.02% and a % transmission of greater than 5% for
saturations ranging from 70 to 100%. This variation equals plus or minus one standard deviation. Plus or minus one
standard deviation encompasses 68% of the population.
Mindray SpO2 Module
Standards Meet standards of ISO 80601-2-61: 2011
*Measurement accuracy verification: The SpO2 accuracy has been verified in human experiments by comparing with
arterial blood sample reference measured with a CO-oximeter. Pulse oximeter measurement are statistically distributed
and about two-thirds of the measurements are expected to come within the specified accuracy range compared to CO-
oximeter measurements.
Resolution 1%
Response time < 30 s (normal perfusion, no disturbance, SpO2 value sudden changes from
70% to 100%)
Accuracy 70 to 100%: ±2% (adult/pediatric mode)

70 to 100%: ±3% (neonate mode)
* One percent was added to the accuracies for neonatal sensors to account for accuracy variation due to properties of fetal
hemoglobin. Studies were performed to validate the accuracy of Pulse Oximeter with neonatal SpO2 sensors by contrast
with a CO-Oximeter. Some neonates aged from 1 day to 30 days with a gestation age of 22 weeks to full term were involved
in this study. The statistical analysis of data of this study shows the accuracy (Arms) is within the stated accuracy
specification. Please see the following table.
Sensor type Totally neonates Data Arms
518B 97 (51 male & 46 female) 200 pairs 2.38%
520N 122 (65 male & 57 female) 200 pairs 2.88%
The Pulse Oximeter with neonatal SpO2 sensors was also validated on adult subjects.
Refreshing rate ≤1 s
Sensitivity High, Medium, Low
PI
Measurement range 0.05 to 20%
Resolution 0.05%~9.99%: 0.01%

10.0%~20.0%: 0.1%
Nellcor SpO2 Module
Resolution 1%
A - 12
Response time ≤30 s (normal perfusion, no disturbance, SpO2 value sudden change from
70% to 100%)
Accuracy 70 to 100%: ±2% (adult/pediatric)

70 to 100%: ±3% (neonate)
When the SpO2 sensor is applied for neonatal patients as indicated, the specified accuracy range is increased by ±1%, to
compensate for the theoretical effect on oximeter measurements of fetal hemoglobin in neonatal blood.
A.13.4 PR Specifications
PR High PR≤40bpm: (low limit + 2 bpm) to 40 bpm PR≤40: 1

PR > 40 bpm: (low limit + 5 bpm) to 295 bpm PR>40: 5
PR Low PR≤40bpm: 16 bpm to (high limit - 2 bpm)

PR > 40 bpm: 40 bpm to (high limit - 5 bpm)
PR from Masimo SpO2
Measurement range 25 to 240 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
Response time ≤20 s (with normal perfusion, no disturbance, and a PR value transition from
25 to 220 bpm)
Accuracy ±3 bpm (measured without motion)

±5 bpm (measured with motion)
Refresh rate ≤1 s
PR from Mindray SpO2 Module
Resolution 1 bpm
Response time <30 s (normal perfusion, no disturbance, PR value sudden changes from 25
to 220bpm)
Accuracy ±3 bpm
PR from Nellcor SpO2 Module
Resolution 1 bpm
Response time ≤30 s (normal perfusion, no disturbance, PR value sudden change from 25
to 250 bpm)
Accuracy 20 to 250 bpm: ±3 bpm

251 to 300 bpm, not specified
PR from NIBP Module
A - 13
Measurement range 30 to300 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
Accuracy ±3bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater
PR from IBP Module
Resolution 1 bpm
Accuracy ±1 bpm or ±1%, whichever is greater
A.13.5 Temp Specifications

Standard Meet the standard of ISO 80601-2-56: 2009
Technique Thermal resistance
Operating mode Direct mode
Measurement range 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
Resolution 0.1°C
Accuracy ±0.1 °C or ±0.2 °F (excluding probe error)
Minimum time for accurate measurement Body surface: <100 s

Body cavity: <80 s
TXX High (XX refers to temperature site) (low limit +1.0) to 50.0 °C 0.1 °C
(low limit +2.0) to 122.0 °F 0.1 °F
TXX Low (XX refers to temperature site) 0.1 to (high limit - 1.0) °C
32.2 to (high limit - 2.0) °F
TD High 0.1 to 50.0 °C

0.2 to 90.0 °F
A.13.6 NIBP Specifications

Standard Meet standard of ISO 80601-2-30: 2013
Technique Oscillometry
Mode of operation Manual, Auto, STAT, Sequence
Auto mode repetition intervals 1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240 or 480 min
STAT mode cycle time 5 min
Max measurement time Adult, Pediatric: 180 s

Neonate: 90 s
Heart rate range 30 to 300 bpm
Measurement ranges Adult Pediatric Neonate

(mmHg)
Systolic: 25 to 290 25 to 240 25 to 140
Diastolic: 10 to 250 10 to 200 10 to 115
Mean: 15 to 260 15 to 215 15 to 125
A - 14
Accuracy Max mean error: ±5 mmHg
Max standard deviation: 8 mmHg
Resolution 1mmHg
Initial cuff inflation pressure range Adult: 80 to 280

(mmHg) Pediatric: 80 to 210
Neonate: 60 to 140
Default initial cuff inflation pressure Adult: 160

(mmHg) Pediatric: 140
Neonate: 90
Software overpressure protection Adult: 297±3 mmHg

Pediatric: 297±3 mmHg
Neonate: 147±3 mmHg
Static pressure measurement range 0 mmHg to 300 mmHg
Static pressure measurement accuracy ±3 mmHg
Alarm limit Range (mmHg) Step (mmHg)
NIBP-S High Adult: (low limit + 5) to 290 NIBP ≤ 50: 1

Pediatric: (low limit + 5) to 240 NIBP > 50: 5
Neonate: (low limit + 5) to 140
NIBP-S Low 25 to (high limit - 5)
NIBP-M High Adult: (low limit + 5) to 260

Pediatric: (low limit + 5) to 215
NIBP-M Low 15 to (high limit - 5)
NIBP-D High Adult: (low limit + 5) to 250

Pediatric: (low limit + 5) to 200
NIBP-D Low 10 to (high limit - 5)
*Measurement accuracy verification: In adult and pediatric modes, the blood pressure measurements measured
with this device are in compliance with the Standard for Non-invasive sphygmomanometers (ISO 81060-2)in
terms of mean error and standard deviation by comparing with intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements
(depending on the configuration) in a typical patient population. For auscultatory reference, the 5th Korotkoff
sound was used to determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements measured with this device are in compliance with the
American National Standard for Non-invasive sphygmomanometers (ISO 81060-2) in terms of mean error and
standard deviation by comparing with intra-arterial measurements (depending on the configuration) in a typical
patient population.
A.13.7 IBP Specifications

Standard Meet the standard of IEC 60601-2-34: 2011
Technique Direct invasive measurement
IBP
Measurement range -50 to 360 mmHg
Resolution 1 mmHg
Accuracy ±2% or ±1 mmHg, whichever is greater (excluding sensor error)
A - 15
PPV
Measurement range 0% ~ 50%
Pressure transducer
Excitement voltage 5 VDC, ±2%
Sensitivity 5 μV/V/mmHg
Zero adjustment range ±200 mmHg
Impedance range 300 to 3000Ω
Volume displacement <0.04 mm3 /100 mmHg
Alarm limit Range (mmHg) Step (mmHg)
Sys High IBP ≤ 50: (low limit + 2) to 50 IBP ≤ 50: 1

IBP > 50: (low limit + 5) to 360 IBP > 50: 5
Mean High
Dia High
Sys Low IBP ≤ 50: -50 to (high limit - 2)

IBP > 50: 50 to (high limit - 5)
Mean Low
Dia Low
Art-S Extreme High High limit to 360 IBP ≤ 50: 1

IBP > 50: 5
Art-M Extreme High
Art-D Extreme High
Art-S Extreme Low -50 to low limit
Art-M Extreme Low
Art-D Extreme Low
A.13.8 C.O. Specifications

Measurement method Thermodilution method
Measurement range C.O.: 0.1 to 20 L/min

TB: 23 to 43 °C
TI: 0 to 27 °C
Resolution C.O.: 0.1 L/min

TB, TI: 0.1 °C
Accuracy C.O.: ±5% or ±0.1 L /min, whichever is greater

TB, TI: ±0.1 °C (without sensor)
Repeatability C.O.: ±2% or ±0.1 L/min, whichever is greater
Alarm range TB: 23 to 43 °C
TB High (low limit + 1) to 43 °C 0.1 °C

(low limit + 2) to 109.4 °F 0.1 °F
TB Low 23 to (high limit - 1) °C

73.4 to (high limit - 2) °F
A - 16
A.13.9 CO2 Specifications
Measurement mode Sidestream, microstream, mainstream
Technique Infrared absorption
Apnea time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
EtCO2 High (low limit + 2) to 99 mmHg 1 mmHg
EtCO2 Low 1 to (high limit - 2)mmHg
FiCO2 High 1 to 99 mmHg
EtO2 High (low limit + 2%) to 100% 1%
EtO2 Low 18% to (high limit - 2)%
FiO2 High (low limit + 2%) to 100%
FiO2 Low 0% to (high limit - 2)%
Sidestream CO2 Module
CO2 Measurement range 0 to 150 mmHg
CO2 absolute accuracy* Full accuracy mode:

0 to 40 mmHg: ± 2 mmHg
41 to 76 mmHg: ±5% of reading
77 to 150 mmHg: ±10% of reading
ISO accuracy mode: add ±2mmHg to the full accuracy mode
Inaccuracy specifications are affected by the breath rate and I:E. The EtCO2 accuracy is within specification for breath rate ≤
60 rpm and I/E ratio ≤ 1:1, or breath rate ≤ 30 rpm and I/E ratio ≤ 2:1.
CO2 resolution 1 mmHg
O2 measurement range 0 to 100%
O2 absolute accuracy 0≤O2 concentration≤25%: ±1%

25<O2 concentration≤80%: ±2%
80<O2 concentration≤100%: ±3%
O2 resolution 0.1%
Accuracy drift Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours
Sample flowrate For sidestream CO2 module without O2 monitoring function:

Connected a DRYLINE II watertrap for adult and pediatric patient: 120 ml/
min
Connected a DRYLINE II watertrap for neonatal patient: 90 ml/min or 70 ml/
min
For sidestream CO2 module with O2 monitoring function:
Connected a DRYLINE II watertrap for adult and pediatric patient: 120 ml/
min
Connected a DRYLINE II watertrap for neonatal patient: 90 ml/min
Sample flowrate tolerance ±15% or ±15 ml/min, whichever is greater.
Start-up time Maximum: 90 s

Typically: 20 s
A - 17
Response time For CO2 measurement (without O2 measurement):
Measured with a DRYLINE II neonatal watertrap and a 2.5-meter neonatal
sampling line:
≤5.0 s @ 70 ml/min
≤4.5 s @ 90 ml/min
Measured with a DRYLINE II adult watertrap and a 2.5-meter adult sampling
line:
≤5.0 s @ 120 ml/min
For CO2 measurement (with O2 measurement):

sampling line:
≤4.5 s@90 ml/min.
line:
≤5 s@120 ml/min
For O2 measurements:
sampling line:
≤4.5 s @ 90 ml/min
line:
≤5 s@120 ml/min
Rise time For CO2 measurement (without O2 measurement):

sampling line:
≤250 ms@70 ml/min.
≤250 ms@90 ml/min.
line:
≤300 ms@120 ml/min
For CO2 measurement (with O2 measurement):

sampling line:
≤250 ms@90 ml/min.
line:
≤300 ms@120 ml/min
≤240 ms@150 ml/min
For O2 measurements:
sampling line:
≤800 ms@90 ml/min.
line:
≤750 ms@120 ml/min
awRR measurement range 0 to 150 rpm
awRR measurement precision ≤60 rpm: ±1

61 to 150 rpm: ±2
awRR resolution 1 rpm
Data sample rate 50 Hz
Effect of interference gases on CO2 measurements
Gas Concentration (%) Quantitative effect*
A - 18
O2 ≤100 ±1 mmHg
N2O ≤60
Hal ≤4
Sev ≤5
Iso ≤5
Enf ≤5
Des ≤15 ±2 mmHg
*: means an extra error should be added in case of gas interference when CO2 measurements are performed between 0 to
40mmHg.
Effect of interference gases on O2 measurements
Gas Quantitative effect
CO2 0.2%
N2O 0.2%
Hal, Des, Sev, Iso, Enf 1%
Microstream CO2 Module
Accuracy* 0 to 38 mmHg: ±2 mmHg

39 to 150 mmHg: ±5% of the reading (0.08% increased in error for
every 1 mmHg if the reading is more than 38
mmHg)
* Accuracy applies for respiration rate up to 80 rpm. For respiration rate above 80 rpm and EtCO2 exceeding 18 mmHg, the
accuracy is 4 mmHg or ±12% of the reading, whichever is greater. For respiration rate above 60 rpm, the above accuracy
can be achieved by using the FilterLine H Set for Infant/Neonatal (Model: 006324). In the presence of interfering gases, the
above accuracy is maintained to within 4%.
Resolution 1 mmHg
Sample flow rate +15 ml/min

50
-7.5
Initialization time 30 s (typical)

180 s (maximum)
Response time 2.9 s (typical)

(The response time is the sum of the rise time and the delay time when
using a FilterLine of standard length)
Rise time: <190 ms (10% to 90%)
Delay time: 2.7 s (typical)
awRR measurement accuracy 0 to 70 rpm: ±1 rpm

71 to 120 rpm: ±2 rpm
121 to 150 rpm: ±3 rpm
A - 19
Mainstream CO2 Module
Accuracy 0 to 40 mmHg: ±2 mmHg

41 to 70 mmHg: ±5% of the reading
Resolution 1 mmHg
Rise time <60 ms
awRR measurement accuracy ±1 rpm
A.13.10 AG Specifications
Technique Infrared absorption, paramagnetic properties for O2 monitoring
Warm-up time Iso accuracy mode: 45 s

Full accuracy mode: 10 min
Sample flow rate Adult, Pediatric: 200 ml/min

Neonate: 120 ml/min
Accuracy: ±10 ml/min or ±10%, whichever is
greater
Measurement range CO2: 0 to 30%

O2 : 0 to 100%
N2O: 0 to 100%
Des: 0 to 30%
Sev: 0 to 30%
Enf: 0 to 30%
Iso: 0 to 30%
Hal: 0 to 30%
awRR: 2 to 100 rpm
Resolution CO2: 0.1%

O2 : 1%
N2O: 1%
Des: 0.1%
Sev: 0.1%
Enf: 0.1%
Iso: 0.1%
Hal: 0.1%
awRR: 1 rpm
Iso accuracy As full accuracy specifications, but derated as follows:

Add ±0.3%ABS to accuracy for CO2
Add ±8%REL to accuracy for all anesthetic gases
N2O accuracy is ±(8%REL+2%ABS)
A - 20
Full accuracy Gases Range (%REL)1 Accuracy (%ABS)
CO2 0≤CO2≤1 ±0.1

1<CO2≤5 ±0.2
5<CO2≤7 ±0.3
7<CO2≤10 ±0.5
CO2>10 Not specified
N2 O 0 to 20 ±2
20 to 100 ±3
O2 0 to 25 ±1
25 to 80 ±2
80 to 100 ±3
Des 0 to 1 ±0.15
1 to 5 ±0.2
5 to 10 ±0.4
10 to 15 ±0.6
15 to 18 ±1
>18 Not specified
Sev 0 to 1 ±0.15
1 to 5 ±0.2
5 to 8 ±0.4
>8 Not specified
Enf, Iso, Hal 0 to 1 ±0.15

1 to 5 ±0.2
>5 Not specified
awRR 2 to 60 rpm ±1 rpm

>60 rpm Not specified
Note1: The highest GAS LEVEL for a single halogenated anaesthetic gas in a
gas mixture that is concealed when the anaesthetic concentration falls is
0.15/0.3% (Full/ISO accuracy).
Apnea alarm time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
Rise time Gas sample flow rate 120ml/min, using a DRYLINE II neonatal watertrap and
(10% ~ 90%) sampling line (2.5m):
CO2 ≤250 ms
N2 O ≤250 ms
Hal, Iso, Sev, Des ≤300 ms
Enf ≤350 ms
O2 ≤600 ms
Gas sample flow rate 200ml/min, using the adult DRYLINE II water trap and
sampling line (2.5m):
CO2 ≤250 ms
N2 O ≤250 ms
O2 ≤500 ms
Hal, Iso, Sev, Des ≤300 ms
Enf ≤350 ms
Delay time <4 s
A - 21
Response time Measured with a DRYLINE II neonatal watertrap and a 2.5-meter neonatal
sampling line:
120 ml/min:
CO2: ≤4 s
N2O: ≤4.2 s
O2 : ≤4 s
Hal, Iso, Sev, Des, Enf: ≤4.4 s

line:
200 ml/min:
CO2: ≤4.2s
N2O: ≤4.3s
Hal, Iso, Sev, Des, Enf: ≤4.5s
O2 : ≤4s
Anesthetic agent limit Primary anesthetic agent

In full accuracy mode: 0.15%,
Secondary anesthetic agent:

In full accuracy mode: 5% of primary agent if primary agent is greater than
10%, 0.3% if primary agent is less than or equal to 10%.
Inaccuracy specifications are affected by the breath rate and I:E change. The end-tidal gas reading is within specification for
breath rate below 15BPM and I:E ratio smaller than 1:1 relative to the gas readings without breath; Add ±6%REL to
inaccuracy for HAL and O2 for breath rate larger than 15 BPM; Add ±6%REL to inaccuracy for all gases for breath rate larger
than 30 BPM (inaccuracy for HAL and O2 are unspecified in this case); inaccuracy is unspecified for breath rate larger than 60
BPM.
Effect of interference gases on AG measurements
Gas Concentration Quantitative effect(%ABS)3)

(%)
CO2 N2 O Agent 1) O2
CO2 / / 0.1 0 0.2
N2O / 0.1 / 0.1 0.2

1) 2)
Agent / 0.1 0.1 0.1 1
Xenon <100% 0.1 0 0 0.5
Helium <50% 0.1 0 0 0.5
Ethanol <0.1% 0 0 0 0.5
Acetone <1% 0.1 0.1 0 0.5
Methane <1% 0.1 0 0 0.5
Saturated Isopropanol vapour / 0.1 0 0 0.5
Metered dose inhaler propellants, / Unspecifie Unspecifie Unspecifie Unspecifie

d d d d
O2 / 0.2 0.2 1.0 /
1) Agent represents one of Des, Iso, Enf, Sev, and Hal.

2) Multiple agent interference on CO2, N2O and O2 is typically the same as single agent interference.
3) For CO2, N2O and Agents, maximum interference from each gas at concentrations within specified accuracy ranges for
each gas. The total interference of all gases is never larger than 5%REL.
A - 22
EtCO2 High (low limit + 2) to 99 mmHg 1 mmHg
EtCO2 Low 1 to (high limit - 2)mmHg
FiCO2 High 1 to 99 mmHg
EtO2 High (low limit + 2%) to 100% 1%
EtO2 Low 18% to (high limit - 2)%
FiO2 High (low limit + 2%) to 100%
FiO2 Low 0% to (high limit - 2)%
EtN2O High (low limit + 2) to 100% 1%
EtN2O Low 0 to (high limit - 2)%
FiN2O High (low limit + 2) to 100%
FiN2O Low 0 to (high limit - 2)%
EtHal/Enf/Iso High (low limit + 0.2) to 5.0% 0.1%
EtHal/Enf/Iso Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
FiHal/Enf/Iso High (low limit + 0.2) to 5.0%
FiHal/Enf/Iso Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
EtSev High (low limit + 0.2) to 8.0% 0.1%
EtSev Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
FiSev High (low limit + 0.2) to 8.0%
FiSev Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
EtDes High (low limit + 0.2) to 18.0% 0.1%
EtDes Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
FiDes High (low limit + 0.2) to 18.0%
FiDes Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
A - 23
B EMC and Radio Regulatory Compliance
B.1 EMC
The device meets the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2: 2014.
WARNING
• Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified or provided by the
manufacturer of this equipment could result in increased electromagnetic emissions or decreased
electromagnetic immunity of this equipment and result in improper operation.
• The non-ME EQUIPMENT (e.g. ITE) that is a part of an ME SYSTEM may be disrupted by the
electromagnetic interference of nearby equipment. It may be necessary to take mitigation
measures, such as re-orienting or relocating the non-ME EQUIPMENT or shielding the location.
• Use of this equipment adjacent to or stacked with other equipment should be avoided because it
could result in improper operation. If such use is necessary, this equipment and the other equipment
should be observed to verify that they are operating normally.
• This device is intended for use in professional healthcare facility environment and home healthcare
environment. If it is used in special environment, such as magnetic resonance imaging environment,
the equipment/system may be disrupted by the operation of nearby equipment.
• Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as antenna cables and external
antennas) should be used no closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any part of the this device, including
cables specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the performance of this equipment
could result.
Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Emissions
The device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device
should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emission tests Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Conducted and radiated RF Group 1 The device uses RF energy only for its internal function.
EMISSIONS CISPR 11 Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to
cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
Conducted and radiated RF Class A The device is suitable for use in all establishments other than
EMISSIONS CISPR 11 domestic and those directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
Harmonic distortion Class A purposes
EMISSIONS IEC61000-3-2
Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker Complies

EMISSIONS IEC 61000-3-3
If the system is operated within the electromagnetic environment listed in Table Guidance and Declaration -
Electromagnetic Immunity, the system will remain safe and provide the following essential performance:
■ Operating mode
■ Accuracy
■ Function
■ Accessories identification
■ Data stored
■ Alarm
■ Detect for connection
B-1
NOTE
• If the essential performance is lost or degraded, it may be necessary to take mitigation measures,
such as re-orienting or relocating the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM or shielding the location or
stopping using the monitor and contact the service personnel.
• The device needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service
according to the EMC information provided below.
• Other devices may interfere with this device even though they meet the requirements of CISPR.
• When the inputted signal is below the minimum amplitude provided in technical specifications,
erroneous measurements could result.
• The EMISSIONS characteristics of this device make it suitable for use in industrial areas and hospitals
(CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a residential environment (for which CISPR 11 class B is normally
required) this device might not offer adequate protection to radio-frequency communication
services. The user might need to take mitigation measures, such as relocating or re-orienting the
device.
Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity
The device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device
should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Electrostatic ±8 kV contact ±8 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic

discharge (ESD) IEC ±15 kV air ±15 kV air tile. If floors are covered with synthetic
61000-4-2 material, the relative humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a
transient/burst IEC supply lines supply lines typical commercial or hospital environment.
61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/ ±1 kV for input/
output lines output lines
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line(s) to line(s) ±1 kV line(s) to line(s)

±2 kV line(s) to earth ±2 kV line(s) to earth
Voltage dips and 0% UT for 0.5 cycle: at 0% UT for 0.5 cycle: at Mains power quality should be that of a
voltage interruptions 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, typical commercial or hospital environment. If
IEC 61000-4-11 225°, 270° and 315° 225°, 270° and 315° the user of our product requires continued
operation during power mains interruptions,
it is recommended that our product be
0% UT for 1 cycle and 0% UT for 1 cycle and
powered from an uninterruptible power
70% UT for 25/30 70% UT for 25/30 supply or a battery.
cycles: at 0° cycles: at 0°
0% UT for 250/300 0% UT for 250/300

cycle cycle
RATED power 30 A/m 30 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at

frequency magnetic 50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz levels characteristic of a typical location in a
fields typical commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
Note: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
B-2
Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity
The device is intended for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The customer or the user of the device should
assure that it is used in such an environment as described below.
Immunity test IEC60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Conducted 3 Vrms 3Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications

disturbances induced 150 kHz to 80 MHz equipment should be used no closer to any
by RF fields part of the system, including cables, than the
80% AM at 1 kHz
IEC61000-4-6 recommended separation distance calculated
6 Vrms 6 Vrms from the equation appropriate for the
frequency of the transmitter. Recommended
in ISM bands
between 0.15 MHz separation distances:
and 80 MHz d = 1.2 P
80% AM at 1 kHz
Radiated RF EM fields 3 V/m 3V/m Recommended separation distances:

IEC61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2,7 GHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz: d = 1.2 P
80% AM at 1 kHz 800MHz - 2.7GHz: d = 2.3 P
Where, P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in meters
(m)b.
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site
surveya should be less than the compliance
level in each frequency rangeb.
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked with
the following symbol:
Proximity fields from 27 V/m 27 V/m

RF wireless 385 MHz
communications
equipment 28 V/m 28 V/m
IEC61000-4-3 810 MHz, 870 MHz,
930 MHz, 1720 MHz,
1845 MHz, 1970 MHz,
2450 MHz (pulse
modulation)
28V/m 28 V/m
450 MHz (FM
modulation)
9V /m 9 V/m
710 MHz, 745 MHz,
780 MHz, 5240 MHz,
5500 MHz, 5785 MHz
Note 1: At 80 MHz to 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
: Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To
assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered.
If the measured field strength in the location in which the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM is used exceeds the applicable
RF compliance level above, the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the ME EQUIPMENT or
ME SYSTEM.
b
: Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3V/m.
B-3
WARNING
• The device is configured with a wireless network connector to receive wireless signal. Other devices
may interfere with this device even though they meet the requirements of CISPR.
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the device
The device is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the device can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the device as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Separation distance in meters (m) according to frequency of the transmitter

Rated maximum
output power of
150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.7 GHz
transmitter (W)
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.20 1.20 2.30
10 3.80 3.80 7.30
100 12.00 12.00 23.00
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres
(m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Note 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
B.2 Radio Regulatory Compliance

RF parameters
Type of Radio IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4G) IEEE 802.11a/n (5G)
Operating Frequency ETSI: 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz ETSI: 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, 5.47 GHz to 5.725 GHz
FCC: 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz FCC: 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, 5.725 GHz to 5.82 GHz
MIC: 2.4 GHz to 2.495GHz MIC: 5.15GHz to 5.35 GHz
KC: 2.4 GHz to 2.483 GHz KC: 5.15 GHz to 5.35 GHz, 5.47 GHz to 5.725 GHz,
5.725 GHz to 5.82 GHz
Modulation Mode DSSS and OFDM OFDM
Output Power < 30 dBm (peak power)

< 20 dBm (average power)
The radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
B-4
WARNING
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
B-5
C Default Settings
C.1 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings
C.1.1 ECG Default Settings
Item Default Setting
HR/PR Alarm switch On
High limit Adult: 120 bpm

Pediatric: 160 bpm
Neonate: 200 bpm
Low limit Adult: 50 bpm

Pediatric: 75 bpm
Neonate: 100 bpm
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Alarm Source Auto
ECG1 II
ECG2 (5-lead, 6-lead, 12-lead) V, Va, V1
Va (for 6-lead only) Va
Vb(for 6-lead only) Vb
ECG Gain ×1
Speed 25 mm/sec
Filter
OR: Surgery
CCU: Diagnostic
Other departments: Monitor
High FreqCut-off (for 12-lead analysis) 35 Hz
Notch Filter On
Lead Set Auto
Smart Lead On
Baseline Drift Removal (for 12-lead only) On
Waveform Layout (for 12-lead only) Standard
CrozFusion On
CrozFusion Display Off
QRS Volume
General, OR: 2
Other department: 0
QRS Threshold 0.16 mV
Paced Adult: Unspecified

Pediatric/Neonate: No
Pacer Reject Off
C-1
C.1.2 Arrhythmia Default Settings
C.1.2.1 Arrhythmia Alarm Default Settings
Item Alarm Switch Priority Alarm Outputs
Asystole On High, unadjustable Off
V-Fib/V-Tach On High, unadjustable Off
V-Tach On High, unadjustable Off
Vent Brady On High, unadjustable Off
Extreme Tachy On High, unadjustable Off
Extreme Brady On High, unadjustable Off
R on T Med Off
CCU: On
Other departments: Off
Run PVCs Off Low Off
Couplet Off Prompt Off
Multiform PVC Off Med Off
PVC Off Prompt Off
Bigeminy Med Off

CCU: On
Trigeminy Med Off

CCU: On
Tachy Off Med Off
Brady Off Med Off
Pacer Not Capture Off Prompt Off
Pacer Not Pacing Off Prompt Off
Missed Beats Off Prompt Off
Nonsus V-Tach Med Off

CCU: On
Vent Rhythm Med Off

CCU: On
Pause Off Low Off
Irr. Rhythm Off Prompt Off
A-Fib Off Prompt Off
PVCs/min Med Off

CCU: On
Pauses/min Med Off

CCU: On
C-2
C.1.2.2 Arrhythmia Threshold Default Settings
Item Adult Pediatric Neonate
Asystole Delay 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec
Tachy 120 bpm 160 bpm 200 bpm
Brady 50 bpm 75 bpm 100 bpm
Extreme Tachy 160 bpm 180 bpm 220 bpm
Extreme Brady 35 bpm 50 bpm 60 bpm
Multiform PVCs Window 15 beats 15 beats 15 beats
PVCs/min 10 10 10
Pause/min 8 8 8
Pause Threshold 2.0 sec 2.0 sec 2.0 sec
AF/Irr Rhy End Time 2 min 2 min 2 min
V-Tach Rate 130 bpm 130 bpm 160 bpm
V Brady Rate 40 bpm 40 bpm 40 bpm
V-Tach PVCs 6 6 6
V-Brady PVCs 5 5 5
C.1.3 ST Default Settings
ST Alarm Mode Absolute
ST-I, ST-II, ST-III, ST-aVR, ST-aVL, ST-aVF, ST-V1, ST- Alarm switch Off
V2, ST-V3, ST-V4, ST-V5,ST-V6, ST-Va, ST-Vb (ST
Alarm Mode set to Absolute) High limit 0.2 mV
Low limit -0.2 mV
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
ST Single, Alarm switch Off

ST Dual (ST Alarm Mode set to Relative)
High limit 0.1 mV
Low limit -0.1 mV
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
ST Analysis Off
ST Segment Auto
Show Marker Off
ST Point J+60 ms
Auto Adjust On
J 48
ISO -80
C-3
C.1.4 QT Default Settings
QTc Alarm switch Off
High limit Adult: 500

Pediatric: 480
Neonate: 460
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
ΔQTc Alarm switch Off
High limit 60
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
QT Analysis Off
QT Lead All
C.1.5 Glasgow 12-lead ECG Algorithm Default Settings
Filter Diagnostic
Baseline Drift Removal On
Tachy 100
Brady 50
Waveform Layout Standard
Median Complex Off
Measurements On
Interpretation On
Interpretation Summary On
Auto Interval 10 mm/mV
Speed 25 mm/sec
Auto Interval Off
12-Lead Format 3×4+1
Rhythm Lead 1 II
Rhythm Lead 2 V2
Rhythm Lead 3 V5
C-4
C.2 Respiration Default Settings
RR Alarm switch On

Pediatric: 30
Neonate: 100
Low limit Adult: 8

Pediatric: 8
Neonate: 30
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Apnea Alarm switch On
Priority High, unadjustable
Alarm Outputs Off
Apnea Delay Adult: 20 sec

Pediatric: 20 sec
Neonate: 15 sec
RR Source Auto
Resp Lead Adult: Auto

Pediatric: Auto
Neonate: II
Gain ×2
Speed 6.25 mm/s
Auto Threshold Detection On
C.3 SpO2 Default Settings

SpO2 Alarm switch On
High limit Adult: 100%

Pediatric: 100%
Neonate: 95%
Low limit 90%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
SpO2 Desat Alarm switch On
Low limit 80%
Priority High
Alarm Outputs Off
Satsecond (for Nellcor SpO2) Off
NIBP Simul Off
Display PI (for MasimoSpO2) Off
Speed 25 mm/s
C-5
PR Alarm switch On

Pediatric: 160
Neonate: 200
Low limit Adult: 50

Pediatric: 75
Neonate: 100
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Alarm Source Auto
PR Source Auto
QRS Volume
General, OR: 2
Other departments: 0
Display PR
OR: On
C.4 Temperature Default Settings

TXX Alarm switch On

(XX refers to
temperature site) High limit 38.0 °C
Low limit 35.0 °C
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
ΔT Alarm switch On
High limit 2.0 °C
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
C.5 NIBP Default Settings

NIBP-S Alarm switch On
High limit Adult: 160 mmHg

Pediatric: 120 mmHg
Neonate: 90 mmHg
Low limit Adult: 90 mmHg

Pediatric: 70 mmHg
Neonate: 40 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
C-6
NIBP-D Alarm switch On

Pediatric: 70 mmHg
Neonate: 60 mmHg

Pediatric: 40 mmHg
Neonate: 20 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
NIBP-M Alarm switch On

Pediatric: 90 mmHg
Neonate: 70 mmHg

Pediatric: 50 mmHg
Neonate: 25 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
NIBP-S Extreme Alarm switch

ICU, OR, CCU: On

Pediatric: 130 mmHg
Neonate: 95 mmHg

Pediatric: 60 mmHg
Neonate: 35 mmHg
Priority High
Alarm Outputs Off
NIBP-D Extreme Alarm switch

ICU, OR, CCU: On

Pediatric: 80 mmHg
Neonate: 65 mmHg

Pediatric: 30 mmHg
Neonate: 15 mmHg
Priority High
Alarm Outputs Off
C-7
NIBP-M Extreme Alarm switch

ICU, OR, CCU: On

Pediatric: 100 mmHg
Neonate: 75 mmHg

Pediatric: 40 mmHg
Neonate: 20 mmHg
Priority High
Alarm Outputs Off
Initial Pressure Adult: 160 mmHg

Pediatric: 140 mmHg
Neonate: 90 mmHg
Interval
OR: 5 min
NICU: 30 min
Other departments: 15 min
Start Mode Clock
NIBP End Tone Off
Venipuncture Pressure Auto
Display Format Sys/Dia (Mean)
Nighttime Start Time 22:00
End 07:00
Alarm Limit Display

ICU, OR, CCU: Off
Other departments: On
C-8
C.6 IBP Default Settings
IBP-S Alarm switch On
High limit ■ Art/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure

Adult: 160 mmHg
Pediatric: 120 mmHg
Neonate: 90 mmHg
■ PA
Adult: 35 mmHg
Pediatric, Neonate: 60 mmHg
Low limit ■ Art/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P3/P4 arterial pressure

Adult: 90 mmHg
Pediatric: 70 mmHg
Neonate: 55 mmHg
■ PA
Adult: 10 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
IBP-D Alarm switch On
High limit ■ Art/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1-P4 arterial pressure

Adult: 90 mmHg
Pediatric: 70 mmHg
Neonate: 60 mmHg
■ PA
Adult: 16 mmHg
Low limit ■ Art/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1-P4 arterial pressure

Adult: 50 mmHg
Pediatric: 40 mmHg
Neonate: 20 mmHg
■ PA
Adult: 0 mmHg
Pediatric, Neonate: -4 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
C-9
IBP-M Alarm switch On
High limit ■ Art/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1-P2 arterial pressure

Adult: 110 mmHg
Pediatric: 90 mmHg
Neonate: 70 mmHg
■ PA
Adult: 20 mmHg
■ ICP/RAP/LAP/UVP/P3-P4 venous pressure
Adult: 10 mmHg
■ CVP
Adult: 14 mmHg
Low limit ■ Art/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1-P4 arterial pressure

Adult: 70 mmHg
Pediatric: 50 mmHg
Neonate: 35 mmHg
■ PA
Adult: 0 mmHg
■ CVP/ICP/RAP/LAP/UVP/P1-P4 venous pressure
Adult: 0 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Art-S Extreme Alarm switch Off

Pediatric: 130 mmHg
Neonate: 95 mmHg

Pediatric: 60 mmHg
Neonate: 50 mmHg
Priority High
Alarm Outputs Off
Art-D Extreme Alarm switch Off

Pediatric: 80 mmHg
Neonate: 65 mmHg
Low limit Adult: 35mmHg

Pediatric: 30 mmHg
Neonate: 15 mmHg
Priority High
Alarm Outputs Off
C - 10
Art-M Extreme Alarm switch Off

Pediatric: 100 mmHg
Neonate: 75 mmHg

Pediatric: 40 mmHg
Neonate: 30 mmHg
Priority High
Alarm Outputs Off
CPP Alarm switch On

Pediatric: 100 mmHg
Neonate: 90 mmHg

Pediatric: 40 mmHg
Neonate: 30 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Measure (for P1, P2) All
Measure (for P3, P4) Mean only
Sensitivity Med
Speed 25 mm/sec
Scale (mmHg) ICP/RAP/LAP/UVP 0-20

venous pressure
Art/Ao/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/ 0-160
P2 arterial pressure
UAP/P3/P4 venous 0-80

pressure
PA/CVP 0-30
PPV Measure Off
PPV Source Auto
PAWP Reference Waveform 1 II
Reference Waveform 2 Resp
Speed 12.5 mm/sec
PA Scale (mmHg) 0-30
Overlapping Left Scale (mmHg) 0-160

Waveform Setup
Right Scale (mmHg) 0-20
CVP Scale (mmHg) 0-30
ICP Scale (mmHg) 0-20
PA Scale (mmHg) 0-30
Speed 25 mm/sec
Gridlines Off
Display Format Sys/Dia (Mean)
C - 11
Alarm Limit Display On
Use PA-D as PAWP Off
C.7 C.O. Default Settings

TB Alarm switch On
High limit 39.0 °C
Low limit 36.0 °C
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Comp const 0.542
Auto Start On
Auto TI On
C.8 CO2 Default Settings
C.8.1 General Settings
EtCO2 Alarm switch On
High limit Adult, Pediatric: 50 mmHg

Neonate: 45 mmHg
Low limit Adult, Pediatric: 25mmHg

Neonate: 30mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiCO2 Alarm switch On
High limit 4 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Apnea Delay Adult, Pediatric: 20 s

Neonate: 15 s
RR Source Auto
Speed 6.25 mm/s
Scale 50 mmHg
Waveform Type Draw
C - 12
C.8.2 Sidestream CO2 Default Settings
EtO2 Alarm switch On
High limit 100%
Low limit 18%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiO2 Alarm switch On
High limit Adult, Pediatric: 100%

Neonate: 90%
Low limit 18%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
BTPS Compensation Off
O2 Compensation 0%
AG Compensation 0%
N2O Compenation 0%
Auto Standby 60 min
Operating Mode Measure
C.8.3 Microstream CO2 Default Settings
BTPS Compen Off
Maximum Hold 20 sec
Auto Standby Off
C.8.4 Mainstream CO2 Default Settings
Maximum Hold 10 sec
O2 Compensation Off
Balance Gas Room Air
AG Compensation 0%
C - 13
C.9 Gas Default Settings
EtCO2 Alarm switch On
High limit Adult, Pediatric: 50 mmHg

Neonate: 45 mmHg
Low limit Adult, Pediatric: 25mmHg

Neonate: 30mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiCO2 Alarm switch On
High limit 4 mmHg
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
EtO2 Alarm switch On
High limit 100%
Low limit 18%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiO2 Alarm switch On
High limit Adult, Pediatric: 100%

Neonate: 90%
Low limit 18%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
EtN2O Alarm switch On
High limit 55%
Low limit 0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiN2O Alarm switch On
High limit 53%
Low limit 0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
EtAA/FiAA Alarm switch On
High limit 30%
Low limit 0.0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
C - 14
EtHal/EtEnf/EtIso Alarm switch On
High limit 3.0%
Low limit 0.0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiHal/FiEnf/FiIso Alarm switch On
High limit 2.0%
Low limit 0.0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
EtSev Alarm switch On
High limit 6.0%
Low limit 0.0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiSev Alarm switch On
High limit 5.0%
Low limit 0.0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
EtDes Alarm switch On
High limit 8.0%
Low limit 0.0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
FiDes Alarm switch On
High limit 6.0%
Low limit 0.0%
Priority Med
Alarm Outputs Off
Apnea Delay Adult, Pediatric: 20 sec

Neonate: 15 sec
RR Source Auto
Auto Standby Off
Speed 6.25 mm/sec
C - 15
Scale O2: 400 mmHg

CO2: 50 mmHg
N2O: 50%
Hal, Enf, and Iso: 2.5%
Sev: 4.0%
AA and Des: 9.0%
Waveform Type Draw (for CO2 only)
O2 compensation OR: 100%

C.10 Alarm Default Settings

Alarm Volume 2
High Alarm Volume Alarm Volume + 3
Reminder Volume 2
Apnea Delay Adult: 20 sec

Pediatric: 20 sec
Neonate: 15 sec
Printing Duration 20 sec
C.11 Display Default Settings

Primary Screen Choose Screen Normal Screen
Display Screen Lock Duration

General, CCU: Permanent
Brightness 5
Brightness On Battery 1
Night Mode Brightness 1
Alarm Volume 2
QRS Volume 1
Key Volume 0
NIBP End Tone Off
Stop NIBP Off
C - 16
D Alarm Messages
D.1 Physiological Alarm Messages

This section lists physiological alarms, their default priority, and the actions that can be taken when an alarm
occurs.
D.1.1 General Physiological Alarm Messages
Alarm messages Default priority Cause and solution
XX High Med XX value has risen above the high alarm limit or fallen below the low
alarm limit. Check the patient’s condition and check if the patient
XX Low Med category and alarm limit settings are correct.
Note: XX represents a measurement or parameter label, such as HR, NIBP, PVCs, RR, SpO2, PR, and so on.
D.1.2 Arrhythmia Alarm Messages
Alarm message Default priority
Asystole High
VFib/VTac High
Vtac High
Vent Brady High
Extreme Tachy High
Extreme Brady High
PVCs/min Med
Pauses/min Med
R on T Med
Bigeminy Med
Trigeminy Med
Tachy Med
Brady Med
Multiform PVC Med
Vent. Rhythm Med
Nonsus. Vtac Med
Run PVCs Low
Pause Low
Couplet Prompt
PVC Prompt
Irr Rhythm Prompt
Pacer Not Pacing Prompt
Pacer Not Capture Prompt
D-1
Alarm message Default priority
Missed Beats Prompt
A-Fib Prompt
Note: When arrhythmia alarms occur, check the patient’s condition and the ECG connections.
D.1.3 Resp Physiological Alarm Messages
Alarm message Default priority Cause and solution
Resp Aritifact High The patient’s heartbeat has interfered with his respiration. Check the
patient’s condition and the Resp connections.
Apnea High The respiration signal was so weak that the monitor cannot perform
respiration analysis. Check the patient’s condition, module and patient
connections.
D.1.4 SpO2 Physiological Alarm Messages
SpO2 Desat High The SpO2 value falls below the desaturation alarm limit. Check the
patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit settings are correct.
D.1.5 PR Physiological Alarm Messages
No Pulse High The pulse signal was so weak that the monitor cannot perform pulse
analysis. Check the patient’s condition, SpO2 sensor and measurement
site.
D.1.6 NIBP Physiological Alarm Messages
NIBP-S/NIBP-D/NIBP-M High The NIBP value is higher than the NIBP Extreme alarm high limit. Check
Extremely High the patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit settings are correct.
NIBP-S/NIBP-D/NIBP-M High The NIBP value is lower than the NIBP Extreme alarm low limit. Check
Extremely Low the patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit settings are correct.
D.1.7 IBP Physiological Alarm Messages
Art-S/Art-D/Art-M High The Art value is higher than the Art Extreme alarm high limit. Check the
Extremely High patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit settings are correct.
Art-S/Art-D/Art-M High The Art value is lower than the Art Extreme alarm low limit. Check the
Extremely Low patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit settings are correct.
D-2
D.1.8 CO2 Physiological Alarm Messages
FiO2 Shortage High FiO2 concentration is less than18%. Check the patient’s condition, the
ventilated O2 content and the CO2 connection.
D.1.9 AG Physiological Alarm Messages
FiO2 Shortage High Check the patient’s condition, the ventilated O2 content and the AG
connections.
Mixed Agent and MAC≥3 Med The mixed anaesthetic gases concentration is too high. Adjust the
anaesthetic gases concentration.
Apnea High The respiration signal was so weak that the monitor cannot perform
respiration analysis. Check the patient’s condition, module and patient
connections.
D.1.10 EWS Physiological Alarm Messages
EWS Score High/Mediate The total score exceeds the configured alarm limit. Check the patient
condition.
XX score is 3 Mediate The parameter score is 3. Check the patient condition.
XX represents RR, SpO2, Temp, BP-S, BP-D, BP-M, HR, EtCO2, FiO2.
D.2 Technical Alarm Messages

This section lists technical alarms, their default priority, indication on alarm reset, and the actions that can be
taken when an alarm occurs.
Technical alarms give different alarm indicators when the alarm system is reset. In this section we classify the
technical alarms into three categories for easy clarification:
■ A: technical alarms are cleared. The monitor gives no alarm indications.
■ B: technical alarms are changed to the prompt messages.
■ C: the alarm is silenced and a √ appears before the alarm message, indicating that the alarm is
acknowledged.
In the following tables we will use A, B, and C to refer to the indications on alarm reset.
D.2.1 General Technical Alarm Messages
Alarm message Default priority Indication on Cause and solution

alarm reset
XX Module Error High C XX module does not work properly. Replug the
module, if the alarm persists, contact your service
personnel.
Note: XX represents a measurement or parameter label, such as HR, RR, SpO2, EtCO2, and so on.
D-3
D.2.2 ECG Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
ECG Noisy Low/Prompt A The ECG signal is noisy. Check for any possible
sources of signal noise around the cable and
electrode, and check the patient for excessive
motion.
ECG Amplitude Too Small Low C The ECG amplitude does not reach the detected
threshold. Check for any possible source of
interference around the cable and electrode.
ECG Lead Off High, Med, or B The electrode has become detached from the
Low, patient or the lead wire has become
configurable disconnected from the adapter cable. Check the
connections of the electrodes and leadwires.
ECG XX Lead Off High, Med, or B The electrode has become detached from the
Low, patient or the lead wire has become
configurable disconnected from the adapter cable. Check the
connections of the electrodes and leadwires.
ECG Signal Invalid Low A Patient skin impedance is too high. Check ECG
electrode application.
ECG Learning Prompt / ECG learning is manually or automatically

triggered.
Cannot Analyze QT Prompt / /
Note: XX represents ECG lead name, for example RL, LL, V, Va, Vb, and so on.
D.2.3 Resp Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
Resp Interference Prompt / The respiration circuit is disturbed. Check for any
possible sources of signal noise.
Electrode Poor Contact Prompt / Check the electrode application. Reposition or

replace the electrodes if necessary.
D.2.4 SpO2 Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
SpO2 Sensor Off Adjustable B The SpO2 sensor has become detached from the
patient or the module. Check the sensor
connection. If the alarm persists, replace the
sensor.
SpO2 No Sensor Low A The SpO2 extension cable is detached from the
SpO2 module, or the SpO2 sensor is detached
from the SpO2 extension cable. Check the SpO2
cable and the sensor connection. If the alarm
persists, replace the sensor.
SpO2 Excess Light Low C Ambient light is too strong. Move the sensor to a
place with lower level of ambient light or cover
the sensor to minimize the ambient light.
D-4
alarm reset
SpO2 No Pulse Low C The SpO2 sensor failed to obtain pulse signal.
Check the patient’s condition and replace the
sensor application site. If the alarm persists,
replace the sensor.
SpO2 Sensor Low C Incompatible or an unspecified SpO2 sensor is

Incompatible used. Use specified sensors.
SpO2 Low Signal Quality Low C 1. Check the sensor and sensor position.
2. Make sure the patient is not shivering or
moving.
3. The patient’s pulse may be too low to be
measured.
SpO2 Interference Low C The SpO2 signal has been interfered. Check for
any possible sources of signal noise and check
the patient for excessive motion.
SpO2 Sensor Error Low C Replace the sensor and measure again.
SpO2 Searching Pulse Prompt / SpO2 is searching for pulse.
SpO2 Low Perfusion Prompt / The SpO2 sensor is not properly placed or the
patient’s perfusion index is too low.
1. Check the sensor and sensor position.
2. Reposition the sensor if necessary.
D.2.5 Temp Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
T XX Sensor Off Low A Check the sensor connection and reconnect the
sensor.
Note: XX represents a temperature site, for example skin, core, axil, T1, and so on.
D.2.6 NIBP Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
NIBP Cuff Loose Low A There is a leak in the cuff or air tubing. Use a cuff
of correct type based on the patient size. Apply
the cuff and connect the air tubing as instructed
in the manual.
NIBP Cuff or Airway Leak Low A Check the NIBP cuff and pump for leakages.
NIBP Airway Error Low A The air tubing may be occluded. Check the air
tubing for an occlusion or kinking. If the alarm
persists, contact your service personnel.
NIBP Weak Signal Low A The patient’s pulse is weak or the cuff is loose.
Check the patient’s condition and replace the cuff
application site.
NIBP Overrange Low A The measured NIBP value exceeds the module
measurement range. Check the patient’s
condition.
NIBP Excessive Motion Low A Check the patient’s condition and reduce patient
motion.
D-5
alarm reset
NIBP Cuff Overpressure Low A The NIBP airway may be occluded. Check the
airway and measure again. If the alarm persists,
contact your service personnel.
NIBP Timeout Low A The measurement time exceeds 120 seconds in

the adult or pediatric mode, or exceeds 90
seconds in the neonatal mode, and the BP value
cannot be obtained. Check the patient’s
condition and NIBP connections, or replace the
cuff and measure again.
NIBP Cuff and Patient Low A The cuff type mismatches the patient category.
Mismatch Verify the patient category or replace the cuff if
necessary. If patient catergory is correct, check
that the tubing is not bent and the airway is not
occluded.
NIBP Airway Leak Low A Airway leakage is found during the NIBP leakage
test. Check the NIBP cuff and pump for leakages.
D.2.7 IBP Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
XX Sensor Error Med C The IBP sensor fails. Replace the sensor.
XX No Sensor High, Med, or A The IBP patient cable and/or corresponding IBP
Low, sensor is not connected or detached. Check the
configurable cable and sensor connection.
XX No Pulse Low A The catheter may be occluded. Please flush the

catheter.
XX Disconnected High C The liquid way is disconnected from the patient,

or the three-way valve is open to the air. Check
the connection of the liquid way, or check the
valve is open to the patient. If the alarm persists,
Note: XX represents an IBP label, for example PA, CVP, FAP, P1, and so on.
D.2.8 C.O. Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
TB Sensor Off Low A Check the sensor connection and reconnect the
sensor.
TI Sensor Off Low A Check the sensor connection and reconnect the
sensor.
D-6
D.2.9 CO2 Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
CO2 Module High Temp Low C Ambient temperature is too high or there is a
module failure.
1. Lower the operating temperature.
2. Replug the module.
3. If the alarm persists, the CO2 module may fail,
CO2 Module Low Temp Low C Ambient temperature is too low or there is a
module failure.
1. Raise the operating temperature.
3. If the alarm persists, the CO2 module may fail,
CO2 Zero Failed Low C For mainstream CO2 module, check the
connections between the adapter and CO2
transducer. Wait till the sensor’s temperature
becomes stabilized, and then perform a zero
calibration again.
For sidestream CO2 module, replug the module. If
the alarm persists, contact your service
personnel.
CO2 No Watertrap Low B Check the watertrap connections.
CO2 High Airway Pressure Low C 1. Check the airway pressure settings of the
ventilator/anesthesia machine.
2. Disconnect the module from the ventilator/
anesthesia machine.
4. If the alarm persists, contact your service
personnel.
CO2 Low Airway Pressure Low C 1. Check the airway pressure settings of the
ventilator/anesthesia machine.
2. Disconnect the module from the ventilator/
anesthesia machine.
personnel.
CO2 High Barometric Low C The ambient pressure exceeds the operating
pressure range or CO2 module fails.
1. Make sure that the ambient pressure meets the
specifications, and check for sources that affect
the ambient pressure.
personnel.
CO2 Low Barometric Low C The ambient pressure exceeds the operating
pressure range or CO2 module fails.
1. Make sure that the ambient pressure meets the
specifications, and check for sources that affect
the ambient pressure.
personnel.
D-7
alarm reset
CO2 Airway Occluded Low C 1. Check if the sample line is kinked or occluded.
2. Replace the sample line.
personnel.
CO2 No Filterline Low A Make sure that the filterline is connected.
CO2 Calibration Required Low C Perform a calibration.
CO2 Airway Error Low C 1. Check if the sample line is kinked or occluded.
2. Replace the sample line.
personnel.
CO2 Adapter Error Low A Check, clean or replace the airway adapter.
Perform a zero calibration.
CO2 No Sensor Low A Make sure that the CO2 transducer is connected.
CO2: Change Watertrap Low C Replace the watertrap.
CO2 Watertrap and Low C Check the patient category and use a correct
Patient Mismatch watertrap.
CO2: Change O2 Cell Low C The oxygen sesnor is depleted or fails. Replace
the oxygen sensor.
D.2.10 AG Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
AG No Watertrap Low B Check the connections of the watertrap and re-

connect it.
AG: Change Watertrap Low C Replace the watertrap.
AG Watertrap and Patient Low C Check the patient category and use a correct
Mismatch watertrap.
AG Zero Failed Low C There is external electromagnetic interference,

airway occlusion or module failure.
1. Check for external inference sources.
2. Check for “AG Airway Occluded” alarm
message. Remove the occlusion.
personnel.
Anesthetic Mixture Low C Anesthetic mixture is detected.
AG Airway Occluded Low C 1. Check if the sample line is occluded.

2. Check the sample line.
personnel.
Note: XX represents BIS label, for example G, C, LE, LT, RL-RA, L-R, F-R, 1, 2, and so on.
D-8
D.2.11 EWS Technical Alarms
Indication on
alarm reset
EWS param XX is timeout Low A The manually input parameter is timeout. Input a
parameter numeric again.
EWS score needs to be Low A Confirm to save or give up current score.

confirmed
XX represents RR, SpO2, Supp. O2, Temp, BP, HR, Consciousness, Blood Sugar, Urine Output, Catheter, Pain
Score, Pain, EtCO2, FiO2, Airway, or Customer defined parameter.
D.2.12 Power Supply Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
Low Battery Med C Connect the monitor to the external power

supply and allow the batteries to charge.
Critically Low Battery High C Connect the monitor to the external power
supply and allow the batteries to charge.
Power Board Comm Error High C Restart the monitor. If the alarm persists, contact
your service personnel.
Battery Error High C The battery may fail. Contact your service
personnel.
RT Clock Need Reset High C Contact your service personnel.
RT Clock Not Exist High C Contact your service personnel.
XX V Too High High C There is a problem with the system power supply.
Restart the monitor.
XX V Too Low High C
Note: XX represents 2.5 V, 3.3 V,5 V, or 12 V.
D.2.13 Recorder Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
Recorder Init Error Low A An error occurred during the recorder

initialization. If the alarm persists, contact your
service personnel.
Recorder Comm Error Low A Restart the monitor if not solved. If the alarm
persists, contact your service personnel.
Recorder Head Hot Low C The recorder has been working for too long time.
Stop the recording and resume the recording till
the recorder’s print head cools down.
Recorder Initializing Prompt / Wait until the recorder initialization is completed.
Recorder out of Paper Prompt / The recorder paper is not loaded or the recorder
door is not closed. Check the recorder, load the
recorder paper or close the recorder door.
Recorder Busy Prompt / The buffer queue for recording is full.
D-9
D.2.14 Printer Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
Printer Buffer Full Prompt / The printer buffer is full. Wait till the printer
finishes the printing task.
Fail Prompt / The printer runs out of paper or cannot be

connected. Check the printer.
Printing Stopped Prompt / Printing is manually stopped.
Printer Unavailable Prompt / The printer may fail. Check the printer.
PDF storage space is Prompt / Delete the files saved under the PDF file path to
nearly full release storage space. Otherwise you cannot save
new PDF files.
Error storing PDF file Prompt / The PDF file path settings on the printer server
and the PDFCreator are not consistent or the PDF
storage space is full. Check the PDF file path
settings for consistency, or delete the files saved
under the PDF file path to release storage space.
Change the print server Prompt / Verify that the language settings of the printer
language to be consistent server and the monitor are consistent, Otherwise
with this monitor you cannot perform printing.
Print Server Disconnected Prompt / Check that the monitor is properly connected
with the printer server.
D.2.15 Technical Alarm Messages Related to Networked Monitoring

alarm reset
No CMS Low B The monitor is disconnected from the CMS.

Check the network connection.
View Bed XX YY-ZZ, Low A The network is interrupted when the monitor is
Network Disconnected. viewing the remote device. Check the network
connection.
Viewed by Bed XX YY-ZZ, Low A The network is interrupted when the monitor is
Network Disconnected. viewed by another remote device. Check the
network connection.
WLAN IP Address Conflict Low C Wireless network IP network conflicts. Check the
network settings.
LAN1 IP Address Conflict Low C Wired network LAN1 IP network conflicts. Check
the network settings.
Fail To Get WLAN IP Low C Unable to automatically obtain the wireless

Address network IP address. Check the network settings.
Fail To Get LAN1 IP Low C Unable to automatically obtain the wired

Address network LAN1 IP address. Check the network
settings.
Note: XX refers to the department name, YY refers to the room number, and ZZ refers to the bed number.
D - 10
D.2.16 Other System Technical Alarm Messages

alarm reset
Storage Card Error High C The storage card fails or files are damaged.
Restart the monitor to format the storage card. If
the alarm persists, contact your service
personnel.
Loading Default Config Low A The default configuration is not correctly loaded.
Failed The monitor will restore to the factory default
configuration for the current patient category.
XX Conflicts Prompt / The same type of corresponding module being

(XX refers to the module used exceeds the supported number. Remove
label) the conflict module.
XXX Measurement has Prompt / The parameter module is disabled. Switch on the
been closed module if you want to use it. For more
(XX refers to the module information, see 3.11.1 Switching On or Off a
label) Parameter.
The display setup for XXX Prompt / The parameter of the newly inserted module is
is disabled. not displayed on the screen. Select a desired area
(XX refers to the to display the parameter numerics and
parameter label) waveforms. For more information, see 25.11 The
Other Settings.
The patient data storage Configurable B Delete unnecessary earlier discharged patient.
space is nearly full. Please
delete some discharged
patients.
D - 11
E SpO2 Sensor Accuracy
E.1 The Accuracy of Masimo SpO2 Sensors

Table information for the plots below show ARMS values measured with Masimo SET Oximetry Technology in a
clinical study.
Adtx/Pdtx/4000/4001
Inf/Neo/NeoPt/4002/4003/4004/4005
E-1
DCI/DCIP/4050/4051
LNCS YI
4053
E-2
E.2 The Accuracy of Nellcor SpO2 Sensors
SpO2 Accuracy for Nellcor Sensors vs. Co-Oximeters (Arms)
SpO2 Range 100% to 70% 100% to 90% 90% to 80% 80% to 70%
DS-100A 1.64% 1.16% 1.67% 2.25%
D-YS, OXI-P/I, OXI-A/N 2.41% 1.38% 2.50% 3.60%
MAXAI, MAXPI, MAXII 1.62% 1.49% 1.57% 2.50%
MAXNI 1.85% 1.71% 1.51% 1.59%
Modified Bland-Altman for SpO2 - MAXAI, MAXPI, MAXII, MAXNI Sensors: (SpO2 - SaO2)
vs.SaO2
Modified Bland-Altman for SpO2 - DS-100A Sensors: (SpO2 - SaO2) vs.SaO2
E-3
Modified Bland-Altman for SpO2 - D-YS, OXI-A/N, OXI-P/I Sensors: (SpO2 - SaO2) vs.SaO2
E-4
F Units, Symbols and Abbreviations
F.1 Units
Abbreviation In Full
μA microampere
μV microvolt
μs microsecond
A Ampere
Ah Ampere hour
bpm beat per minute
bps bits per second
°C Celsius
cc cubic centimeter
cm centimeter
dB decibel
DS dyne second
°F Fahrenheit
g gram
GHz gigahertz
GTT gutta
h hour
Hz hertz
in inch
k kilo
kg kilogram
kPa kilopascal
L litre
lb pound
m meter
mAh milliampere hour
mcg microgram
mEq milli-equivalents
mg milligram
min minute
ml milliliter
mm millimeter
mmHg millimeters of mercury
F-1
cmH2O centimeters of water
ms millisecond
mV millivolt
mW milliwatt
MΩ megaohm
nm nanometer
rpm breaths per minute
s second
V volt
VA volt ampere
Ω ohm
W watt
F.2 Symbols
Symbol Explanation
– negative, minus
% percent
/ per; divide; or
～ to
＋ plus
＝ equal to
＜ less than
＞ greater than
≤ less than or equal to
≥ greater than or equal to
± plus or minus
× multiply
© copyright
F-2
F.3 Abbreviations
AaDO2 alveolar-arterial oxygen gradient
AC alternating current
ACI acceleration index
Adu adult
AG anaesthesia gas
AHA American Heart Association
Ao aortic pressure
Art arterial
ATMP barometric pressure
AUC area under the curve
Avg rSO2 average
aVF left foot augmented lead
aVL left arm augmented lead
aVR right arm augmented lead
awRR airway respiratory rate
BAP brachial arterial pressure
BC burst count
BL baseline
BoA Balance of Anesthesia
BSA body surface area
BT blood temperature
BTPS body temperature and pressure, saturated
CAA Clinical Assistive Application
CaO2 arterial oxygen content
CCF CPR quality index
CCI continuous cardiac index
CCO continuous cardiac output
CCU cardiac (coronary) care unit
CE Conformité Européenne
CFI cardiac function index
C.I. cardiac index
CIS clinical information system
CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference
CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
CMS central monitoring system
C.O. cardiac output
CO2 carbon dioxide
F-3
COHb carboxyhemoglobin
Compl compliance
COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
CPI cardiac power index
CQI CPR quality index
CPO cardiac power output
CVP central venous pressure
DC direct current
Des desflurane
Dia diastolic
dpi dot per inch
dPmx left ventricular contractility
DVI digital video interface
DO2 oxygen delivery
DO2I oxygen delivery index
ECG electrocardiograph
EDV end-diastolic volume
EE energy expenditure
EEC European Economic Community
EEG electroencephalogram
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EMG electromyograph
EMI electromagnetic interference
Enf enflurane
ESV end systolic volume
ESVI end systolic volume index
ESU electrosurgical unit
Et end-tidal
EtAA end-tidal anesthetic agent
EtDes end-tidal anesthetic agent
EtEnf
EtHal
EtIso
EtSev
EtCO2 end-tidal carbon dioxide
EtN2O end-tidal nitrous oxide
EtO ethylene oxide
EtO2 end-tidal oxygen
EVLW extravascular lung water
F-4
ELWI extravascular lung water index
EWS Early Warning Score
FAP femoral arterial pressure
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FDA Food and Drug Administration
Fi fraction of inspired
FiAA inspired anesthetic agent
FiDes inspired anesthetic agent
FiEnf
FiHal
FiIso
FiSev
FiCO2 fraction of inspired carbon oxygen
FiN2O fraction of inspired nitrous oxide
FiO2 fraction of inspired oxygen
FPGA field programmable gate array
FV flow-volume
GCS Glasgow Coma Scale
GEDV global end diastolic volume
GEDI global end diastolic volume index
GEF global ejection fraction
Hal halothane
Hb hemoglobin
Hct haematocrit
HIS hospital information system
HR heart rate
IBP invasive blood pressure
IBW ideal body weight
ICG impedance cardiography
ICP intracranial pressure
ICT/B intracranial catheter tip pressure transducer
ICU intensive care unit
ID identification
I:E inspiratory time: expiratory time ratio
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IP internet protocol
Iso isoflurane
ITBI intrathoracic blood volume index
F-5
ITBV intrathoracic blood volume
LA left arm
LAP left atrial pressure
LCD liquid crystal display
LCW left cardiac work
LCWI left cardiac work index
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LED light emitting diode
LL left leg
LVET left ventricular ejection time
LVSW left ventricular stroke work
LVSWI left ventricular stroke work index
MAC minimum alveolar concentration
MAP mean arterial pressure
Mb myoglobin
MetHb methemoglobin
MEWS Modified Early Warning Score
MLDAP Mindray LDAP, Mindray lightweight directory access protocol
MRI magnetic resonance imaging
MV minute volume
MVe expiratory minute volume
MVi inspiratory minute volume
N/A not applied
N2 nitrogen
N2O nitrous oxide
Neo neonate
NEWS National Early Warning Score
NIBP noninvasive blood pressure
NIF negative inspiratory force
O2 oxygen
O2% oxygen concentration
OR operating room
OxyCRG oxygen cardio-respirogram
PA pulmonary artery
Paw airway pressure
PAWP pulmonary artery wedge pressure
pCVP central venous pressure
Ped pediatric
PEEP positive end expiratory pressure
F-6
PEF peak expiratory flow
PEP pre-ejection period
PIF peak inspiratory flow
PIP peak inspiratory pressure
Pleth plethysmogram
Pmean mean pressure
PO2 oxygen supply pressure
Pplat plateau pressure
PPV pulse pressure variation
PR pulse rate
PVC premature ventricular contraction
PVPI pulmonary vascular permeability index
PVR pulmonary vascular resistance
PVRI pulmonary vascular resistance index
qSOFA quick Sepsis-Related Organ Failure Assessment
RA right arm
RAP right atrial pressure
Raw airway resistance
Rec record, recording
Resp respiration
RL right leg
RM respiratory mechanics
RQ respiratory quotient
RR respiration rate
RSBI rapid shallow breathing index
RVEF right ventricular ejection fraction
rSO2 regional oxygen saturation
SaO2 arterial oxygen saturation
ScvO2 central venous oxygen saturation
SEF spectral edge frequency
Sev sevoflurane
SI stroke index
SlopeCO2 Slope of the alveolar plateau
SMR satellite module rack
SOFA Sepsis-Related Organ Failure Assessment
SpO2 arterial oxygen saturation from pulse oximetry
SQI signal quality index
SR suppression ratio
SSC Surviving Sepsis Campaign
F-7
SSI signal strength index
STR systolic time ratio
SV stroke volume
SVI stroke volume index
SVR systemic vascular resistance
SVRI systemic vascular resistance index
SVV stroke volume variation
SvO2 venous oxygen saturation
Sync synchronization
Sys systolic pressure
TB blood temperature
tcpCO2 transcutaneous carbon dioxide partial pressures
tcpO2 transcutaneous oxygen partial pressures
TD temperature difference
Temp temperature
TFC thoracic fluid content
TFI thoracic fluid index
TFT thin-film technology
TI injectate temperature
TP total power
TRC tube resistance compensation
TVe expiratory tidal volume
TVi inspiratory tidal volume
TV tidal volume
UAP umbilical arterial pressure
UPS uninterruptible power supply
USB universal serial bus
UVP umbilical venous pressure
VAC volts alternating current
VCO2 CO2 production for one breath
Vdaw airway dead space
Vdaw/Vt airway dead space to tidal volume ratio
Vdalv alveolar dead space
Vdalv/Vt alveolar dead space to tidal volume ratio
Vdphy physiologic dead space
Vd/Vt dead space to tidal volume ratio
VEPT volume of electrically participating tissue
VI velocity index
VO2 O2 consumption for one breath
F-8
VO2I oxygen consumption index
VPB ventricular premature beat per minute
WOB work of breathing
F-9
Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada license‐exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
modifications or change to this equipment. Such modifications or change could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number or model number if Category II)
has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the
maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater
than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
‐‐ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
‐‐ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
‐‐ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
‐‐ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The device has been evaluated to meet general RF exposure requirement.
To maintain compliance with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, this equipment should be
installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator and your
body.
5G
For 5150-5250, 5250-5350, 5470-5725 and 5725-5850 frequency band,
Operations in the 5150-5250, 5250-5350, 5470-5725 and 5725-5850 band are
restricted to indoor usage only.
5G:
Any emission is maintained within the band of operation under all conditions of
normal operation. The max. frequency stability is less than 20ppm.
Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada license‐exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
modifications or change to this equipment. Such modifications or change could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number or model number if Category II)
has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the
maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater
than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
‐‐ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
‐‐ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
‐‐ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
‐‐ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The device has been evaluated to meet general RF exposure requirement.
To maintain compliance with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, this equipment should be
installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator and your
body.
5G
For 5150-5250, 5250-5350, 5470-5725 and 5725-5850 frequency band,
Operations in the 5150-5250, 5250-5350, 5470-5725 and 5725-5850 band are
restricted to indoor usage only.
5G:
Any emission is maintained within the band of operation under all conditions of
normal operation. The max. frequency stability is less than 20ppm.

Monitor Mindray PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Monitor Mindray PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FCC ID: ZLZ-EPM

Shenzhen Mindray BIO-Medical electronics Co.,LTD.

1.1 Safety Information

1.2 Equipment Symbols

Symbol Description Symbol Description

General warning sign Refer to instruction manual/booklet

Serial number Catalogue number

Date of manufacture Manufacturer

USB connector Protected against vertically falling water

Battery indicator Computer network

Equipotentiality Alternating current

Defibrillation-proof type CF applied part Defibrillation-proof type BF applied part

Stop USB IBP zero key

NIBP start/stop Calibration

Power On/Off Graphical record

Gas outlet Gas inlet

Pushing prohibited Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation

Authorised representative in the European Dispose of in accordance to local

2.1 Indications for Use

2.2 Applied Parts

2.3.1 Main Unit

2.3.1.1 Front View

(6) (5) (4) (3)

(9) (8) (7)

(1) Alarm lamp

◆ High priority alarms: the lamp quickly flashes red.

(3) NIBP Start/Stop hard key

(4) Record Start/Stop key

(5) Alarm Pause hard key

(6) Alarm Reset hard key

(7) Power indicator

(8) Battery indicator

◆ Yellow: the battery is being charged.

(9) Power switch

◆ Pressing this switch turns on the monitor.

2.3.1.2 Left View

(2) (3) (4)

(8) (7) (6)

(1) Temperature probe connector (2) SpO2 probe connector

(3)IBP cable connector (4) ECG cable connector

(5) CO2 watertrap seat (6) NIBP cuff connector

(7) Gas outlet (8) C.O. cable connector

(1) Handle (2) Recorder

2.3.1.4 Rear View

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(1) Alarm lamp

◆ High priority alarms: the lamp quickly flashes red.

(2) AC Power input

(3) Equipotential Grounding Terminal

(5) USB connectors

(6) VGA Connector

(7) Multifunctional Connector

2.3.2 External Modules

2.3.2.1 Available Modules

2.3.2.2 Example Module

(2) Zero hard key: enters the Zero IBP menu.

(3) Module status indicator

◆ On: the module works properly.

(4) Patient cable connectors

2.3.3 Input Devices

2.3.4 Printing Devices

3.1 Equipment Preparation Safety Information

3.2 Monitor Installation